SprinterOperating Instructions

Mercedes-BenzOrder no. 6462 7562 13 Part no. 906 584 94 11 Edition 01-17

É9065849411lËÍ9065849411

Sprin

ter

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mercedes-benz.comhttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-gestions you may have regarding this OperatingInstructions to the technical documentationteam at the address on the inside of the frontcover.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-BenzCanada Inc. are Daimler companies.Not to be reprinted, translated, or otherwisereproduced, in whole or in part, without writtenpermission.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstra e 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsG WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i These symbols indicate useful instructionsor further information that could be helpful toyou.

X This symbol designates an instruc-tion you must follow.

X Several consecutive symbols indi-cate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where you canfind further information on a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Display This text indicates a message on thedisplay.

Registered trademarks

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.

Vehicle distributor

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350www.mbusa.comwww.mbsprinterusa.comCustomer Assistance Center:1-877-762-8267

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, ON M4G 4C9www.mercedes-benz.caCustomer Relations Department:1-800-387-0100

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-BenzCanada Inc. are Daimler companies.Canada only: "Authorized Sprinter Dealer" isdefined as an authorized Mercedes-BenzSprinter Dealer.

As at 13.09.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read the OperatingInstructions carefully and familiarize yourselfwith your vehicle. Please adhere to the informa-tion and warning notes in this Operating Instruc-tions for your own safety and to ensure a longeroperating duration of the vehicle. Failure toobserve the instructions may lead to damage tothe vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observethe instructions is not covered by the New Vehi-cle Limited Warranty.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityThe illustrations in this Operating Instructionsshow a left-hand-drive vehicle. The location ofvehicle parts and controls for right-hand drivevehicles differ accordingly.Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi-cles to the state of the art.Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introducechanges in:RDesignREquipmentRTechnologyTherefore, the descriptions provided may occa-sionally differ from your own vehicle.The following are integral parts of the vehicle:ROperating InstructionsRMaintenance or Service BookletRService and warranty informationREquipment-dependent operating instructionsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. Should you sell the vehicle, always passthe documents on to the new owner.We wish you pleasant motoring at all times.

9065849411 É9065849411lËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 23Operating Instructions ........................... 23Service and vehicle operation ................ 23Proper use ............................................. 25Protection of the environment ............... 25Operating safety and vehicle approval............................................................... 26Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 29QR code for rescue card ........................ 30Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 30

At a glance ........................................... 32Cockpit .................................................. 32Instrument cluster ................................. 33Steering wheel buttons .......................... 36Center console ...................................... 36Overhead control panel ......................... 37Door control panel ................................. 38Further control panels ........................... 38

Safety ................................................... 40Useful information ................................. 40Occupant safety .................................... 40Children in the vehicle ........................... 47Pets in the vehicle ................................. 52Driving safety systems ........................... 53Emergency exit ...................................... 56Theft deterrent locking system .............. 57

Opening and closing ........................... 59Useful information ................................. 59Key ........................................................ 59Central locking ...................................... 63Driver's door and front passengerdoor ....................................................... 64Sliding door ........................................... 65Electrical step ........................................ 66Rear doors ............................................. 67Partition sliding door ............................. 69Side windows ......................................... 70

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 72Useful information ................................. 72Seats ..................................................... 72Steering wheel ....................................... 77Mirrors ................................................... 78

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 80Useful information ................................. 80Exterior lighting ..................................... 80Interior lighting ...................................... 85Changing bulbs ...................................... 87Windshield wipers .................................. 94

Climate control .................................... 97Useful information ................................. 97Overview of climate control systems ..... 97Operating the climate control system .. 100Adjusting the air vents ......................... 104Operating the auxiliary heating sys-tem ...................................................... 105Operating the cargo compartment airvents .................................................... 115

Driving and parking .......................... 116Useful information ............................... 116Breaking-in notes ................................. 116Driving ................................................. 116Automatic transmission ....................... 121Refueling ............................................. 124Parking ................................................ 127Driving tips .......................................... 130Driving systems ................................... 137Working mode ..................................... 151Towing a trailer .................................... 152

On-board computer and displays .... 158Useful information ............................... 158Important safety notes ........................ 158Instrument cluster ............................... 158On-board computer (vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons) ....................... 160On-board computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ....................... 161Display messages ................................ 173

2 Contents

Indicator and warning lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................... 190

Stowing and features ....................... 200Useful information ............................... 200Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments ............................................ 200Cup holder ........................................... 204Bottle holder ........................................ 204Ashtray ................................................ 205Cigarette lighter ................................... 20512 V socket ......................................... 206Mobile phone ....................................... 206Additional communications equip-ment .................................................... 207

Transporting loads ............................ 208Useful information ............................... 208Loading guidelines ............................... 208Load distribution ................................. 210Securing loads ..................................... 210Carrier systems ................................... 212

Maintenance and care ...................... 214Useful information ............................... 214Engine compartment ........................... 214Vehicle interior .................................... 221Maintenance ........................................ 221Battery ................................................. 223Care ..................................................... 229

Breakdown assistance ..................... 236Useful information ............................... 236Where will I find...? .............................. 236Flat tire ................................................ 238Jump-starting ....................................... 238Tow-starting and towing away ............. 239Electrical fuses .................................... 242

Wheels and tires ............................... 243Useful information ............................... 243Important safety notes ........................ 243Operation ............................................ 243Operation in winter .............................. 245Tire pressure ....................................... 246

Loading the vehicle .............................. 254What you should know about wheelsand tires .............................................. 257Flat tire ................................................ 262Changing wheels ................................. 262Wheel and tire combination ................. 268Spare wheel ......................................... 268

Technical data ................................... 271Useful information ............................... 271Vehicle electronics .............................. 271Identification plates ............................. 272Service products and capacities .......... 273Vehicle data ......................................... 281

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 5512 V socket ........................................ 206

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 178Function/notes ................................ 53Important safety notes .................... 53Indicator lamp ................................ 191

Access step in the bumperCleaning ......................................... 233

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 101Activating/deactivating the roofventilator ........................................... 115Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ............................. 140ADAPTIVE ESP®

see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)Add-on equipment ............................... 28Additional indicators

Replacing bulbs ............................... 89Replacing bulbs (roof) ...................... 92

AdditivesDiesel ............................................ 274Engine oil ....................................... 278

Adjusting the headlamp range ........... 82ADR (working speed governor) ........ 151Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 46Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 45Important safety notes .................... 44Introduction ..................................... 44Side impact air bag .......................... 45Window curtain air bag .................... 46

Air filterIndicator lamp ................................ 197

Air pressuresee Tire pressure

Air ventsAdjusting for the passenger com-partment ........................................ 105Adjusting on the roof ..................... 105Important safety notes .................. 104

Setting the center air vents ........... 104Setting the side air vents ............... 105

Air ventssee Air vents

Air-conditioning systemRefrigerant ..................................... 281see Climate control

Air-recirculation modeImportant safety notes .................. 103Switching on/off ........................... 103

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

All-wheel driveEngaging/disengaging ................... 145Important safety notes .................. 144LOW RANGE transmission ratio ..... 145

Anti-lock Braking Systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-theft systemInterior motion sensor ..................... 58

Armrests .............................................. 76Ashtray ............................................... 205ASR (acceleration skid control)

Activating/deactivating ................... 54Display message ............................ 179Function/notes ................................ 54Important safety notes .................... 54Indicator lamp ................................ 191

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 57Switching off the alarm .................... 57

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 229Automatic climate control

see Climate controlAutomatic headlamp mode ................ 81Automatic locking ............................... 64Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 123Changing gear ............................... 122Changing gear yourself .................. 122Driving tips .................................... 123

4 Index

Emergency running mode .............. 124Important safety notes .................. 121Kickdown ....................................... 123Maneuvering .................................. 123Overview ........................................ 121Problem (malfunction) ................... 124Releasing the parking lock man-ually ............................................... 124Selector lever ................................ 121Selector lever positions ................. 122Shift ranges ................................... 123Starting the engine ........................ 118Touchshift ...................................... 122Trailer towing ................................. 123Transmission oil change ................ 279

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 124AUX port ............................................. 207Auxiliary heater

see Auxiliary warm-air heatersee Hot-water auxiliary heater

Auxiliary heatingActivating/deactivating heaterbooster mode ................................ 110Adjusting ....................................... 170Conditions for switching on ........... 107Heating time .................................. 106Important safety notes .................. 105Operating with the button (controlpanel) ............................................ 107Operation with the remote con-trol ................................................. 108Operation with the timer ................ 112Selecting a switch-on time ............. 107Setting the switch-on time ............. 108see Auxiliary heatingsee Auxiliary warm-air heatersee Hot-water auxiliary heater

Auxiliary warm-air heaterProblem (malfunction) ................... 115

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 283

BBackup lamps

Replacing bulbs ............................... 90

Backup lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................... 91

BAS (Brake Assist System)Display message ............................ 179Function/notes ................................ 54Indicator lamp ................................ 191

Basic settingssee Settings

BatteryIsolating switch .............................. 116Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 61

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 61Important safety notes .................... 61Replacing ......................................... 61

Battery (vehicle)Care ............................................... 228Charge indicator lamp ................... 194Charging ........................................ 228Disconnecting and connecting ....... 225Disconnecting and connecting(engine compartment) ................... 227Display message ............................ 189Important safety notes .................. 223Installing/removing (engine com-partment) ....................................... 228Jump starting ................................. 238Location ......................................... 224Removing and installing ................. 226Removing and installing the floorcovering ......................................... 224

Before driving offImportant safety notes .................. 118

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt warning ......................................... 44Bleeding the fuel system .................. 120Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating ......... 143, 170Notes/function .............................. 141Trailer towing ................................. 143

Bottle holdersee Cup holder

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake Assist Systemsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Index 5

Brake fluidChecking the level ......................... 219Display message ............................ 180Notes ............................................. 279Warning lamp ................................. 192

Brake force distribution, elec-tronic

see EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsReplacing bulbs ............................... 90

Brake lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................... 91

Brake liningsDisplay message ............................ 179Indicator lamp ................................ 194

Brake pads/liningsNew ............................................... 133

Brake systemMalfunction .................................... 179Warning lamp ................................. 191

BrakesABS .................................................. 53Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 140Applying the parking brake ............ 128BAS .................................................. 54Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 279Checking brake fluid level .............. 219Display messages .......................... 179EBD .................................................. 55Important safety notes .................. 132Maintenance .................................. 191New brake pads/linings ................ 133Parking brake (notes) ..................... 133Riding tips ...................................... 132

BreakdownFire extinguisher ............................ 238First-aid kit .................................... 237Jump-starting ................................. 238Reflective safety jacket .................. 237Vehicle tool kit ............................... 236Warning lamp ................................. 237Warning triangle ............................ 237see Flat tiresee Towing away

Bulbsee Changing bulbs

Bulb failure indicator .......................... 80

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 23

Carsee Vehicle

CareAccess step in the bumper ............ 233Car wash ........................................ 229Display ........................................... 233Exterior lights ................................ 232Interior ........................................... 233Notes ............................................. 229Paint .............................................. 231Plastic trim .................................... 234Power washer ................................ 230Rear view camera .......................... 232Roof lining ...................................... 234Seat belt ........................................ 234Seat cover ..................................... 234Selector lever ................................ 234Sensors ......................................... 232Sliding door ................................... 233Steering wheel ............................... 234Step (electrical) ............................. 233Trim pieces .................................... 234Washing by hand ........................... 230Washing the engine ....................... 230Wheels ........................................... 231Windows ........................................ 231Wiper blades .................................. 231

Cargo compartmentActivating/deactivating ventila-tion ................................................ 115

Cargo compartment floor ................... 29Cargo tie-down points and tiedowns

Important safety notes .................. 210Cargo tie-down rings

Installing ........................................ 212Permissible tensile load ................. 282

Carrier systemLadder rack ................................... 213

CD player/CD changer ...................... 165Cell phone

see Mobile phoneCenter console overview .................... 36

6 Index

Central lockingAutomatic locking ............................ 64Important safety notes .................... 63Locking/unlocking (buttons) ........... 63Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 59Locking/unlocking manually ............ 63

Central locking systemsee Central locking

Change of address .............................. 24Change of ownership .......................... 24Changing bulbs

Additional indicators (roof) .............. 92Additional turn signals ..................... 89Backup lamp (Chassis Cab) ............. 91Backup lamps .................................. 90Bi-Xenon bulbs ................................. 87Brake lamps ..................................... 90Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) .............. 91Cornering lamps .............................. 88Courtesy lights ................................. 92Daytime running lamps (halogenheadlamps) ...................................... 88Display message ............................ 182Front interior light ............................ 93High-beam headlamps ..................... 88Interior light ..................................... 93Interior lighting ................................ 93License plate lamp ........................... 91License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) .... 91Low-beam headlamps ...................... 88Overview of lamp types (frontbulbs) ............................................... 87Overview of lamp types (rearbulbs, Cargo Van/PassengerVan) ................................................. 90Overview of lamp types (rearbulbs, Chassis Cab) ......................... 91Parking lamps .................................. 88Perimeter lamp .......................... 91, 92Rear fog lamp .................................. 90Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) ............ 91Rear interior light ............................. 93Standing lamps (rear, ChassisCab) ................................................. 91Standing lamps (rear) ...................... 90Tail lamps ........................................ 90Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) .................. 91Turn signals (front) ........................... 89

Turn signals (rear, Chassis Cab) ....... 91Turn signals (rear) ............................ 90Warning and indicator lamps ......... 198see Replacing bulbs

Changing bulbssee Replacing bulbs

ChecklistBefore driving off-road ................... 136

ChildRestraint system .............................. 49

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 51LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 50On the front-passenger seat ............ 51Rearward-facing restraint system .... 51Top Tether ....................................... 50

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 52Rear door ......................................... 52

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 48

Children in the vehicleImportant safety notes .................... 47

Chock ................................................. 129Cigarette lighter ................................ 205Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 232Trailer tow hitch ............................. 233

Cleaningsee Care

Climate controlAir conditioning in the rear com-partment ........................................ 100Air-conditioning system ................... 98Auxiliary heating ............................ 105Checking/cleaning the air filter(rear-compartment air condition-ing) ................................................ 221Cooling with air dehumidification .. 101Defrosting the windows ................. 102Heating ............................................ 97Heating in the rear compartment ..... 99Important safety notes .................... 97Operating the cargo compartmentair vents ......................................... 115Overview of systems ........................ 97

Index 7

Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 103Problems with the windshieldheating .......................................... 103Rear-compartment air condition-ing ................................................. 100Rear-compartment heating .............. 99Reheat function (air dehumidifica-tion) ............................................... 102Setting the air distribution ............. 101Setting the air vents ...................... 104Setting the airflow ......................... 101Setting the temperature ................ 101Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 103Switching on/off ........................... 100Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 103Switching windshield heating on/off .................................................. 103

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating the dis-tance warning function .................. 140

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 233

Combination switch ............................ 82Communications equipment

Operation ....................................... 207PND fittings ................................... 207Ports .............................................. 207Type approval/frequency .............. 271

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 171Control panel

Above the windshield ....................... 37Center console ................................ 36Climate control ................................ 36Driver's door .................................... 38Left and right side of the steeringwheel ............................................... 38

Conversions/equipment .................... 28Coolant (engine)

Adding ........................................... 219Checking the level ......................... 218Display message ............................ 185

Displaying the temperature (on-board computer) ............................ 164Filling capacity ............................... 280Important safety notes .................. 218

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering lampsReplacing bulbs ............................... 88

Cornering light functionFunction/notes ................................ 83

Courtesy lightsReplacing bulbs ............................... 92

Crosswind driving assistance ............ 55Cruise control

Activating ....................................... 138Activation conditions ..................... 138Cruise control lever ....................... 137Deactivating ................................... 138Display message ............................ 186Driving system ............................... 137Function/notes ............................. 137Important safety notes .................. 137Problem (malfunction) ................... 139Resuming the stored speed ........... 138Setting a speed .............................. 138Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 138

Cup holder ......................................... 204Center console .............................. 204

Cup holdersee Cup holders

Cup holders ........................................ 204Curtains (cleaning instructions) ...... 235Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 28Customer Relations Department ....... 28

DDashboard

see CockpitDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Activating/deactivating (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 168

8 Index

Changing bulbs (halogen head-lamps) .............................................. 88Switching on/off (switch) ................ 80Switching on/off (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 161

Dealershipsee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 27DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid )

Refilling .......................................... 126Delayed switch-off ............................ 169Diagnostics connection

Operating safety and vehicleapproval ........................................... 27

Diesel .................................................. 274Diesel engine

Preglow indicator lamp .................. 197Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

Display messages (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 184Display messages (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 175Indicator lamp ................................ 193Level indicator ............................... 159Notes ............................................. 275Storage .......................................... 276Tank content .................................. 277

Diesel particle filterShort-distance driving .................... 131

Digital speedometerSetting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 166

DisplayDisplay messages .......................... 173Outside temperature (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 164Outside temperature display(vehicles without steering wheelbuttons) ......................................... 160Standard display (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 164Standard display (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 160see Warning and indicator lamps

Displaysee Warning and indicator lamps

Display message (vehicle withsteering wheel buttons)

Service interval display .................. 222Display message (vehicle withoutsteering wheel buttons)

Service interval display .................. 222Display messages

Calling up the message memory .... 173Driving systems ............................. 186Engine ............................................ 184Important safety notes .................. 173Lights ............................................. 182Safety systems .............................. 178SmartKey ....................................... 189Tires ............................................... 188Vehicle ........................................... 189

Distance recorder ............................. 164see Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning functionActivating/deactivating ................. 140Function/notes ............................. 139Warning lamp ................................. 140

Door locksee Central locking

DoorsCentral locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 59Control panel ................................... 38Display message ............................ 189Indicator lamp ................................ 198

Drinking and driving ......................... 130Drinks holder

see Bottle holderDriver's seat

see SeatsDriver's/front-passenger door

Unlocking ......................................... 64Driving abroad ................................... 131Driving off-road

see Off-road drivingDriving on flooded roads .................. 134Driving on rough terrain

Checklist before driving off-road .... 136Driving safety systems

4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ................................................. 55ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 53

Index 9

Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 140ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 54BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 54Distance warning function ............. 139EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 55ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 55Important safety information ........... 53Overview .......................................... 53

Driving systemsBlind Spot Assist ............................ 141Cruise control ................................ 137Display message ............................ 186Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 143PARKTRONIC ................................. 148

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 123Brakes ........................................... 132Break-in period .............................. 116Checking brake lining thickness .... 133Downhill gradient ........................... 132Drinking and driving ....................... 130Driving abroad ............................... 131Driving in winter ............................. 134Driving on flooded roads ................ 134Driving on wet roads ...................... 134Exhaust check ............................... 131Fuel ................................................ 130General .......................................... 130Hydroplaning ................................. 134Icy road surfaces ........................... 134Important safety notes .................. 116Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 133New brake disks ............................ 133New brake pads/linings ................ 133Off-road driving .............................. 135Overrun cut-off .............................. 130Snow chains .................................. 246Speed limitation ............................. 131Towing a trailer .............................. 152Transport by rail ............................. 132Wet road surface ........................... 133

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 146

EEBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 180Function/notes ................................ 55Indicator lamps .............................. 191

Electrical closing assist ...................... 66Electrical fuses

see FusesElectrical step

Cleaning ......................................... 233Display message ............................ 189Emergency release .......................... 66Function ........................................... 66Important safety notes .................... 66Indicator lamp ................................ 199Manual retraction ............................ 66Obstacle detection ........................... 66

Electrical systemBattery main switch ....................... 116

Electronic brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Emergency exit .................................... 56Emergency exit window ..................... 56Emergency Tensioning Devices

Activation ......................................... 46Emissions control

Service and warranty information .... 23Engine

ADR (working speed governor) ...... 151Changing the power output ............. 27Check Engine warning lamp ........... 196Cleaning instructions ..................... 230Engine number ............................... 273Engine speed setting (workingmode) ............................................ 152Irregular running ............................ 120Jump-starting ................................. 238Operating safety .............................. 27Starting .......................................... 118Starting problems .......................... 120Switching off .................................. 129

10 Index

Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 242Engine electronics

Notes ............................................. 271Problem (malfunction) ................... 120

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 218Additives ........................................ 278Checking the oil level (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 216Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 217Display message ............................ 186Filling capacity ............................... 278Information about oil consump-tion ................................................ 278Mixing ............................................ 278Notes about oil grades ................... 277Oil change ...................................... 278Oil level (note) ............................... 216Viscosity ........................................ 277Warning lamp ................................. 195

Engine speed setting (workingmode) ................................................. 151Engine, jump-starting ....................... 238ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Display message ............................ 181Important safety information ........... 55Indicator lamp ................................ 194Warning lamp ................................. 190

Exhaust check ................................... 131Exhaust gas aftertreatment

DEF level indicator ......................... 159DEF reducing agent ....................... 275Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 275Display messages (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 184Display messages (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 175Indicator lamp ....................... 193, 197Malfunction .................................... 184Refilling DEF .................................. 126

Exterior lightingsee Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 78Important safety notes .................... 78

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 201

FFire extinguisher ............................... 238First-aid kit ......................................... 237Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 263General notes ................................ 262

Fog lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 81

Fogged up-up windowssee Climate control

Folding seat ......................................... 74Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 271Two-way radio ................................ 271

Front fog lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 81

Front interior lightReplacing bulbs ............................... 93

Front windshieldsee Windshield

FuelAdditives (diesel) ........................... 274Consumption information .............. 275Consumption statistics .................. 171Diesel at very low outside temper-atures ............................................ 274Display message ............................ 185Driving tips .................................... 130Fuel gauge ..................................... 159Problem (malfunction) ................... 126Quality (diesel) ............................... 274Refueling ........................................ 124Showing the range (on-boardcomputer with steering wheel but-tons) .............................................. 171Showing the range (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 171Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 274

Fuel filter with water separatordraining ......................................... 220Indicator lamp ................................ 198

Fuel gauge ......................................... 159Fuel tank

Problem (malfunction) ................... 126

Index 11

Fuel tanksee Fuel tank

Fuel tank contentReserve, display message .............. 185

Fuses .................................................. 242

GGasoline

Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 196General driving tips

Driving short distances .................. 131Genuine parts ...................................... 29Glove box ........................................... 200GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 260

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ........................ 83Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 76Adjusting (rear) ................................ 76

HeadlampsAdding fluid to cleaning system ..... 220Cleaning system (function) .............. 83Fogging up ....................................... 84see Automatic headlamp mode

Headliner (cleaning instructions) .... 234Heating

see Climate controlHigh-beam headlamps

Highbeam Assist .............................. 84Replacing bulbs ............................... 88Switching on/off .............................. 82

Highbeam AssistFunction/notes ................................ 84Switching Highbeam Assiston/off ............................................ 168

HoodClosing ........................................... 215Display message ............................ 189Important safety notes .................. 214Indicator lamp ................................ 198

Opening ......................................... 214Hot-water auxiliary heater

Problem (malfunction) ................... 111Hydroplaning ..................................... 134

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsIgnition lock

see SmartKey positions (ignition lock)Immobilizer .......................................... 57Indicator lamp

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signalsInsect protection on the radiator ...... 29Installing a wheel

Installing the adapter (sparewheel) ............................................ 265

Instrument clusterFuel gage ....................................... 159Important safety notes .................. 158Instrument cluster lighting ............. 159Outside temperature display .......... 159Overview .......................................... 33Speedometer ................................. 159Tachometer ................................... 159Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 159Instrument lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingInterior lighting ................................... 85

Front ................................................ 85Motion detectors ............................. 86Notes on replacing bulbs ................. 93Overview .......................................... 85Replacing bulbs ............................... 93Switching the rear compartmentlighting on centrally ......................... 85

Interior motion sensorArming ............................................. 58Deactivating ..................................... 58Function ........................................... 58Switching off .................................... 58

12 Index

JJack

Jacking points ................................ 263Preparation .................................... 263Storage location ............................ 236Using ............................................. 263

Jump-starting ..................................... 238

KKey

Position in the ignition lock ............ 117Key positions ..................................... 117Kickdown ........................................... 123

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 144Function/notes ............................. 143

LanguageDisplay (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 167

Lashing points and tie downsPermissible tensile load ................. 281

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 50License plate lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................... 91License plate lamp (Chassis Cab)

Replacing bulbs ............................... 91Light sensor ......................................... 81Lighting

see LightsLights

Activating/deactivating daytimerunning lamps (on-board com-puter with steering wheel but-tons) .............................................. 168Activating/deactivating surroundlighting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 169Automatic headlamp mode .............. 81Bulb failure indicator ........................ 80Cornering light function ................... 83Driving abroad ............................... 132

Fog lamps ........................................ 81Hazard warning lamps ..................... 83Headlamp range .............................. 82High beam flasher ............................ 82High-beam headlamps ..................... 82Highbeam Assist .............................. 84Important safety notes .................... 80Light switch ..................................... 80Low-beam headlamps ...................... 80Parking lamps .................................. 80Rear fog lamp .................................. 81Setting the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 169Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 80Turn signals ..................................... 82see Changing a bulbsee Interior lighting

Limited Warranty ................................ 23Load distribution ............................... 210Load securing aids

Carrier systems ............................. 212Loading guidelines

Important safety notes .................. 208Loading rails

Installing cargo tie-down rings ....... 212Maximum tensile strength ............. 282

LoadsSecuring ........................................ 210Transporting .................................. 208

Locator lightingSetting (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 169

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking and unlocking manually ....... 63Locking centrally

see Central lockingLOW RANGE ....................................... 145LOW RANGE transmission ratio ....... 145Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 182Driving abroad ............................... 132Replacing bulbs ............................... 88Switching on/off .............................. 80

Lumbar support ................................... 73

Index 13

MM+S tires ............................................ 245Maintenance ...................................... 221Malfunctions

Message memory (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 173

Maximum speedSpeed limitation ............................. 131

Menu (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons)

Audio ............................................. 164Operation ....................................... 163Settings ......................................... 165Telephone ...................................... 172

Messagesee Display message

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 173Mirrors

Exterior mirrors ................................ 78Rear-view mirror .............................. 78

Mobile navigation devices ................ 207Mobile phone ..................................... 207

Important safety notes .................. 206Pre-installation ............................... 206Type approval/frequency .............. 271

Mobile phonesee Mobile phone

Mounting wheelsLowering the vehicle ...................... 267Mounting a new wheel ................... 266Preparing the vehicle ..................... 263Raising the vehicle ......................... 263Removing a wheel .......................... 265Removing andmounting the sparewheel ............................................. 269Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 263

NNavigation

Fittings for PNDmobile navigationdevices .......................................... 207

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 116

OOccupant safety

Air bags ........................................... 44Belt warning ..................................... 44Children in the vehicle ..................... 47Important safety notes .................... 40Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 40Pets in the vehicle ........................... 52Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40Seat belt .......................................... 41

OdometerDisplay (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 164Display (vehicles without steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 160

Off-road drivingChecklist after driving off-road ...... 136Important safety notes .................. 135Rules for driving off-road ............... 136

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerChecking the oil level ..................... 216Display message ............................ 173Lighting submenu .......................... 168

On-board computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons)

Audio menu ................................... 164Display message ............................ 161Menu overview .............................. 163Operating ....................................... 161Operation menu ............................. 163Settings menu ............................... 165Standard display ............................ 164Telephone menu ............................ 172Trip computer menu ...................... 171

On-board computer (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons)

Display message ............................ 173General notes ................................ 160Setting the clock ............................ 161Standard display ............................ 160

Operating InstructionsBefore the first journey .................... 23Limited Warranty ............................. 23

14 Index

Operating safetyLimited Warranty ............................. 23

Operating safety and vehicleapproval

Attachments and bodies .................. 28Changing the engine power out-put ................................................... 27Correct use ...................................... 25Declaration of conformity ................ 27Equipment and conversions ............. 28Important safety notes .................... 26Information about body/equip-ment mounting directives ................ 28Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 26Qualified specialist workshop .......... 27Registering your vehicle ................... 28

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualGeneral notes .................................. 23Vehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outline lampReplacing bulbs ............................... 92

Outside temperature display ........... 159Overhead control panel ...................... 37Overrevving range ............................. 159Overrun cutoff ................................... 130

PPaintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 231Paper holder ...................................... 203Parking ............................................... 127

Important safety notes .................. 127Parking brake ................................ 128Wheel chock .................................. 129see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 181Notes/function .............................. 128

Parking brakesee Parking brake

Parking lampsReplacing bulbs ............................... 88

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 150Driving system ............................... 148Function/notes ............................. 148Important safety notes .................. 148Problem (malfunction) ................... 151Range of the sensors ..................... 148Roll-back warning .......................... 150Trailer towing ................................. 150Warning display ............................. 149

Partition sliding doorImportant safety notes .................... 69Opening/closing .............................. 69

Passenger compartment air-condi-tioning system

see Climate controlPassenger compartment heating

see Climate controlPerimeter lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................... 91Pets in the vehicle ............................... 52Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 234Power assistance for the steering

Display message ............................ 189Warning lamp ................................. 199

Power supplyBattery isolating switch ................. 116Switching off .................................. 117Switching on .................................. 117

Power take-offEngine speed setting ..................... 151

Power washers .................................. 230Power windows

see Side windowsPreparing for a journey

Checks in the vehicle ..................... 118Visual check of the vehicle exte-rior ................................................. 118

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 25

Pulling away ...................................... 119

QQR code

Rescue card ..................................... 30Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27

Index 15

RRadiator cover ..................................... 29Radio

Changing stations (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 164see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 27Rain and light sensor

Setting the sensitivity (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 170Windshield wiper .............................. 94

Range (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) .................................. 171Rear bench seat

Installing/removing (PassengerVan) ................................................. 75Stowage compartment (crewcab) .. 203

Rear compartmentActivating/deactivating climatecontrol ........................................... 100Setting the air vents ...................... 105

Rear doorChild-proof locks .............................. 52Important safety notes .................... 67Opening/closing .............................. 67Opening/closing from inside ........... 69

Rear fog lampReplacing bulbs ............................... 90Switching on/off .............................. 81

Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................... 91

Rear interior lightReplacing bulbs ............................... 93

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear rackNotes ............................................. 212

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 232Important safety notes .................. 151Switching on .................................. 151

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 103Switching on/off ........................... 103

Rear window wiper ............................. 95Switching on/off .............................. 95

Rear-compartment air-condition-ing system

see Climate controlRear-compartment heating

see Climate controlRear-view mirror

Anti-glare mode ............................... 78Refilling

DEF filler neck ............................... 126Important safety notes (DieselExhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 126Refilling procedure (DieselExhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 126

Refrigerant ......................................... 281Refueling

Fuel filler flap ................................. 125Fuel gauge ..................................... 159Important safety notes (fuel) ......... 124Refueling procedure (fuel) ............. 125see Fuel

Releasing the parking lock man-ually (automatic transmission) ........ 124Remote control

Changing the operating duration(auxiliary heating) .......................... 109Replacing the battery (auxiliaryheating ) ........................................ 110Switching on/off (auxiliary heat-ing) ................................................ 109Synchronizing (auxiliary heating) ... 109

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................... 87

Replacing the battery (auxiliaryheating remote control) .................... 110Replacing the fuel filter .................... 198Reporting safety defects .................... 28Rescue card ......................................... 30Restraint system

Introduction ..................................... 40Warning lamp (function) .......... 40, 194

Reverse warning feature .................. 119Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24Roof carrier

Maximum payload .......................... 282Notes ............................................. 212

16 Index

Roof load (roof carrier) ..................... 282

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 47Operating safety .............................. 26see Occupant safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 43Cleaning ......................................... 234Correct usage .................................. 42Display message ............................ 181Fastening ......................................... 43Important safety guidelines ............. 41Introduction ..................................... 41Releasing ......................................... 43Warning lamp ................................. 198Warning lamp (function) ................... 44

Seat heating ......................................... 77Seats

Adjusting lumbar support ................ 73Adjusting the front-passengerseat .................................................. 73Adjusting the head restraint ............ 76Armrest ............................................ 76Cleaning the cover ......................... 234Correct driver's seat position ........... 72Folding seat ..................................... 74Important safety notes .................... 72Rear bench seat ............................... 75Seat heating .................................... 77Setting the driver's seat ................... 73Swivel seat ....................................... 73Twin front-passenger seat ................ 74

Securing loadsImportant safety notes .................. 210

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 234

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 232Service center

see Qualified specialist workshopService interval display

Calling up the service due date ...... 222Exceeding a service due date ........ 222Notes ............................................. 222

Service due date (automatic dis-play) ............................................... 222

Service productsBrake fluid ..................................... 279Coolant (engine) ............................ 280Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 275Engine oil ....................................... 277Fuel ................................................ 273Important safety notes .................. 273Power steering fluid ....................... 279Refrigerant ..................................... 281Transmission oil ............................. 279Washer fluid ................................... 281

Setting the air distribution ............... 101Setting the airflow ............................ 101Setting the clock

Vehicles with steering wheel but-tons ............................................... 168Vehicles without steering wheelbuttons .......................................... 161

SettingsResetting all (vehicles with steer-ing wheel buttons) ......................... 165Resetting submenus (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons) ......... 165

Short journeys (diesel particle fil-ter) ...................................................... 131Side impact air bag ............................. 45Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 231Hinged side windows ....................... 70Important safety information ........... 70Opening/closing .............................. 70Overview .......................................... 70Problem (malfunction) ..................... 71Resetting ......................................... 71

Sliding doorCleaning ......................................... 233Closing assist ................................... 66Important safety notes .................... 65Opening/closing .............................. 65Opening/closing from the inside ..... 65Opening/closing from the out-side .................................................. 65

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 61Changing the locking system set-tings ............................................... 170

Index 17

Checking the battery ....................... 61Display message ............................ 189Door central locking/unlocking ....... 59Important safety notes .................... 59Loss ................................................. 62Problem (malfunction) ..................... 62

SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 117Snow chains ...................................... 246Sockets .............................................. 206Spare wheel

General notes ................................ 268Important safety notes .................. 268Removing/mounting ...................... 269

Special seat belt retractor .................. 48Specialist workshop ............................ 27Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 167Digital (vehicles without steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 160Selecting display unit (vehicleswith steering- wheel buttons) ........ 167see Instrument cluster

Sprinter dealersee Qualified specialist workshop

Standing lampsReplacing bulbs ............................... 88Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 90

Standing lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 91

Start-off assistDisplay message ............................ 179

Starting (engine) ................................ 118Station

see RadioSteering wheel

Adjusting ......................................... 77Button overview ............................... 36Cleaning ......................................... 234

Stepsee Electrical step

StickersGeneral safety notes ........................ 25

Stowage spacessee Stowage spaces and stowagecompartments

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

Eyeglasses compartment ............... 201Glove box ....................................... 200Important safety notes .................. 200Paper holder .................................. 203Stowage compartment above thewindshield ..................................... 202Stowage compartment in the cen-ter console ..................................... 202Stowage compartment in thedashboard ...................................... 201Stowage space above the head-liner ............................................... 202Stowage space under the rearbench seat ..................................... 203Stowage space under the twin co-driver's seat ................................... 202

Summer tires ..................................... 245Switch unit

see Control panelSwitching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 57Switching the heater booster func-tion on/off ......................................... 110Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) ............. 169Swivel seat ........................................... 73

TTachometer ........................................ 159Tail lamps

Changing ......................................... 91Replacing bulbs ............................... 90see Lights

Tail lamps (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs ............................... 91

Tank contentFuel gauge ..................................... 159Range (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 171Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 196

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 273Cargo tie-down points .................... 281

18 Index

Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 282Loading rails .................................. 282Roof carrier .................................... 282Tires/wheels ......................... 252, 268Trailer tow hitch ............................. 282Vehicle data ................................... 281

Telephone .................................. 206, 207Telephone (on-board computer)

Accepting an incoming call ............ 172Display messages .......................... 189Numbers from the phone book ...... 172Operating ....................................... 172Redialing ........................................ 173Rejecting or ending a call .............. 172

TemperatureOutside temperature ...................... 159Setting (climate control) ................ 101Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 166

Theft deterrent systemsImmobilizer ...................................... 57Tow-away alarm ............................... 57

Tightening torques forwheel nuts/wheel bolts ........................................ 267Time

Setting the time (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 168Setting the time (vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons) ................. 161

TimerActivating ....................................... 113Auxiliary heating ............................ 112Important safety notes .................. 112Overview ........................................ 113Setting the heating level (auxiliaryheating) ......................................... 114Setting the preselection time(auxiliary heating) .......................... 114Setting weekday, time and oper-ating duration (auxiliary heating) ... 113Switching immediate heatingmode on/off (auxiliary heating) ..... 114

Tire pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 249Checking manually ........................ 249Display messages (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 188

Display messages (vehicles with-out steering wheel buttons) ........... 174Maximum ....................................... 249Notes ............................................. 248Recommended ............................... 246Setting the unit (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 167Tire label ........................................ 247

Tire pressure loss warning system .. 251Tire pressure monitor

Checking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 251Display message ............................ 188Function/notes ............................. 249Indicator lamp ................................ 197Restarting ...................................... 251Warning lamp ................................. 251

Tire pressure table ............................ 252Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 261Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 260Bar (definition) ............................... 260Changing a wheel .......................... 262Characteristics .............................. 259Checking ........................................ 244Curb weight (definition) ................. 261Definition of terms ......................... 259Direction of rotation ...................... 262Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 261DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 260DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 259GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 260GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 260GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 260GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 260Important safety notes .................. 243Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 260Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 260Labeling (overview) ........................ 257

Index 19

Load bearing index (definition) ...... 261Load index ..................................... 258Load index (definition) ................... 260M+S tires ....................................... 245Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 261Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 260Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 261Maximum tire load ......................... 259Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 261Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 261PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 261Replacing ....................................... 262Service life ..................................... 244Sidewall (definition) ....................... 261Snow chains .................................. 246Speed rating (definition) ................ 260Storing ........................................... 262Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 259Summer tires ................................. 245TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 261Tire bead (definition) ...................... 261Tire pressure (definition) ................ 261Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 260Tire size (data) ....................... 252, 268Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 257Tire tread ....................................... 244Tire tread (definition) ..................... 261Total load limit (definition) ............. 261Traction (definition) ....................... 261TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 261Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 260Wear indicator (definition) ............. 261Wheel rim (definition) .................... 260

Top Tether ............................................ 50Touchshift (automatic transmis-sion) .................................................... 122Tow-away alarm

Arming/deactivating ........................ 57

Deactivating ..................................... 57Operation ......................................... 57

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 242Important safety notes .................. 239

TowingIf the vehicle is stuck ..................... 241Installing/removing the towingeye ................................................. 240With a raised front or rear axle ...... 241

Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 283Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 233Coupling up a trailer ...................... 154Decoupling a trailer ....................... 156Driving tips .................................... 152Important safety notes .................. 152Notes on retrofitting ...................... 282Trailer loads ................................... 283

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 239In the event of malfunctions .......... 240With both axles on the ground ....... 241

TrailerBrake force booster malfunction ... 192

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbar nose-weights ............................................... 156Trailer towing

Blind Spot Assist ............................ 143PARKTRONIC ................................. 150Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 156

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission oil ................................ 279Transport

Loading guidelines ......................... 208Vehicle ........................................... 242

Transport by rail ................................ 132Transportation

Rail ................................................ 132Transporting

Load distribution ............................ 210Securing a load .............................. 210

Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 234

20 Index

Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 171Trip meter

see Trip odometerTrip odometer

Display (vehicles with steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 164Display (vehicles without steeringwheel buttons) ............................... 160Resetting ....................................... 159see Trip computer (on-board computer)

Turn signalsReplacing bulbs (front) ..................... 89Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 90Switching on/off .............................. 82

Turn signals (Chassis Cab)Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 91

Twin front-passenger seatStowage compartment .................. 202

Two-way radiosType approval/frequency .............. 271

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 261

UUnlocking

From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 63

USB port ............................................. 207

VVehicle

Data acquisition ............................... 30Display message ............................ 189Electronics ..................................... 271Equipment ....................................... 23Individual settings (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons) ................. 165Limited Warranty ............................. 23Loading .......................................... 254Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 59Lowering ........................................ 267Maintenance .................................... 24Operating safety .............................. 26Parking for a long period ................ 129Pulling away ................................... 119

Raising ........................................... 263Registration ..................................... 28Reporting problems ......................... 28Securing from rolling away ............ 127Towing away .................................. 239Transporting .................................. 242Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 59

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle bodies ..................................... 28Body/equipment mounting direc-tives for trucks ................................. 28

Vehicle data ....................................... 281Vehicle identification number .......... 272Vehicle identification plate .............. 272Vehicle tool kit .................................. 236Voltage supply

Fuses ............................................. 242

WWarning

Stickers ........................................... 25Warning and indicator lamp

Power assistance for the steering .. 199Warning and indicator lamps

Brakes ........................................... 192Check Engine ................................. 196Coolant .......................................... 195Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 193Electrical step ................................ 199ESP® .............................................. 190ESP® function ................................ 194Overview .......................................... 34Seat belt ........................................ 198

Warning lamp .................................... 237Warning triangle ................................ 237Warning- and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 191Air filter .......................................... 197ASR ................................................ 190BAS ................................................ 191Battery charge ............................... 194Brake wear .................................... 194Bulbs .............................................. 198Doors ............................................. 198Engine oil level ............................... 195Preglow .......................................... 197

Index 21

Reserve fuel ................................... 196Tire pressure monitor .................... 197Water separator ............................. 198Windshield washer fluid ................. 198

Warranty .............................................. 23Washer fluid

Adding ........................................... 220Capacities ...................................... 281Display message ............................ 189Indicator lamp ................................ 198Notes ............................................. 281Wiping with ...................................... 94

WheelsChanging a wheel .......................... 262Checking ........................................ 244Cleaning ......................................... 231Important safety notes .................. 243Installing the adapter (sparewheel) ............................................ 265Interchanging/changing ................ 262Mounting a new wheel ................... 266Mounting a wheel .......................... 263Removing a wheel .......................... 265Removing andmounting the sparewheel ............................................. 269Snow chains .................................. 246Storing ........................................... 262Tightening torque ........................... 267Wheel size/tire size ....................... 268

Window curtain air bag ....................... 46Windows

see Side windowsWindshield

Cleaning ......................................... 231Defrosting ...................................... 102

Windshield heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 103Switching on/off ........................... 103

Windshield washer fluidAdding ........................................... 220Indicator lamp ................................ 198

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ..................... 96Rain and light sensor ....................... 94Rear window wiper .......................... 95Replacing the wiper blades .............. 95

Setting the sensitivity (vehicleswith steering wheel buttons andrain/light sensor) ........................... 170Switching on/off .............................. 94Wiping with windshield washerfluid ................................................. 94

Winter diesel ..................................... 274Winter driving

Slippery road surfaces ................... 134Snow chains .................................. 246

Winter operationGeneral notes ................................ 245Radiator cover ................................. 29

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 245Setting a limit speed ...................... 131

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 231Replacing ......................................... 95

Workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

22 Index

Operating Instructions

Before the first journeyThese instructions, the Maintenance or ServiceBooklet and the additional equipment-specificinstructions are integral parts of the vehicle.Keep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass on alldocuments to the new owner.Before you first drive off, read these documentscarefully and familiarize yourself with your vehi-cle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthese Operating Instructions. Failure to observethe instructionsmay lead to damage to the vehi-cle or personal injury.Vehicle damage caused by a failure to observethe instructions is not covered by the New Vehi-cle Limited Warranty.

Limited warranty! Follow the instructions in this Operator'sManual about the proper operation of yourvehicle as well as about possible vehicle dam-age. Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contravention of these instructionsis not covered by the Limited Warranty of thedistributor named on the inside of the frontcover.

Vehicle equipmentThese Operating Instructions describe all mod-els and standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety. The equipment in your vehiclemay there-fore differ from that shown in the descriptionsand illustrations.The original purchase contract documentationfor your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys-tems in your vehicle.If you have questions about equipment andoperation, consult any authorized SprinterDealer.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe Limited Warranty for your vehicle is inaccordance with the warranty terms in the Ser-vice and Warranty Information booklet.Your authorized Sprinter dealer will replace andrepair all factory-installed parts in accordancewith the terms of the following warranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyRExhaust System WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws ("LemonLaws")

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and AccessoriesWarranties. You can obtain these from anyauthorized Sprinter dealer.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedSprinter dealer for a replacement. The newService andWarranty Information booklet willbe posted to you.

Customer information for CaliforniaIn California you are entitled to demand thatyour vehicle be exchanged or that the purchaseor leasing price be refunded if Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or authorized workshops or ser-vice centers are not able, after several justifiablerepairs, to rectify major damage to or malfunc-tions of the vehicle as covered by the contrac-tual warranty provisions. Customers who pur-chase or lease a vehicle can have the vehiclerepaired within a period of 18 months afterdelivery or after a mileage of up to 29,000 km(equals approx. 18,000 miles), whichevercomes first, if:(1) the same serious defect or damage which

could lead to fatal or serious injuries to theoccupants of the vehicle during driving hasbeen repaired at least twice and Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been informed in writing ofthe necessity of such a repair.

(2) the same defect or damage, although lessserious than described in (1), has been

Introduction 23

repaired at least four times and Mercedes-Benz has been informed of the necessity ofsuch a repair in writing.

(3) the vehicle cannot be operated for morethan 30 calendar days due to repairs result-ing from the same or other major defects ordamage.

Please send written notification to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Information bookletdescribes all the necessary maintenance workwhich should be performed at regular intervals.Always bring the Service and Warranty Informa-tion booklet with you when taking the vehicle toan authorized Sprinter dealer. Your customerservice advisor enters each service into the Ser-vice and Warranty Information booklet for you.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram provides you with technical assistance inthe case of a breakdown. Your toll-free calls tothe Roadside Assistance Hotline are answeredby our staff around the clock. 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)Further information can be found in theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance-Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section of the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet (Canada). Both are located in your vehi-cle document wallet.

Change of address or ownerPlease use the " Notice of Change of Address"form in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet to inform us of a change of address, orsimply phone the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) on hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) on

1-800-387-0100. This enables us, if necessary,to contact you at any time.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all theliterature in the vehicle so that it is available forthe next owner.If your vehicle was purchased as a used vehicle,please send us the "Notice of Purchase of UsedCar" from the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet or phone the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) on hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) on1-800-387-0100.

Operating the vehicle outside of theUSA and CanadaWhen traveling abroad with your vehicle,observe the following points:RService facilities or replacement parts maynot be available immediately.RUnleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelcan cause damage to the catalytic converter.RThe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available inEurope through our European Delivery Program.Please consult an authorized Sprinter dealer forfurther information, or write to one of the fol-lowing addresses:In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

24 Introduction

Proper use

Observe the following information when oper-ating your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc-tionsRthe technical data in these Operating Instruc-tionsRtraffic laws and regulationsRmotor vehicle laws and safety standardsThere are various warning stickers affixed to thevehicle. If you remove warning stickers, you andothers may fail to recognize the dangers. Leavethe warning stickers in their original position.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The general operating permit for your vehiclecould be rendered invalid if you carry out mod-ifications to electronic components, their soft-ware as well as wiring.

G WARNINGGases and fluids from substances that con-stitute a health hazard or react aggressivelycan escape even from securely closed con-tainers. When transporting such substancesin the vehicle interior, your ability to concen-trate or your health could be affected duringthe journey. Malfunctions, short circuits orelectrical component system failures mayalso result. There is a risk of an accident andfire.

Do not store or transport any substances inthe vehicle interior which are hazardous tohealth or react aggressively.

These instructions must also be observed forvehicles where the cargo compartment is notfully separated from the driver's cab.Partition with door/window: always keep thedoor/window in the partition closed duringtransport.Examples of substances that are hazardous tohealth and/or react aggressively:RSolventsRFuelROil and greaseRCleaning agentsRAcids

Protection of the environment

Economic and environmentally awaredriving

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:

Introduction 25

Z

Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental issues and recommen-dationsWhen prompted by this Operator's Manual todispose of materials, please try to regenerateand recycle these materials. Observe all rele-vant environmental guidelines and regulationswhen disposing of materials. This helps to pro-tect the environment.

Operating safety and vehicle approval

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. The guidelines must beobserved during disposal.In California, you can find more information onthe Internet at www.dtsc.ca.gov.

Notes on operating the vehicleThere is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle makes contact with the ground,e.g. on a high curb or a loose road surfaceRyou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. acurb, speed bump or potholeRa heavy object hits the underbody or chassiscomponent

In these or similar situations, the vehicle body/frame, the underbody, chassis components,wheels or tires could be damaged even if this isnot visible from the outside. Components thathave been damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail or no longer be able to assimilate theloads occurring in the event of an accident. If theunderbody paneling is damaged, flammablematerial, such as leaves, grass or twigs, couldcollect between the underbody and underbodypaneling. These materials could ignite if theyremain in contact with hot components of theexhaust system for an extended period.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.

26 Introduction

When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immedi-ately at a qualified specialist workshop. If youbecome awarewhen continuing the journey thatdriving safety has been effected, stop as soon aspossible in accordance with the traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified special-ist workshop.

Declaration of conformity

Radio-based vehicle componentsUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following two conditions: 1) Thesedevices may not cause harmful interference. 2.This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes or modificationsnot expressly approved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: 1) These devicesmay notcause interference, and 2) these devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device".

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.

Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Changing the engine power output! Increases in engine power can:Rchange the emission valuesRcause malfunctionsRcause consequential damageThe operating reliability of the engine is notguaranteed in all cases.

Any tampering with the engine managementsystem in order to increase the engine poweroutput will lead to the loss of the New VehicleLimited Warranty and other warranty entitle-ments.If you sell the vehicle, inform the purchaserabout the changes to the engine power output ofthe vehicle. If you do not inform the buyer, thismay constitute a punishable offense undernational legislation.

Qualified specialist workshopsAn authorized Sprinter Dealer is a qualified spe-cialist workshop.A qualified specialist workshop has the neces-sary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifica-tions to correctly carry out the work required onthe vehicle.This is especially the case for work relevant tosafety. Observe the notes in theMaintenance orService Booklet.The following work should always be carried outat qualified specialist workshop:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRmodifications as well as installations andalterationsRwork on electronic componentsFor this reason, we recommend an authorizedSprinter Dealer.

! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, such ascontrol units, sensors, actuating componentsand connector leads, at a qualified specialist

Introduction 27

Z

workshop. Vehicle components may other-wise wear more quickly and the vehicle'soperating permit may be invalidated.

Problems with your vehicleIf you experience problems with your vehicle,particularly problems which could jeopardizevehicle safety, consult an authorized Sprinterdealer to have the problems diagnosed and rec-tified. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, consult an authorized Sprinter dealeragain or write to one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting malfunctions relevant tosafetyUSA only:The following text is published as required of allmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LL.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LL.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can find more information on vehicle safetyat:http://www.safercar.gov

Registering your vehicleMercedes-Benz may ask its authorized Sprinterdealers to carry out technical inspections oncertain vehicles. This is always the case if thequality or safety of the vehicle is improved as aresult of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz canonly inform you about vehicle checks if it hasyour registration data.Your registration data is not stored if:Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at anauthorized Sprinter DealerRyour vehicle has never been inspected at anauthorized Sprinter Dealer

It is advisable to register your vehicle with anauthorized Sprinter Dealer. Inform an author-ized Sprinter dealer as soon as possible aboutany change of address or vehicle ownership.

Attachments, bodies, equipment andconversions

Information about body/equipmentmounting directives! For safety reasons, have add-on equipmentmanufactured and installed according to theSprinter body/equipment mounting direc-tives in force. These body/equipment mount-ing directives ensure that the chassis and thebody form one unit and that maximum oper-ating and road safety is achieved.We recommend for safety reasons that:Ryou carry out no other modifications to thevehicle.Ryou obtain the agreement of the distributornamed on the inside of the front cover forany deviations from the approved body/equipment mounting directives.

Approval from certified inspection agenciesor official approvals cannot rule out risks toyour safety.

Please observe the information concerningMercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (Y page 29).

28 Introduction

Further information can be obtained at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

G WARNINGThe function of systems or components canbe affected by conversions or modificationsto the vehicle. They might not function prop-erly anymore and/or jeopardize the opera-tional safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Conversions or modifications should alwaysbe carried out at qualified specialist work-shop.

If you intend tomakemodifications to your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that you contactthe distributor named on the inside of the frontcover. There you will receive all the necessaryinformation and a charge may be levied.You alone accept the responsibility if body man-ufacturers or dealers make modifications thataffect the final certification of the engine, thevehicle or the equipment. This also applies tothe identification and documentation of modifi-cations to the affected vehicle components.You are responsible for certification and confir-mation that:Rall the applicable standards and regulationsthat are affected by the vehicle modificationare metRthe modified vehicle fulfills the vehicle safetystandards and emissions laws and regula-tionsRthe modifications or installation of accesso-ries does not affect the safety of the vehicle

We are not responsible for the final certification,product liability or warranty claims which resultfrom the modifications. This applies to:Rthe modified components, assemblies or sys-temsRany resulting noncompliance with any of theemissions laws and regulations or the motorvehicle safety standardsRany consequences arising from the changesthat make the vehicle less safe or even renderit defective

We do not assume responsibility as the final-stage manufacturer or for the consequentialproduct liability.

Notes on the radiatorEven seemingly small changes to the vehicle,such as attaching a radiator trim for winter driv-ing, is not permitted. Do not cover up the radi-ator. Do not use thermal mats, insect protectioncovers or anything similar.Otherwise, the values of the diagnostic systemmay be affected. Some of these values arelegally prescribed and must always be correct.

Information on the cargo compartmentfloor! The wooden or plastic cargo area floor fittedat the factory is an integral component of thevehicle structure. The vehicle body could bedamaged if you have the load area floorremoved. This then affects the securing ofloads and the maximum loading capacity ofthe lashing points is no longer guaranteed.Therefore, do not have the load area floorremoved.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

H Environmental noteWe supply reconditioned assemblies andparts which are of the same quality as newparts. The same New Vehicle Limited War-ranty applies as for new parts.

Introduction 29

Z

The operating safety of the vehicle could bejeopardized if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevantsystems, e.g. the brake system. Only use genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.We test genuine Sprinter parts, as well as con-version parts and accessories that have beenspecifically approved for the type of vehicle, for:RReliabilityRSafetyRSuitabilityDespite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Therefore,we accept no responsibility for the use of suchparts in Sprinter vehicles, even if they have beenofficially approved or independently approvedby a testing center.In some countries, certain parts are only offi-cially approved for installation or modification ifthey comply with legal requirements. All genu-ine Sprinter parts satisfy these requirements.Make sure that all parts are suitable for yourvehicle.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) and engine numberwhen ordering genuineSprinter parts (Y page 272).

QR code for rescue card

The QR Code stickers are affixed to the B-pillaron the driver's and front-passenger side.In the event of an accident the rescue servicesuse the QR Code to quickly find the rescue cardfor your vehicle. The current rescue card con-tains the most important information on yourvehicle, e.g. the electric cable routes, in a com-pact form.Further information can be found at http://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data RecordingA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.

These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateReventsRfaultsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. airbag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults anddefectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand fault data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarranty eventsRquality assuranceThe vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. You can obtain moreinformation there, if required.After a fault has been rectified, the informationis deleted from the fault memory or is continu-ally overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-

30 Introduction

tion with other information (if necessary, afterconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR isto record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit-uations, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;RWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-

tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDRunder normal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca-tion) are recorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement could combine the EDRdatawith the type of personally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a crash investigation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by an EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Introduction 31

Z

Cockpit

Function Page

: Door control panel 38

; Light switch 80

= Combination switch• turn signals 82• high-beam headlamps 82• windshield wipers 94• rear window wiper 95

? Cruise control lever 137

A Steering wheel without orwith buttons 36

B Instrument cluster 33

C Stowage compartment• 3.5 mm audio jack 207• USB port 207

D Timer for the auxiliary warm-air heater (auxiliary heating) 112

E • Stowage compartmentwith interior light 85• Overhead control panel 37

F Rear-view mirror 78

Function Page

G PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 148

H Opens/closes the right-handside window 70

I Stowage compartment (jackand vehicle tool kit) 236

J Glove box 200

K Center console 36

L Selector lever (automatictransmission) 121

M Ignition lock 117

N Further control panels 38

O Steering wheel buttons 36

P Engages/releases the park-ing brake 133

Q Horn

R Opens the hood 214

S Steering wheel buttons 36

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttonsFunction Page

: Speedometer 159

; Tachometer 159

= f,g Brightens/dims theinstrument cluster lighting 159

? Fuel gage with fuel filler flaplocation indicator 159

A DisplayVehicles without steeringwheel buttons 160Vehicles with steering wheelbuttons 161

Function Page

B Reset button9 33

C Menu button4• changes standard display 160• selects menus 161

D Service button ËChecks the engine oil level 216

Instrument cluster 33

Ataglance

Indicator and warning lamps

Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttonsFunction Page

: Speedometer with warn-ing and indicator lamps

d ESP® warning lamp 190ASR warning lamp 190

% Coolant level too low 195

? Coolant temperature toohigh 195

6 Restraint systems malfunc-tion 40

Ä Indicator lamp, distancewarning 140

· Warning lamp, distancewarning 140

à Warning and indicator lamps,Lane Keeping Assist 144

Function Page

b Brake fluid level too low 192EBD malfunctioning 191Trailer brake force boostermalfunction 192

4 Engine oil level warning 195

; Check Engine indicator lamp 196

% Preglow 118Preglow system malfunction 197

; Indicator and warninglamps

G Left-hand turn signal 82

! ABS malfunction 191

h Tire pressure loss or the tirepressure monitor is malfunc-tioning (USA only) 197Tire pressure loss (Canadaonly) 251

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Function Page

¦ Fluid level too low in wind-shield washer/headlampcleaning system 198

å DEF supply low or contami-nated/diluted 159Exhaust gas aftertreatmentmalfunction 193

Ä Indicator lamp, distancewarning 140

· Warning lamp, distancewarning 140

à Warning and indicator lamps,Lane Keeping Assist 144

1 Door or hood open 198Electrically operated stepmalfunction 199

# Brake pads/linings worn 194

+ LOW RANGE active 145

K High-beam headlamps on(vehicle with steering wheelbuttons) 82

J Right-hand turn signal 82

: ASR malfunction 54BAS malfunction 191

h ESP® malfunction 190

È Dirt accumulation in air filter 197

6 Reserve fuel 159Fuel filler cap open 196

Function Page

: Water in the fuel 198

m Fuel filter dirty 198

# Battery charging malfunction 194

b Bulb defective 198

= Tachometer with warningand indicator lamps

c Parking brake applied 133

L Low-beam headlamps on 80

K Working speed governor(ADR) on 151

Ð Power steering assistancemalfunction 199

K High-beam headlamps on(vehicle without steeringwheel buttons) 82

å DEF supply low or contami-nated/diluted 159Exhaust gas aftertreatmentmalfunction 193

| Reserve fuel 196Fuel filler cap open 196

h ESP® malfunction 190

7 Fasten seat belts 198

i Corresponding messages may also beshown in the display (Y page 173).

Instrument cluster 35

Ataglance

Steering wheel buttons

Function Page

: Display 161

On-board computer opera-tion

; Selects a submenu or adjuststhe volume 161W Up/increases the vol-umeX Down/reduces the vol-umeUsing the telephone 1726 Accepts a call/startsdialing~ Ends a call/rejects anincoming call

= Scrolls from one menu toanother 161V ForwardsU BackScrolls within a menu 1619 Forwards: Back

Center console

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 201

; Audio 10 or Audio 15 (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

= Air-conditioning controlpanel 97Paper holder1 203

? Center console controlpanel

c Switches the left/right-handseat heating on/off 77

z Switches the windshieldheating on/off 103

| Switches the rear windowdefroster on/off 103

f Activates/deactivatesPARKTRONIC 150

£ Switches the hazard warninglamps on/off 83

1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Function Page

à Activates/deactivates ASR 54

ÃÄ

Central locking, interior/rearcompartment 63

æ Activates/deactivates thedistance warning function 140

j Activates/deactivates LaneKeeping Assist 144

k Activates/deactivates BlindSpot Assist 141

A • Stowage compartment or• CD changer; see the sepa-rate operating instructions,or

B Cup holder with: 204• Ashtray 205• Cigarette lighter 205

C 12 V socket 206

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: Microphone for the mobilephone 206

; Switches the right-handreading lamp on/off 85

= Switches the automatic inte-rior lighting on/off 85

? • Eyeglasses compartmentor 201• Anti-Theft Alarm system(ATA) 57

A Switches the interior lightingon/off 85

B Switches the left-hand read-ing lamp on/off 85

Overhead control panel 37

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 78

; Selects an exterior mirror 78

= Opens/closes the left-handside window 70

? Opens/closes the right-handside window 70

Further control panels

Control panel between the lightswitch and the steering wheel

Function Page

y Switches the auxiliary heat-ing on/off 107

± Switches the heater boosterfunction on/off 110

EF

Sets the working speed151

E Switches the working speedgovernor (ADR) on/off 151

´·

Ventilates the cargo com-partment 115

38 Further control panelsAt

aglance

Control panel between the steeringwheel and the ignition lock

Function Page

lk

Switches the central rearcompartment lighting on/off 85

; Engages/disengages all-wheel drive 145

m Activates/deactivates LOWRANGE transmission ratio 145

Further control panels 39

Ataglance

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Occupant safety

Restraint system introductionThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 42)Rhave the seat and head restraint adjustedproperly (Y page 72)

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 72).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 44).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-

ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 46).See "Children in the vehicle" for information onchildren traveling with you in the vehicle as wellas on child restraint systems (Y page 47).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.

If it is necessary to modify components of therestraint system to accommodate a person withdisabilities, contact an authorized Sprinterdealer for details. USA only: contact our Cus-tomer Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267 fordetails.

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp on theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.

40 Occupant safetySafety

Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few secondsRgoes out but then lights up again while theengine is running, for example

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This can affectfor example the Emergency TensioningDevice or the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat beltsThe seat belt system also includes a belt forcelimiter for the relevant seat if the vehicle isequipped with a front air bag.On vehicles with a front-passenger benchseat, only the seat belt of the outer front-passenger seat has a belt force limiter.

The seat belt system does not include an Emer-gency Tensioning Device and a belt force limiterif the vehicle does not have a driver's air bag.If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.

The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The belt force limiters are synchronized with thefront air bags which absorb part of the deceler-ation force. This can reduce the force exerted onthe vehicle occupants during an accident.The Emergency Tensioning Device of the front-passenger seat is triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belt.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. This

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

poses an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannotwear the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional and suitable restraint system. If theseat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-form its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this vehicle. The childrestraint system must be appropriate to theage, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 47) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructions

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by the sales organization named onthe inside cover.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 41).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted onlyinto the belt buckle belonging to that seatRthe seat belt is pulled tight across your bodyAvoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twistedOnly then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routedacross the center of your shoulderThe shoulder section of the seat belt shouldnot touch your neck or be routed under yourarm or behind your back. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lapas low down as possibleThe lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.

42 Occupant safetySafety

If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objectsIf you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat beltInfants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupantsAlso ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 208).

Fastening and adjusting seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 42).

Basic illustration

X Adjust the seat (Y page 72).The seat backrest must be in an almostupright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet=and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.

X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder sectionof the seat belt to tighten the belt across yourbody.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide belt outlet= up.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release? and slidebelt outlet= down.

X Let go of belt outlet release? in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt outletengages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 48).

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Belt warning for drivers and front pas-sengersThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for 6 seconds after each timethe ignition is switched on. After the engine hasbeen started, it goes out once the driver hasfastened the seat belt.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. Thiswarning tone stops after amaximumof six seconds or once the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's seat belt is notfastened, a warning tone sounds. The warningtone sounds for 60 seconds or until the driver'sseat belt is fastened.If the driver's seat belt is unfastened during thejourney, the seat belt warning is activated again.

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the SRS/AIRBAG or AIRBAG mark-ing.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 46).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended and

could even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forward or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.RAlways secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rear seat.The front-passenger front air bag cannot bedeactivated.RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 47) and on the "Child restraint sys-

44 Occupant safetySafety

tem on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 51) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an air bagRthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillarRthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,hanging on the grab handles or coat hooksRno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side win-dowsRno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box andthe center console.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.

Side impact air bagsDepending on the vehicle's equipment, somefront seats are equipped with a side impact airbag; see the AIRBAG label on the outer side ofthe seat backrest.

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Only use seat covers that have been approvedfor your vehicle by the sales organizationnamed on the inside front cover.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags: deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame above the front doors.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 46).

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGEmergency Tensioning Devices that havedeployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have pyrotechnically triggered EmergencyTensioning Devices replaced immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

46 Occupant safetySafety

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 40)Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged inthe belt buckle of the respective front seat

The Emergency Tensioning Device of the front-passenger seat is triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belt.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bagsRWindow curtain air bag on the side on whichthe impact occurs

The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do

they provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint system control unit detects a sideimpact, the relevant restraint system compo-nents are deployed independently of each other.If the system determines a need for additionalprotection for the vehicle occupants, the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices are triggered.RSide impact air bag on the side of impact,independently of the Emergency TensioningDevice and the use of the seat beltRWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt andindependently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:Rfrontal collisionRside impact

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason, westrongly advise that you install a child restraintsystem on a rear seat. Children are generallybetter protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this vehicle. The child

Children in the vehicle 47

Safety

Z

restraint system must be appropriate to theage, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.

Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 42).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver'sseat belt, are equipped with a special seat beltretractor. When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt cannotslacken once the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-let.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down so thatthe seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

48 Children in the vehicleSafety

Removing the child restraint system and deac-tivating the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the release button of the seat beltbuckle and guide the seat belt tongue backtowards the belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesFurther information about the correct childrestraint system is available fromany authorizedSprinter dealer.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage and loads securely under"Loading guidelines" (Y page 208).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

Securing systems for child restraint systemsinclude:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRTop Tether anchorage

i If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the notes on "Childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat" (Y page 51).

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

A statement by the child restraint manufacturerof compliance with these standards can befound on the instruction label on the childrestraint system. You will also find the state-ment in the instructionmanual providedwith thechild restraint system.

Children in the vehicle 49

Safety

Z

Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system are installed between the seatcushion and the seat backrest:Ron the outer left and right seat on rear benchseats with 3 seatsRon the outer left seat on rear bench seats with2 seats

Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem and the vehicle. This helps reduce therisk of injury even further. If the child restraintsystem has a Top Tether belt, this should beused at all times.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the Top Tether belt has been incorrectlysecured, e.g. to an eyelet in the cargo com-partment, the child restraint system is notcorrectly kept in place. It therefore cannotperform its intended protective function in theevent of an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Only secure the Top Tether hook to the TopTether anchorage intended for this purpose.

50 Children in the vehicleSafety

Top Tether anchorage points

Example: rear bench seat with three seatsTop Tether anchorages; are on the bench seatlegs on the rear side of the respective rear benchseat.

X Slide head restraint: up.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Make sure youobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

X Route the Top Tether belt? under headrestraint: between the two head restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook= into Top Tetheranchorage;.Make sure that:RTop Tether hook= is hooked into TopTether anchorage;, as shownRTop Tether belt? is not twisted

X Tighten Top Tether belt?. Make sure youobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

X If necessary, push the head restraint backdown slightly (Y page 76). Make sure thatyou do not interferewith the correct routing ofTop Tether belt?.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a childrestraint system on a rear seat.

Rearward-facing child restraint systemThe front-passenger front air bag cannot bedeactivated. Always install a rearward-facingchild restraint system on a suitable rear seat.Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system.

Forward-facing child restraint systemAlways move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible if the child must be secured onthe front-passenger seat in a forward-facingchild restraint system. The base of the childrestraint system must always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat. Asmuch aspossible of the backrest of the child restraintsystem must be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmay not be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure the shoulder beltis correctly secured, running from the belt outletto the belt guide of the child restraint system.The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwardand down from the vehicle belt outlet. Adjust thebelt outlet and front-passenger seat as required.Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system.

Children in the vehicle 51

Safety

Z

Override features/Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Child-proof locks for rear doors (Y page 52).

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear door

Rear door: Child safety bolt2 Door secured – then make sure that the

child-proof locks are working properly.3 Door releasedThe child-proof lock on the doors enable you tosecure each door individually.A door with an activated child-proof lock cannotbe opened from the inside. If the vehicle isunlocked, the door can be opened from the out-side.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.

52 Pets in the vehicleSafety

As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

OverviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RASR (Acceleration Skid Control)RBAS (Brake Assist System)REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of accident nor override thelaws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, braking in good timeand for staying in your lane. Always adapt yourdriving style to the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a sufficient, safe dis-tance from other road users. Drive carefully.Please note that the driving safety systemsdescribed only work optimally when:Rthere is adequate contact between the tiresand the road surfaceRyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary, when the road conditionsare wintry

Pay particular attention to the informationregarding tires, tire tread and winter operationunder "Wheels and tires" (Y page 243).

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 53).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems will alsofail, including driving safety systems. Observethe information relating to the ! warninglamp (Y page 191).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.The yellow ! warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. The lamp goes out when the engine startsrunning.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsating in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal with force until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

Driving safety systems 53

Safety

Z

ASR (acceleration skid control)

General notes

Important safety notesObserve the important safety guidelines for thedriving safety system (Y page 53).ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor suspend the laws of physics if the driverdoes not pay attention when pulling away oraccelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions.If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drivein a vehicle with this option, ASR will be deacti-vated for the duration of the activation/deacti-vation process.Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if ASRismalfunctioning, the: indicator lamp lightsup while the engine is running and the enginepower may be reduced (Y page 191).ASR significantly improves traction, i.e. thetransmission of power from the tires to the roadsurface, and thus increases the vehicle's drivingstability. If the driving wheels start to spin, ASRbrakes individual drive wheels and limits theengine torque. ASR thus significantly assists youwhen pulling away and accelerating, especiallyon wet or slippery roads.If traction on the road surface is not sufficient,even ASR will not allow you to pull away withoutdifficulty. The type of tires and total weight of thevehicle as well as the gradient of the road alsoplay a crucial role.If ASR intervenes, thed warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes.

Activating/deactivating ASR

G WARNINGIf deactivated, ASR will not attempt to stabi-lize the vehicle during pulling away and accel-eration. There is an increased risk of skiddingand of an accident.Only deactivate ASR in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! If you deactivate ASR, ESP® will still inter-vene to stabilize the vehicle. Frequent brakingautomatically triggered by ESP® can damagethe brake system.

For this reason, deactivate ASR only brieflyand when absolutely necessary.

When ESP® is intervening and thedwarninglamp in the instrument cluster is flashing, leaveASR on. In this case, only depress the acceler-ator pedal as far as required when pulling away.X Press theà button.If ASR is deactivated, thed warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up.

ASR is automatically activated when the engineis started.It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelIf you deactivate ASR:Rengine torque is not limited and the drivewheels are able to spin. The spinning wheelswill then achieve a cutting effect for bettertraction.Rtraction control remains active through brakeintervention. If a drive wheel attains its tiretraction limit because one side of the road isslippery, for example, that wheel is braked.The traction is then increased in this situation.Ractive brake intervention by ESP® to increasedriving stability remains active. Thedwarning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes when ESP® is intervening.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.

54 Driving safety systemsSafety

In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if theBAS driving safety system is malfunctioning,the: warning lamp lights up while theengine is running (Y page 191).BAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake quickly, BAS automat-ically increases the brake pressure, therebyreducing the stopping distance.The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

EBD monitors and controls the brake pressureto the rear wheels. This enables EBD to improvehandling during braking.Observe the information on warning and indica-tor lamps (Y page 191).

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provideany vehicle stabilization. There is an increasedrisk of skidding or of an accident.Exercise caution when continuing to drive.Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Do not run the vehicle on a roller dynamom-eter (e.g. for performance tests). If you mustoperate the vehicle on a roller dynamometer,

please consult a qualified specialist workshopin advance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

If you activate or deactivate the all-wheel drivein a vehicle with this option, ESP® will be deac-tivated for the duration of the activation/deac-tivation process.If ESP® is malfunctioning, theh indicatorlamp lights up while the engine is running andthe engine power may be reduced(Y page 190).

i Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

4ETS (Electronic Traction System)! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

4ETS is only active when all-wheel drive is acti-vated (Y page 145).4ETS ensures permanent drive for all fourwheels, and together with ESP® it improves thevehicle's traction.If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction:RWhen pulling away, make use of the tractioncontrol integrated in ESP®. Depress theaccelerator pedal as far as necessary.RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains(Y page 246). This is the only way to get the fullbenefit from the all-wheel drive system.

Crosswind AssistCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deac-tivated or disabled because of a malfunction.Crosswind Assist does not react:Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations, e.g.as a result of uneven surfaces or potholes.Rif the vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow orice or when hydroplaning.Rto large and sudden steering movements bythe driver.

Driving safety systems 55

Safety

Z

Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon asthe driving conditions return to normal.Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswindgusts that can impair the road holding of yourvehicle when driving straight ahead. CrosswindAssist intervenes depending on the directionand strength of the crosswind.A stabilizing brake application helps you to keepthe vehicle on track.Information appears in the instrument cluster Inthe event that Crosswind Assist intervenesnoticeably.On vehicleswithout steeringwheel buttons:thed indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter flashes.On vehicleswith steeringwheel buttons: thed indicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes and the message Crosswind AssistActive appears in the multifunction display.Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle speedof 50mph (80 km/h) when the vehicle is drivingstraight ahead or cornering gently.

Emergency exit

Emergency exit window

G WARNINGThe emergency exit window cannot be lockedin place. You risk injury if you exit the vehiclethrough the emergency exit window.RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped,both when closing and when opening theemergency exit window.RThe opened emergency exit window mustbe held in place by another person.

Pay attention to traffic conditions.

G WARNINGIf the emergency exit window is unlockedwhile driving, it could open and slam shut andconsequently fall down. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Before starting off, make sure that the emer-gency exit window is locked and the lockingpins are undamaged.

! Make sure there is sufficient clearancewhen opening the emergency exit window.

Hold the open window in position. You couldotherwise damage the emergency exit win-dow.

The emergency exit window is intended for usein an emergency only and must not be openedunless the vehicle is stationary. The emergencyexit window is the first window behind the driv-er's seat on the driver's side. It is marked by the"Emergency Exit" label.X To open: position both handles: vertically.This will break locking pins;.The window is unlocked.

X Swing the window outward by the handlesand hold it in this position. Make sure there issufficient clearance when doing so.

X To close: close the window.X Position both handles: horizontally. Makesure that the locks= are inside in front of thewindow frame.The window is locked.

X Replace locking pins; at the latest beforestarting on a new journey.You can obtain information on this at anyqualified specialist workshop.

In an emergency, or after an accident, the vehi-cle occupants can exit the vehicle through theemergency exit window.Observe the following notes to make sure thatthe emergency exit windowcanbe used safely inthe event of an emergency:RBefore beginning a journey, inform the vehicleoccupants of the emergency exit window andexplain how to use it. Make sure to explicitlypoint out the risks described here.ROnly vehicle occupants who know how to usethe emergency exit window are permitted tosit next to it.RAccess to the emergency exit window mustremain unobstructed. Do not place any large

56 Emergency exitSafety

or heavy objects on or in front of the seatsnext to the emergency exit window.RThe window handles must not be used ashooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bags oritems of clothing.RWhen exiting the vehicle through the emer-gency exit window, pay attention to the vehi-cle height and the local conditions. Particu-larly children and smaller adults may requireassistance when exiting the vehicle.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate: remove the key from the ignitionlock.

X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.Always take the key with you and lock the vehi-cle when leaving the vehicle. If you leave the keyin the vehicle, anyone can start the engine.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be startedwhen the starter battery is fully charged, theimmobilizer may be faulty. Contact an author-ized Sprinter dealer or call 1-877-762-8267(in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)X To arm: close all doors.X Lock the vehicle with the key.The indicator lamp in the central locking but-ton (Y page 63) flashes.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the key.The indicator lamp in the central locking but-ton (Y page 63) goes out.i Cargo Van and Passenger Van only:Unless you open a door within 40 secondsafter unlocking the vehicle:Rthe vehicle will be locked againRthe anti-theft alarm system will be armedagain

If the alarm system is armed, a visual and audi-ble alarm is triggered by the following:RUnlocking the vehicle from insideROpening a doorROpening the hood

i The alarm is not switched off, even if youimmediately close the open door that has trig-gered it, for example.

X To stop the alarm: press the% button onthe remote control.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.The alarm stops.

Tow-away alarm

OperationA visual and audible alarm is triggered if theinclination of the vehicle changes when the tow-away alarm is armed. This can be the case if thevehicle is raised on one side, for example.

Arming and disarmingThe tow-away alarm is automatically armedapproximately 20 seconds after you lock thevehicle.The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva-ted when you unlock the vehicle.

Disarming

Theft deterrent locking system 57

Safety

Z

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button:.When the button is released, indicatorlamp; in the button lights up for about5 seconds.

X Lock the vehicle.The tow-away alarm is disarmed.

The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until youlock the vehicle again.Disarm the tow-away alarm when locking yourvehicle and:Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, on aferry or car transporter, for exampleRparking on a moving surface, as split-levelgarage

This will prevent false alarms.

Interior motion sensor

OperationIf the armed interior motion sensor detectsmotion in the vehicle interior, a visual and acous-tic alarm is triggered. This can happen if some-one reaches into the vehicle interior, for exam-ple.

Switching onX Close the side windows.X Make sure that nothing (such as mascots orcoat hangers) are hanging on the rear-viewmirror or on the grab handles on the head-liner.This will prevent false alarms.

X Lock the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is armed afterapproximately 40 seconds.

Switching offX Unlock vehicle.The interior motion sensor automaticallyswitches off.

Deactivating

X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Press button:.When the button is released, indicatorlamp; of the button lights up for about5 seconds.

X Lock the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is deactivated.

The interior motion sensor remains deactivateduntil you lock the vehicle again.Deactivate the interior motion sensor whenlocking your vehicle:Rwith people or animals remaining insideRwith the side windows remaining openRwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-porter, for example

This will prevent false alarms.

58 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Key

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer getout, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Do not keep the key with remote control:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another key with remote controlRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foilRin metallic objects, e.g. metal casesThis can affect the key's functionality.

Key functions of the remote control

General notesThe vehicle is equippedwith either 2 or 4 remotecontrols with a folding key, or 4 mechanicalkeys. In this Operator's Manual, both themechanical keys and the keys with remote con-trol are referred to as keys. The remote controlkey has a range of up to 32 ft (10 m). Use theremote control of the key only when in immedi-ate proximity of the vehicle. This prevents theft.Remote controls that are not included in thescope of delivery for the vehicle must be pro-grammed before use. Further information canbe obtained at any authorized Sprinter Dealer.The key's remote control locks/unlocks thedriver's door and/or the following centrally ifthe factory settings have not been changed:Rthe driver's and the front-passenger doorRthe sliding doorsRthe rear doors

i If the driver's or front-passenger door is notclosed, the corresponding door is not locked.If a sliding door or a rear door is not closedproperly, none of the rear doors are locked.

If there is a key is in the ignition lock, the remotecontrol is inoperative. When locking or unlock-ing the vehicle with the remote control, alwayspay attention to the indicator lamp signaling.Also check the locking knobs of the doors.

Key 59

Openingandclosing

Z

Unlocking/locking the vehicle with theremote control

Remote control with an integrated folding key: 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the

rear door; % To unlock the driver's door only or

unlock the vehicle centrally= & To lock the vehicle centrally? Key release buttonA Battery check lampX To unlock the driver's door: press the%button.The turn signals flash once. The theft deter-rent locking system is deactivated.

X To unlock the sliding doors and the reardoor: press the5 button.The turn signals flash once.

X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver'sdoor.

X Press the% button again within 2 sec-onds.The turn signals flash once.i If the surround lighting has been switchedon using the on-board computer(Y page 169), it goes on when the vehicle isunlocked.If you do not open a Cargo Van or PassengerVan within approximately 40 seconds ofunlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armedagain.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The indicator lamps flash three times whenthe theft deterrent locking system has beenarmed and all doors have been closed.

X Check the locking knobs on all the doors.The locking knobs must all be in the loweredposition.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle with themechanical key or the folding keyThe anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggered ifyou unlock and open the driver's door or the reardoor with the mechanical key or the folding key.The alarm can be disabled in the following twoways:X Press the% or& button on the remotecontrol.

OrX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

Driver's door

Rear door1 Locked2 Unlocked

60 KeyOp

eningandclosing

X To unlock the driver's or rear door: pressthe key release button on the remote control.The key folds out.

X Insert the key fully into the door lock and turnit to position2.The door is unlocked.

X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors except thedriver's door and, if necessary the rear door,from inside. To do this, press down the doorlocking buttons.

X Press the key release button on the remotecontrol.The key folds out.

X Insert the key fully into the driver's door lockand turn it to position1.The driver's door is locked.

Remote control battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The key batteries contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regard

for the environment. Check with your local gov-ernment’s disposal guidelines. California resi-dents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.We recommend that you have batterieschanged at a qualified specialist workshop.

Checking the batteriesX Press the% or& button for longer thantwo seconds.If battery indicator lamp (Y page 59) lights upbriefly, the batteries in the remote control stillhave sufficient charge. Otherwise, change thebatteries immediately.i If the remote control is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlock orRunlock the vehicle

Changing batteriesYou need aCR202523V cell battery, which canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.When changing the batteries, do not press anyof the buttons on the remote control.

X Press release button;.The key folds out.

X Remove battery compartment cover: in thedirection of the arrow.

Key 61

Openingandclosing

Z

X Remove the batteries from the battery tray.X Insert the new batteries into the battery traywith the positive pole facing upwards. Use alint-free cloth to do so.

X Align battery compartment cover: and pushit on until it audibly engages.

X Check the function of all the remote controlbuttons on the vehicle.

Problems with the key/remote control

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

It is no longer possible tolock the vehicle usingthe remote control.The turn signals do notflash when the vehicle islocked.

The doors are not closed properly.X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.

The central locking system has malfunctioned.X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 59).X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

It is no longer possible tolock or unlock the vehi-cle using the remotecontrol.

The key battery is weak or discharged.X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle from very closerange and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Replace the key battery (Y page 61).orX Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 59).

The remote control is faulty.X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 59).X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The key cannot beturned in the ignitionlock.

The steering lock has jammed mechanically.X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn thesteering wheel from side to side while doing so.

62 KeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using the key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting, andtry to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 228).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 238).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.

Central locking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even

fatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

You can open a locked front door from the insideat any time. You can open a locked sliding dooror rear door from the inside if it has been previ-ously unlocked from inside.

Locking and unlocking manually

Central locking buttonsUse the central locking buttons to centrallylock/unlock either the entire vehicle or just thesliding doors and rear doors from the inside.

Central locking 63

Openingandclosing

Z

X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: pressthe upperà central locking button whenthe doors are closed.When the entire vehicle is locked, the indica-tor lamp in theà central locking buttonlights up.i If the SmartKey has been removed or is inposition 0 in the ignition lock, the indicatorlamp in theà central locking buttonremains lit for 5 seconds.

X To lock/unlock the sliding doors and reardoors: press the lower section of theÄcentral locking button when the doors areclosed.When the sliding doors and rear doors arelocked, the indicator lamp in the upperÃcentral locking button lights up.

Automatic locking

General notesThe vehicle locks automatically as standardonce a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has beenreached. Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, the doors may be locked automaticallyonce the ignition is switched on. Information onthe functions of the automatic locking mecha-nism of your vehicle can be obtained from anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.If the automatic locking when driving function isactivated, there is a risk of being locked outwhen the vehicle is pushed or towed.For this reason, deactivate the automatic lock-ing when driving function:Rbefore pushing the vehicleRbefore towing the vehicleIf activated, automatic locking is deactivatedwhen the vehicle is unlocked or locked using thecentral locking button.Automatic locking is reactivated after the igni-tion is switched off or a door is opened with thevehicle stationary.

Activating automatic lockingwhen driv-ingX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock when the doors are closed.

X For the entire vehicle: press the upperÃcentral locking button until the indicator lampin the button flashes four times.

X For the sliding doors and rear doors only:press theÄ lower central locking buttonuntil the indicator lamp in theà upperbutton flashes four times.

Deactivating automatic locking whendrivingX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock when the doors are closed.

X For the entire vehicle: press theà uppercentral locking button until the indicator lampin the button flashes twice.

X For the sliding doors and rear doors only:press theÄ lower central locking buttonuntil the indicator lamp in theà upperbutton flashes twice.

Driver's door and front passengerdoor

! Only open the doors when road and trafficconditions permit. Make sure that there issufficient clearance when opening the doors.Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle orother vehicles.

You can open the driver's or front-passengerdoor from the inside at any time, even if it islocked.

64 Driver's door and front passenger doorOp

eningandclosing

X Pull door handle:.Locking knob; pops up.The door opens.

Sliding door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the open sliding door is not engaged, it couldmove on its own if the vehicle is on a slope.This could trap you or other persons. There isa risk of injury.Alwaysmake sure that the open sliding door isengaged.

! Only open the doors when road and trafficconditions permit. Make sure that there issufficient clearance when opening the doors.Otherwise, you could damage your vehicle orother vehicles.

The sliding door of your vehicle can be equippedwith an electrical access step. Observe thenotes on the electrical step when opening andclosing the sliding door (Y page 66).

Opening and closing from the outside

The sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the end stopwhen opened.i You can also lock the sliding door in placearound halfway when opening and closing.The door does not have to be opened fullywhen getting into or out of the vehicle. Theintermediate detent does not fully engage thesliding door.

X To open: pull door handle:.The sliding door opens.

X Push back the sliding door using door han-dle: until it engages.

X Check the sliding door detent.X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-wards by handle: until it closes.

Opening/closing from the inside

Interior door handle on the sliding doorThe sliding door is equipped with an activeretainer, which engages the door at the end stopwhen opened.i You can also lock the sliding door in placearound halfway when opening and closing.The door does not have to be opened fullywhen getting into or out of the vehicle. Theintermediate detent does not fully engage thesliding door.

X To unlock: pull locking knob= upwards.Only this sliding door unlocks. The otherdoors remain locked.

X To open: press button:.X Slide the sliding door by handle; back to thestop.

X Check the sliding door detent.The sliding door must be engaged.

X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-wards by door handle; until it engages.

X To lock: press locking knob= down.Only the sliding door is locked. All other doorsthat were previously unlocked remainunlocked.

Sliding door 65

Openingandclosing

Z

Electrical closing assistIf your vehicle is equippedwith electrical closingassist, you will require less force to close thesliding door.

Electrical step

Important safety notes! Always observe the ground clearance of thevehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehicles witha step, ground clearance is further restricted.Obstacles can damage the vehicle.If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe-cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, haveanother person direct you.

If you do not use the grab handle and the step,you could injure yourself when getting in and outof the vehicle.In order to reduce risks:Rdraw the passengers' attention to the electri-cal step. Wait until the electrical step is fullyextended.Rdo not jump out of the vehicle.Ronly use the grab handle and step. Only theyare designed for such a load.Rkeep grab handles, access steps and entrysills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow andice.

Operation and obstacle detection

Electrical stepThe sliding door of your vehicle can be equippedwith an electrical step.X When getting in and out of the vehicle, use thegrab handles and electrical step:.

Electrical step: automatically extends whenthe sliding door is opened and retracts when it isclosed.Electrical step: is equipped with an obstruc-tion detection device on the front side. If thestep comes into contact with an obstacle whileit is extending, it stops.After you have removed the obstacle, you mustfirst close the sliding door and open it onceagain so that the step can extend completely.

i If the electrical step obstructs loading, youcan prevent the step from extending whenopening the sliding door via obstacle detec-tion. The electrical step can then remainretracted and a forklift or other lifting equip-ment can be moved nearer to the cargo com-partment.

Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons: ifthe1 indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter lights up and a warning tone sounds, elec-trical step: is malfunctioning (Y page 199).Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if theElectrical Stepmessage is shown in the dis-play and a warning tone sounds, electricalstep: is malfunctioning (Y page 189).If electrical step: is malfunctioning, the stepmay only partially extend/retract or may notextend/retract at all. If a malfunction doesoccur, you will have to retract and lock electricalstep:manually before continuing the journey(Y page 66).Before passengers get out of the vehicle, letthem know that electrical step: might not beextended.

Emergency release! Driving with the step extended may result init being damaged.If the electrical step does not retract auto-matically, you will have to push it in and lock itinto place manually before continuing yourjourney.

66 Electrical stepOp

eningandclosing

X Pull R-clips; on both rods: on the under-side of the step out of their respective pins.

X Removewashers= and detach both rods:.

X Fold rods: into the housing in the step.X Push the step into its housing.

i When securing the step for the first time,you must pierce a film with the R-clips.

X Insert R-clips; into the step as far as theywill go through the holes on both sides of thehousing.The step is secured in its housing.

Rear doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you open a rear door, you could:Rendanger other people or road usersRbe caught by oncoming trafficThis is particularly the case if you open therear door more than 90°. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Only open the rear doors when traffic condi-tions permit. Always make sure that the reardoors are properly locked.

G WARNINGIf you open the rear doors 90°, the rear lightsare no longer visible. The vehicle will then bedifficult for other road users to see or will notbe seen by them at all, particularly if it is darkor visibility is poor. There is a risk of an acci-dent.You should therefore ensure in this and simi-lar situations that the vehicle is visible fromthe rear in accordance with the relevantnational regulations, by using the warning tri-angle, for instance.

! Make sure that there is sufficient clearancewhen opening the rear doors. You could oth-erwise damage the vehicle and objects inclose range of the rear doors.

You can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°,180° and 270°. Alwaysmake sure that the openrear door is correctly engaged in the detent.

Rear doors 67

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening/closing from the outside

Opening the right-hand rear door

X Pull handle:.X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

Opening the left-hand rear door

X Make sure that the right-hand rear door isopen and engaged.

X Pull release handle: in the direction of thearrow.

X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

Opening the rear doors to an angle of180° or 270°

Door retainer (example: right rear door)X Open the rear door to about 45°.X Pull and hold door retainer: in the directionof the arrow.

X Open the rear doormore than 90°, so that thedoor retainer cannot engage.

X Release the door retainer and open the doorto an angle of 180° or 270°.

Magnetic door retainerX With the rear door opened to an angle of270°, push it against magnetic doorretainer; on the side wall.When the magnet on the rear door is in con-tact with magnetic door retainer;, the reardoor is held in this position.i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors:If door retainer:malfunctionswhile loading,you can swivel it 180° against the spring forceand onto the door and engage it. The doorretainer remains in this position and will notswivel back to its original position.Before closing the door, release doorretainer: from the detent and return it to itsoriginal position.

68 Rear doorsOp

eningandclosing

Closing the rear doors from the outsideX Pull the rear door away from magnetic doorretainer.

X Close the left-hand rear door firmly from theoutside.

X Close the right-hand rear door firmly from theoutside.

Opening/closing from the inside

Release the lever on the inside of the right rear doorA white section on latch; indicates that therear door is unlocked.i You can only open the locked rear doorsfrom the inside if the child-proof locks havenot been activated.

X To unlock: slide latch; to the left.You will see a white marking.Only the rear door unlocks. All other doorsthat were previously locked remain locked.

X To open: pull opening lever: and open theunlocked rear door.

X Swing the rear door to the side until itengages.

X To close: make sure that the left-hand reardoor is closed.

X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handle toclose it.

X To lock: slide latch; to the right.The white section is no longer visible.Only the rear door is locked. All other doorsthat were previously unlocked remainunlocked.

Partition sliding door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the open partition sliding door is notengaged, it could move automatically whilethe vehicle is in motion. This could trap you orother persons. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Close the partition sliding door before everyjourney and make sure that it is engaged.

Opening/closing the partition slidingdoor from the cab

X To open: turn the key counter-clockwise=.The sliding door is unlocked.

X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direc-tion of arrow;.

X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-tion of arrow: until it engages.The sliding door can be locked using the key.

Partition sliding door 69

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening/closing the partition slidingdoor from the cargo compartment

X To unlock: press the catch in the direction ofarrow=.The sliding door is unlocked.

X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the direc-tion of arrow:.

X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-tion of arrow; until it engages.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

Opening/closing the side window

Control panel (example: driver's door): Power window, left; Power window, rightX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press or pull button: or; until the corre-sponding side window has reached thedesired position.

If you press the switch beyond the pressurepoint and then release it, the window opensautomatically. To stop the movement, press orpull the switch again.

70 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset the side windows if there hasbeen amalfunction or an interruption in the volt-age supply.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Pull the two power window switches and holdfor approximately 1 second after closing theside window.

Problems with the side windowsIf you cannot completely open or close a sidewindow:If there are no objects or leaves in the windowguide that prevent the sliding sunroof from clos-ing, there has been a malfunction or the on-board voltage has been interrupted.X Reset the side window (Y page 71).

Side windows 71

Openingandclosing

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the engine.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-

rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Your seat must be adjusted in such a way thatyou can wear the seat belt correctly.Observe the following points:RPosition the backrest in an almost verticalposition so that you are sitting virtuallyupright. Do not drive with the backrestreclined too far back.RYour arms should be slightly bent when youare holding the steering wheel.RAvoid seat positions that prevent the seat beltfrom being routed correctly. The shouldersection of the belt must be routed over themiddle of your shoulder and be pulled tightagainst your upper body. The lap belt mustalways pass across your lap as low down aspossible, i.e. over your hip joints.RAdjust the head restraint so that it supportsthe back of the head at eye level.RThe distance from the pedals should be suchthat you can depress them fully.

If you swap over the head restraints for the frontand rear seats, you will not be able to adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.

72 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Use the head restraint pad to adjust the headrestraint so that it is as close as possible to theback of your head.Before the journey, make sure the headrestraints have been correctly set for each of thevehicle's passengers (Y page 76).

Driver's and front-passenger seat

: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment; Lumbar support adjustment= Seat backrest adjustment? Seat height adjustmentA Seat cushion angle adjustmentB Seat suspension adjustmentC Seat suspension locki Depending on the seat model, some adjust-ments may not be available.You can find information on rotating the frontseats under "Swiveling front seats"(Y page 73).

X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:pull lever: up.

X Slide the seat forward or back.X Release lever:.X Slide the seat forward or back until you hear itengage.

X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel=towards the front.The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi-tion.

X Turn handwheel= towards the rear.The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.

X To adjust the seat height: press or pulllever? repeatedly until you have reachedthe desired seat height.

X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheelAtowards the front.The front of the seat cushion tilts down.

X Turn handwheelA towards the rear.The front of the seat cushion tilts up.i The lumbar support allows you to use thebackrest to increase the support provided tothe lumbar spine.When the lumbar support is correctly adjus-ted, it reduces strain on your back while driv-ing.

X To adjust the lumbar support: turn hand-wheel; up.This increases the support provided to thelumbar region.

X Turn handwheel; down.This reduces the support provided to the lum-bar region.

The seat suspension must be adapted to yourbody weight. Adjust the seat suspension onlywhile the seat is unoccupied.X To adjust the seat suspension: take yourweight off the seat.

X Using handwheelB, set your body weight(40 to 120 kg) for optimum seat suspension.The seat suspension will become more rigidthe higher you set the weight. It will then notmove as far.

If the seat moves up and down frequently and toa great extent, you can lock the seat in the lowerrange.X To engage the seat suspension lock: turnleverC up.When it next moves, the seat will lock in posi-tion.

X To release the seat suspension lock: turnleverC to the right.The seat can now move up and down again.

Swiveling front seats

G WARNINGIf the driver's and front-passenger seats arenot engaged facing the direction of travel

Seats 73

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

while driving, the restraint systems may notbe able to provide the intended protection.There is an increased risk of injury, possiblyeven fatal.Engage the driver's and front-passenger seatsso they are facing the direction of travelbefore starting the engine.

! When rotating the seats, make sure thatthere is sufficient space to do so.Move the seat forward or back first. This willhelp to avoid contact with other parts of theinterior.Push the handbrake lever down to the stop.The parking brake or handbrake lever couldotherwise be damaged.

Seat release (example: front-passenger seat)The driver's seat and front-passenger seat canbe rotated by 50° and 180°.The seats engage when facing in the direction oftravel as well as when facing in the oppositedirection and also engage at an angle of 50° tothe door.X Make sure that the parking brake has beenengaged and that the handbrake lever hasbeen pushed down to the stop (Y page 128).

X Adjust the steering wheel to provide the nec-essary space to rotate and adjust the driver'sseat (Y page 77).

X Before rotating, push the front-passengerseat forwards (Y page 73).

X To rotate the seat: push lever: on the rearof the seat towards the center of the vehicleand rotate the seat slightly inwards.The rotation device is released.

X Release lever:.X Turn the seat about 50° towards the outsideor inside to the desired position.

Twin front-passenger seat

X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seatcushion out of front anchorage:.

X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and outof rear anchorage;.

X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.i You can stow various articles in the spaceunder the twin front-passenger seat.

X To fold the seat cushion back: fold downthe seat cushion by the rear edge.

X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-rest into rear anchorage;.

X Push down on the seat cushion at the frontuntil it engages in front anchorage:.

Folding seat

G WARNINGIf the key is inserted in the partition slidingdoor, it may come into contact with the per-son on the folding seat. There is a risk ofinjury.Always remove the key from the partition slid-ing door before a person sits on the foldingseat.

74 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Folding seat without sidebag

Folding seat with sidebagX Remove key: from the partition slidingdoor.

X Folding seat without sidebag: pull grip ofcatch; in the direction of the arrow and foldseat cushion= up or down.Folding seat with sidebag: press grip ofcatch; in the direction of the arrow and foldseat cushion= up or down.

X Release grip; of seat cushion= in the cor-responding end position.

X Move the seat cushion= until it engages.Grip; of the catch must lie completely onthe seat frame.

Rear bench seat (Passenger Van)

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat is not installed as descri-bed or an unsuitable rear bench seat is instal-led, the seat belts may not provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury.

Install the rear bench seat as described. Onlyuse rear bench seats that are approved foryour vehicle by the distributor named on theinside cover page.

! For safety reasons, the four-seat rear benchmust only be removed or installed at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Keep the seat bench mounting recesses in thevehicle floor free from dirt and foreign objects.

Locking mechanism lever on the feet of the benchseatX To remove the rear bench seat: swing alllevers: of the bench seat completelyupwards.The bench seat moves back into the seatmounting recesses on the vehicle floor.

X Lift the bench seat upwards out of the seatmounting recesses.

i Do not exceed the maximum permissiblenumber of seats for models registered aspassenger vehicles.

Seats 75

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X To install the rear bench seat: observe theprescribed installation position of the benchseat.Install the two-seat bench seat only on thedriver's side.

X Check mounting shells; on the vehiclefloor.

X Position the bench seat in the direction oftravel in corresponding mounting shells;.

X Slide the bench seat forwards until you hearthe locking mechanisms engage.

X Check levers: on the anchorages of thebench seat.All levers:must be flush to the vehicle floor.

Head restraints

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not change over the head restraints for thefront and rear seats. Otherwise, it will not bepossible to correctly adjust the height and angleof the head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close aspossible to your head.

Head restraint (example: luxury head restraint onthe front-passenger seat): Release button; Head restraint position= Head restraint angle (luxury head restraints

only)X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release button: and slidethe head restraint down to the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the angle: hold the front part of theluxury head restraint by the lower edge andtilt it to the desired position.

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to thestop.

X Press release button: and pull out the headrestraint.

X To insert: insert the head restraint so that therodwith the detents is on the left when viewedin the direction of travel.

X Press and hold release button:.X Push the head restraint down until it engages.

Armrests

76 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrestupwards by more than 45°;.The armrest is released.

X Fold armrest= forwards to the stop.X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to thedesired position.

X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, fold thearmrest upwards: by more than 90°.

Seat heating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

! When you leave your seat, do not place any-thing on the seat and switch off the seat heat-ing. Do not switch the seat heating on whenthe seat is not occupied, e.g. when drivingwithout a front passenger. The seat heatingmay otherwise overheat, causing damage tothe seat.

The three red indicator lamps in thec buttonshow the activated heating level 1 to 3.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximatelyfive minutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximatelyten minutes.

At level 1, the seat heating remains in continu-ous operation.X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.

X To switch on: press thec button repeat-edly until the desired heating level has beenset.

X To switch off: press thec button repeat-edly until all indicator lamps go out.

If the indicator lamps of the current heating levelin thec button flash, the seat heating hasswitched off automatically. In this case, toomany electrical consumers are switched on orthe battery charge is not sufficient. The seatheating will automatically switch back to thecurrent heating level when enough on-boardvoltage is available again.

Steering wheel

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.

Steering wheel 77

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The steering wheel can still be adjusted if thekey has been removed.

: Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment; Steering column height= LeverX To set the steering wheel: swing lever=down until it engages.The steering wheel is unlocked.

X Move the steering wheel to the desired posi-tion.

X Pull lever= up to the stop.The steering wheel is locked again.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever: inthe direction of the arrow.

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe additional mirrors in the exterior mirrorsreduce the size of the image. Objects visible inthe mirrors are closer than they appear. Youcould misjudge the distance from road usersdriving behind you when changing lanes, forinstance. There is a risk of an accident.You should therefore always determine theactual distance from road users drivingbehind you, e.g.:Rby looking over your shoulderRby looking in the main mirror in the exteriormirror.

Adjusting manuallyX Before starting off, manually adjust the exte-rior mirrors in such a way that you can get agood overview of road and traffic conditions.

Adjusting electrically

Button and switch for mirror adjustmentX Before pulling away, turn the key to position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 117).

X Press switch; to position 1 for the left-handexterior mirror or to position 2 for the right-hand exterior mirror.

X Press button: up or down, to the right orleft.

78 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way thatyou can get a good overview of road and traf-fic conditions.

i The exterior mirrors are automaticallyheated at low outside temperatures.

Mirrors 79

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, we recommend that youdrive with the lights switched on even during thedaytime. There may be differences in operationdue to legal requirements and voluntary recom-mendations in some countries.

Bulb failure indicatorThe bulb failure indicator is only an aid. You areresponsible for the proper functioning of thevehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-functioningvehicle lighting puts the operating safety of thevehicle at risk.For this reason, check the condition and func-tion of your vehicle's lighting system and, if nec-essary, that of the trailer before each journey.The bulb failure indicator monitors all of theexterior lighting lamps, except the perimeterlamp and the trailer lighting. If a bulb fails, eitherthe b(Y page 34) indicator lamp lights up, oryou will see a corresponding message in thedisplay (Y page 182).

i Depending on the equipment, the bulb fail-ure indicator can fail for all lamps with theexception of the turn signal lamps.

Light switch

Operation

1Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

2$ Lights off3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument lighting4 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps5 N Fog lamps6 R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to$ orÃ.orX If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press thelight switch in to the stop.

The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and thehigh-beam flasher are operated using the com-bination switch (Y page 82).

Low-beam headlampX To switch on: turn the key to position2 in theignition lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to position L.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Daytime running lampsYou can activate/deactivate the daytime run-ning lamps function using the on-board com-puter.This is not possible in countries where daytimerunning lamps are a legal requirement.

80 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The daytime running lamps function must beactivated using the on-board computer:Rvehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 168)Rvehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 161)

X To switch on: turn the light switch to the$ position.The low-beam headlamps, parking lamps andlicense plate lamp are switched on when theengine is running. The L indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up.i USA only:If you turn the light switch to theT orLposition, the parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps switch on. If you turn the lightswitch to theà position, the daytime run-ning lamps remain switched on.

i Canada only:If you turn the light switch to the L posi-tion, the low-beam headlamps are switchedon. If you turn the light switch to the T orà position, the daytime running lampsremain switched on.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid.You are responsible for the vehicle lighting at alltimes.Depending on ambient light, the rain and lightsensor automatically switches on the parkinglamps, low-beam headlamps and the licenseplate lamp. This excludes weather-relatedimpairments to visibility, such as snow, fog orspray.If there is fog, snow or spray, turn the lightswitch quickly fromà to L. You couldotherwise briefly interrupt operation of theheadlamps.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:turn the light switch toÃ.Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the park-ing lamps switch on or off automaticallydepending on the ambient light.When the engine is running: if you activate the"daytime running lamps" function using theon-board computer, the daytime runninglamps are switched on. The parking lamps andlow-beam headlamps also switch on or offautomatically, depending on the ambientlight.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Fog lamps/rear fog lamp

G WARNINGIf you suspect that driving conditions will befoggy, turn the light switch toL before youstart your journey. Your vehicle may other-wise not be visible and you could endangeryourself and others.

G WARNINGIn low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,only switch from positionà to L withthe vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.Switching fromà to L will brieflyswitch off the headlamps. Doing so while driv-ing in low ambient lighting conditions mayresult in an accident.

X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the igni-tion lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or T.i If your vehicle is only equippedwith one rearfog lamp, you must turn the light switch toL.

i When the light switch is set toà youcannot switch on the front and rear foglamps.

X To switch on the front fog lamps: pull thelight switch out to the first locking point.The green N indicator lamp on the lightswitch lights up.

Exterior lighting 81

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: pull the lightswitch out to the second locking point.The yellow R indicator lamp on the lightswitch lights up.

X To switch off the front and rear foglamps:push in the light switch to the stop.TheR andN indicator lamp on the lightswitch go out.

Combination switch

Turn signal lamps

: To indicate a right turn; To indicate a left turnX To indicate: press the combination switch indesired direction: or; until it engages.The combination switch automatically returnsto its original position after large steeringmovements.

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly in desired direction: or;.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

High-beam headlamps and high-beamflasher

: High-beam headlamps; High-beam flasherX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:switch on the low-beam headlamps(Y page 80).

X Press combination switch: forwards.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.i In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X To switch on the high-beam flasher: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in direc-tion of arrow;.

Headlamp range adjustment

82 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The headlamp range control is used to adapt thedownward angle of the headlamp beams inaccordance with the load on your vehicle. Thecone of light from the headlamps changes ifseats are occupied or if the cargo compartmentis being loaded or unloaded. This can impair vis-ibility and cause glare to oncoming traffic.You can only adjust the headlamp range whilethe engine is running.X Turn headlamp range control: to the cor-responding position. The road ahead shouldbe lit up for 40 m to 100 m and the low-beamheadlamps should not cause glare to oncom-ing traffic.Select positiong if the vehicle is unladen.

Cornering lampsThe cornering lamps improve the illumination ofthe road over a wide angle in the direction youare turning, enabling better visibility in tightbends, for example.The cornering light function switches onautomatically, if:Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than25 mph (40 km/h) and you switch on a turnsignal or turn the steering wheel.Ryou are traveling at a speeds of between25mph (40 km/h) and 43mph (70 km/h) andturn the steering wheel.

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than 3 minutes.

i If reverse gear is engaged the lamp on theopposite side of the vehicle switches oninstead.

Hazard warning lamps

G WARNINGThe rear exterior light will be covered if you:Ropen the rear doors by 90°Ropen the rear dropside.The vehicle will then be difficult for other roadusers to see or will not be seen by them at all,particularly if it is dark or visibility is poor.There is a risk of an accident.

You should therefore ensure in this and simi-lar situations that the vehicle is visible fromthe rear in accordance with the relevantnational regulations, by using the warning tri-angle, for instance.

Hazard warning lamp switchX To switch on/off: press the £ hazardwarning lamp switch.

If you have indicated a turn while the hazardwarning lamps are switched on, only the turnsignal lamps on the side of the vehicle selectedwill light up.The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-cally if:Ran air bag is deployed.Ryou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to ahalt from a speed of more than 45 mph(70 km/h).

If the hazard warning lamps have been switchedon automatically, press the £ hazard warn-ing lamp switch to switch them off.

i The hazard warning lamps work even whenthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically with ahigh-pressure water jet if the "Wipe with washerfluid" function is activated (Y page 94) whilethe low-beam headlamps are on and the engineis running.You can find information on refilling washer fluidin the "Maintenance and care" section(Y page 220).

Exterior lighting 83

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of yourvehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.Once the system no longer detects any othervehicles, it reactivates the high-beam head-lamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGHighbeam Assist does not recognize roadusers:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, HighbeamAssistmay fail torecognize other road users who have lights, ormay recognize them too late. In this or similarsituations, the automatic high-beam head-lamps will not be deactivated or will be acti-vated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road,weather or traffic conditions. Highbeam Assistis only an aid. You are responsible for adjustingthe vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, vis-ibility and traffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or anything else coveringthe sensors

Activating/deactivating HighbeamAssistX To activate: switch on the Highbeam Assistfunction using the on-board computer(Y page 168).

X Turn the light switch to theà position.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:(Y page 82).Highbeam Assist is active.

The _ or indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up when it is darkand the light sensor activates the low-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 22 mph (35 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h), other road usersare recognized or the roads are adequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ or

indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay remains lit.

X To deactivate:move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.

The _ or indicator lamp in themultifunction display goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside if thereis high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the low-beam headlamps and driveoff.The level of moisture diminishes, dependingon the length of the journey and the weatherconditions (humidity and temperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

84 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Interior lighting

Switching the dashboard lighting on/off

Overview

Standard interior light1 Interior light switched on2 Interior light switched off3 Automatic control system switched on

Interior lights in the overhead control panel: Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off; Switches the right-hand reading lamp

on/off= Right-hand reading lamp? Interior lightA Switches the automatic control system on/

offB Switches the interior light on/offC Left-hand reading lampIf you manually switch on the interior lighting orreading lamps on the overhead control panel,they switch off automatically after 20 minutes.

Automatic controlThe interior light comes on if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen the driver's or the front-passenger doorRremove the key from the ignition lockThe interior light switches off again automati-cally.If a door is left open, the interior lightingswitches off after approximately 20 minutes.

Switching the rear compartmentlighting on/off centrally (PassengerVan)

Rear compartment lighting switch: To switch on the rear compartment lighting; Automatic control= To switch off the rear compartment lightingYou can switch the rear compartment lightingon/off centrally on Passenger Vans that areequipped with convenience control.There may also be a switch on the rear com-partment lights that allows you to switch themon/off separately. If you switch off rear com-partment lighting=, the rear compartmentlight is switched off, regardless of the position ofits own switch.If you move the rear compartment lightingswitch to center position;, the automatic con-trol system is switched on. When you open adoor or unlock the vehicle, the rear compart-ment lighting then goes on automatically. Oncethe doors are closed, it switches off automati-cally after 20 minutes.

Interior lighting 85

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Switching the rear/cargo compart-ment lamp on/off

Interior light with switch (example: Cargo Van)1 Automatic control2 To switch off the interior lighting3 To switch on the interior lighting

Interior light with switch (example: Passenger Vanwith rear-compartment air conditioning)1 To switch on the interior lighting2 To switch off the interior lighting3 Automatic controlFor Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans withoutconvenience control, the switch for the interiorlighting is on the rear interior light in the cargocompartment/vehicle interior.If you move the switch to automatic control, therear/cargo compartment lamps go onwhen youopen a door or unlock the vehicle. They switchoff automatically after 20 minutes, or when youclose the doors.

Motion detector

G WARNINGThe motion detector sends the invisible infra-red radiation emitted by LEDs (light emittingdiodes).These LEDs are classified as class 1M lasersand can damage the retina if you:Rlook directly into the unfiltered laser beamof the motion detector for an extendedperiodRlook directly into the laser beam of themotion detector using optical instruments,e.g. eyeglasses or a magnifying glass.

There is a risk of injury.Never look directly into the motion detector.

The load compartment lighting is also switchedon by the motion detector in the load compart-ment on panel vans equipped with this feature.If the motion detector detects a movement inthe cargo compartment when the vehicle is sta-tionary, the cargo compartment lightingswitches on for approximately two minutes.The cargo compartment lighting can beswitched on by the motion detector withinfour seconds if:Rthe rear interior light switch (Y page 85) is setto automatic control.Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brake isapplied and the brake pedal is not beingdepressedorRthe selector lever is in position P on vehicleswith automatic transmission and the brakepedal is not being depressed andRthe vehicle has not been locked from the out-side using the key

The motion detector switches off automaticallyif no change is detected in the vehicle for severalhours, e.g. if a door is opened, if the ignition keyis turned, etc. This prevents the battery frombecoming discharged.

86 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Changing bulbs

Important safety notes

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

! Make sure the bulbs are always securelyinstalled.

If your vehicle is equipped with Bi-Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: the coneof light from the Xenon bulbs moves from thetop to the bottom and back again when you startthe engine. For this to be observed, the low-beam headlamps must be switched on beforestarting the engine.The bulbs and lamps are an essential compo-nent of vehicle safety. You must therefore makesure that these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.RAlways switch off the vehicle's lighting sys-tem before changing a bulb.This will prevent a short circuit.RDo not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Always use a clean, lint-freecloth or only touch the base of the bulb wheninstalling.Even minor contamination can burn into theglass surface and reduce the service life of thebulbs.RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped orthat has scratches on its glass tube.The bulb could explode.ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps which havebeen designed for this purpose.

ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type andwith the prescribed voltageRProtect the bulbs from moisture when in use.If the new bulb still does not light up, consult aqualified specialist workshop.RHave the LEDs and bulbs of the followinglamps changed at a qualified specialist work-shop:- the additional turn signals in the exteriormirrors

- the high-mounted brake lamp- LED daytime running lamps (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

- Bi-Xenon lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps)- front fog lamps

If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.

Front bulbs

Overview of bulb replacement – bulbtypesThe following bulbs can be replaced. Bulb typescan be found in the legend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Turn signal: PY21W; Daytime running lamps: W21W= Low-beam headlamps: H7 55W? High-beam headlamps: H7 55WA Parking lamps/standing lamps: W5W

Changing bulbs 87

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps: Turn-signal: NAK 3457; Cornering light function: H7 55WVehicles with additional turn signals in theexterior mirrorsAdditional turn signal lamp: HPC 16WY

Low-beam headlamps and high-beamheadlamps/cornering lamp

Example: halogen headlampsX Switch off the lighting system.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Turn housing cover: in the direction of thearrow and remove it.

Example: halogen headlamps; Low-beam headlamp bulb holder= Bulb holder for high-beam headlamp? Bulb holder for parking lamp/standing lamp

(halogen headlamps)X Turn the corresponding bulb holder withbulb;,= or? counter-clockwise and pullit out of the lamp.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Insert the new bulb in such a way that its basefits into the recess of the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder with the bulb into thelamp and turn it clockwise to tighten.The bulb holder engages audibly.

X Place housing cover: into the opening andturn in the opposite direction of the arrow.

X Close the hood.

Cornering light function/daytime run-ning lamps

X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove.

88 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Bi-Xenon headlamps: turn bulb holder withbulb; counter-clockwise and remove it.Halogen headlamps: press the springcatches of the bulb holder together andremove the bulb holder with bulb;.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder.X Bi-Xenon headlamps: insert bulb holder withbulb; into the lamp and turn clockwise.Halogen headlamps: insert the bulb holderwith bulb; into the lamp.The bulb holder with bulb; engages audibly.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise to thestop.The cap audibly engages.

X Close the hood (Y page 215).

Turn signal lamp

X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from bulbholder:.

X Press the new bulb into bulb holder: andscrew it in clockwise.

X Insert bulb holder: into the lamp and turn itclockwise to tighten.

X Close the hood.

Additional turn signal lamp (all-wheel-drive vehicles)

Additional turn signals (example: Cargo Van andPassenger Van)The additional turn signals are mounted on theside of the vehicle's front wings.X Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove lamp lens;.X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position lamp lens; and tighten screws:.

Changing bulbs 89

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Rear bulbs (Cargo Van/PassengerVan)

Overview of bulb types

Lights Bulb type

: High-mounted brakelamp

LED

; Brake lamp/tail lamp P21W/5W

= Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

? Tail lamps/standinglamps

R5W

A License plate lamp W5W

B Rear fog lamps (driver'sside)

P21W

C Backup lamps P21W

Tail lamps

X Switch off the lighting system.X Open the rear door.X Undo screws: and unclip the lamp lens inthe direction of the arrow.

X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.

; Retaining lugs= Brake lamps? Turn signal lampsA Standing lamp/tail lampB Backup lampsC Rear fog lamp

90 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Release retaining lugs; and take the bulbholder out of the tail lamp.

X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Press the connector into the bulb holder.X Insert the lamp lens.To do this, clip the bulb holder into the threeholes provided at the side and tightenscrews:.

License plate lamp

X Switch off the lighting system.X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement intorecess; and carefully pry off lamp lens:.

X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.X Insert a new bulb.X Align lamp lens: and clip it in so that itengages.

Rear bulbs (Cab Chassis)

Overview of bulb types

Chassis (example: Cab Chassis)

Lights Bulb type

: Perimeter lamp/stand-ing lamp

R 5 W

; Tail lamps R 5 W

= Brake lamps P 21 W

? Turn signal lamps PY 21 W

A Backup lamps P 21 W

B Rear fog lamps (driver'sside)

P 21 W

C License plate lamp R 5 W

Tail lamps

: Screws; Lamp lens= Perimeter lamp/standing lamp? Turn signal lampsA Brake lampsB Tail lamps

Changing bulbs 91

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

C Rear fog lampD License plate lampE Backup lampsX Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove lamp lens;.X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position lamp lens; and tighten screws:.

Additional lamps

Additional turn signal lamp on the roof

Type of lamp: P 21 WX Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove lamp lens;.X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn itcounter-clockwise and remove it from thebulb holder.

X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position lamp lens; and tighten screws:again.

Perimeter lamp (Cab Chassis)

Type of lamp: W 5 WX Switch off the lighting system.X Undo screws: and remove the lamp unit.X Turn bulb holder; and remove it.X Remove the bulb from bulb holder;.X Press the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Screw bulb holder; into the lamp unit.X Carefully position the lamp housing andtighten screws:.

Courtesy lights, rear compartment

Bulb type: W5WX Press in the latching spring of courtesylight: with a suitable implement, e.g. ascrewdriver.

X Pry off courtesy light:.X Disconnect cable connector=.X Unscrew bulb holder;.

92 Changing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Remove the bulb from bulb holder;.X Press the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Screw bulb holder; into courtesy light:.X Connect cable connector=.The connector locking spring must engage.

X Align courtesy light: on the side andengage.

Interior lighting

General notes! Have the bulbs in the overhead controlpanel replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop. You could otherwise damage the over-head control panel.

Front interior light

Type of lamp: K 18 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Press spring catch; in the direction of thearrow and lift off interior light:.

X Remove bulb= from the bulb holder.X Insert new bulb=.X Align interior light: on the right-hand sideand engage the spring catch.

Rear interior lightInterior light with switch

Interior light with switchType of lamp: K 15 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Press in the catch springs of lamp housing:with a suitable object and pry off lamp hous-ing:.

X Press the contact spring of bulb holder;outwards and remove bulb=.

X Insert a new bulb=.X Align lamp housing: on the left-hand sideand engage.i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED isfaulty, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.

Interior light without switch

Interior light without switchType of lamp: K 15 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Press in the catch springs of lamp housing:with a suitable object and pry off lamp hous-ing:.

X Open protective cover?.X Press the contact spring of bulb holder;outwards and remove bulb=.

X Insert new bulb=.

Changing bulbs 93

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Fold protective cover? back into place.X Align lamp housing: on the left-hand sideand engage.i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED isfaulty, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.

Cargo compartment lamp

Type of lamp: W 10 WX Switch off the interior lighting.X Undo screws: and remove the lamp lens.X Press bulb; into the bulb holder andunscrew it counter-clockwise.

X Press new bulb; into the bulb holder andscrew it in clockwise.

X Position the lamp lens and tighten screws:.

i Vehicles with LED cargo compartmentlamp: if an LED is defective, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperon/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.

If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Vehicles with rain/light sensor:Switch the wipers off in dry weather. Other-wise, dirt or optical effects may cause unde-sired windshield wiper sweeps. This couldthen damage the windshield wiper blades orscratch the windshield.

The windshield will no longer be wiped properlyif the wiper blades are worn. Replace the wiperblades twice a year (Y page 95), ideally inspring and fall.

Combination switchX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Turn the combination switch in the directionof arrow; to the appropriate settingdepending on the intensity of the rain.

X Single wipe: push the combination switchbriefly to the pressure point in the direction ofarrow:.

X To wipe with washer fluid: press the com-bination switch beyond the pressure point inthe direction of arrow:.

The detent positions of the combination switchcorrespond to the following wiper speeds:0 Windshield wipers offI Intermittent wipeII Normal wipeIII Rapid wipe

94 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

i Canada only:If the windshield wipers are switched on andyou stop the vehicle, the windshield wiperspeed is reduced. For example, if you haveselected level II and stop the vehicle, wipingcontinues with intermittent wipe while thevehicle is stationary. If intermittent wipe isselected, the intervals become longer.Vehicles with a rain and light sensor: youcan use level I as the universal setting. Therain and light sensor sets the appropriate wip-ing frequency automatically, according to theintensity of the rain. When you stop the vehi-cle, levels III and II are switched down tolevel I automatically.The windshield wiper will return to the originallevel when you drive faster than 5 mph(8 km/h).

You can adjust the sensitivity of the rain andlight sensor using the on-board computer(Y page 170).Information on checking the washer fluid levelcan be found in the "Maintenance and care"section (Y page 220).

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Rear window wiper switch2 ô To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 ô To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Turn switch: to the corresponding position

The rear window wiper switches on automati-cally if you engage reverse gear and the wind-shield wipers are on.

Replacing the wiper blades

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.We recommend that you have the wiperblades replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

! Only hold the wiper blade by the wiper arm.You could otherwise damage the wiper rub-ber.

The windshield will no longer be wiped properlyif the wiper blades are worn. Replace the wiperblades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall.

Front windshield wiper arm with wiper blade

Windshield wipers 95

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Fold wiper arm= away from the windshield.X Set wiper blade: at right angles to the wiperarm.

X Press both retaining clips; together in thedirection of the arrow and swing wiperblade: away from wiper arm=.

X Pull wiper blade: up and out of the retaineron wiper arm=.

X Slide new wiper blade: into the retainer onwiper arm=.

X Press new wiper blade: onto wiper arm=until you hear retaining clips; engage.

X Fold wiper arm= back onto the windshieldagain.

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wiperjams.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has switched off.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignitionlock.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch on the windshield wipers again.

The windshield wiperdoes not move at all.

There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecenter of the wind-shield/rear window.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

96 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the recommended settings on the fol-lowing pages. Otherwise, the windows could fogup.Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances from the air.

Climate control is only operational when theengine is running. The system only functionsoptimally when the side windows are closed.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather. In order to cool the vehiclemore rapidly, switch climate control to air-recirculation mode briefly. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired interiortemperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out most par-ticles of dust and completely filters out pollen.A clogged filter reduces the airflow into thevehicle interior. For this reason, you shouldalways observe the interval for replacing thefilter, which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmental con-ditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the intervalmay be shorter than that stated in the Main-tenance Booklet.

Heating control panel

: Sets the temperature (Y page 101)z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102)

; K Sets the airflow (Y page 101)z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102)

= e Activates and deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 103)

Overview of climate control systems 97

Climatecontrol

? Sets the air distribution (Y page 101)sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102)

Information on heatingBelow, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use the heating opti-mally.RSet the temperature control to the middlelevel. Only change the temperature in smallincrements.If you wish to heat up the vehicle interior asquickly as possible, set the temperature con-trol to thez maximum setting. When thedesired interior temperature has been

reached, turn the temperature control backdown in small steps.ROnly use the settings for defrosting the wind-shield briefly, until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog upas no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp in theh button comes on when the function isswitched on.

Control panel for the air-conditioning system

: Sets the temperature (Y page 101)z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102)

; Sets the airflow (Y page 101)K Increases the airflowI Reduces the airflow

= e Activates and deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 103)? x Switches the reheat function (window air dehumidification) on and off (Y page 102)A Sets the air distribution (Y page 101)

sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102)B ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 101)C Blower setting bar display

z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102)

98 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Optimum use of the air-conditioningsystemBelow, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use the air-condi-tioning system optimally.RSwitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function. The indicator lamp above therocker switch lights up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Onlychange the temperature in small increments.

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog upas no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.ROnly use reheat mode until the windows areclear again.

Rear-compartment heating control panel

: i Switches rear-compartment heating on and off (Y page 100); K Sets the airflow (Y page 101)= Sets the temperature (Y page 101)

Optimum use of rear-compartmentheatingFor optimum climate control, set the tempera-ture control to the middle level. Only change thetemperature in small increments.

Overview of climate control systems 99

Climatecontrol

Control panel for rear-compartment air-conditioning system

: Sets the airflow (Y page 101)K Increases the airflowI Reduces the airflow

; Sets the temperature (Y page 101)= Blower setting bar display? i Switches rear-compartment air-conditioning on and off (Y page 100)

Optimumuseof rear-compartment airconditioningFor optimum climate control, set the tempera-ture control to the middle level. Only change thetemperature in small increments.

Operating the climate control system

Switching the climate control on/off

Important informationWhen the climate control is switched off, airintake and air circulation also stop. Only use thissetting for a brief period. Otherwise, the win-dows could fog up.

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol via the control panelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Vehicle with heatingX To switch on: set airflow control; down toat least level 1 (Y page 98).

X To switch off: set airflow control; up to the0 position (Y page 98).

Vehicle with air conditioningX To switch on: press theK button.The blower speeds are shown in bars next tothe button.

X To switch off: press theI button and,after reaching the lowest blower speed, pressit again.

Activating/deactivating rear-compart-ment climate control via the controlpanelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

100 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

Vehicle with rear-compartment heating/rear-compartment air conditioningX To switch on/off: press thei switch.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,the rear-compartment heating/rear-com-partment air conditioning is switched on.

Switching the cooling with air dehu-midification function on/off

Important informationIf you switch off the "Cooling with air dehumid-ification" function, the air inside the vehicle willnot be cooled (in warm weather) or dehumidi-fied. The windows could fog up more quickly.The cooling with air dehumidification function isonly available when the engine is running. Theair inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidifiedaccording to the temperature selected.Condensation may appear on the underside ofthe vehicle when in coolingmode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Switching on and offVehicle with air conditioningX Press the¿ button.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,cooling with air dehumidification is switchedon.

Setting the temperature

Increasing and reducing temperature inthe front compartment via the controlpanelOnly change the temperature in small incre-ments. Start at the center position, or at 72 ‡(22 †).X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Turn temperature control: clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to reduce thetemperature (Y page 98).

Increasing and reducing temperature inthe rear compartment via the controlpanelOnly change the temperature in small incre-ments.X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Turn rear-compartment temperature control= (Y page 99) or rear-compartment air-con-ditioning system; (Y page 100) clockwiseto increase or counterclockwise to reduce thetemperature.i Vehicles with additional air conditioning andheating in the rear compartment: if you setthe temperature control to the center posi-tion, only one of the two climate control sys-tems works in the rear compartment and inair-recirculation mode (Y page 103).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsThe air distribution symbols have the followingmeanings:m Directs air through the center and side

air ventssz

Directs air to the windshield and the airvents

q Directs air to the windshield, the airvents and into the footwell

r Directs air to the air vents and into thefootwell

AdjustingX Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Set air-distribution control? for the heating(Y page 97) or air-conditioning systemA(Y page 98) to the corresponding symbol.

Setting the airflowX Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Vehicle with heating/rear-compartmentheating: set airflow control; of the heating(Y page 97) or of the rear-compartment heat-ing (Y page 99) to the desired level.

X Vehicle with air conditioning/rear-com-partment air conditioning: press theI

Operating the climate control system 101

Climatecontrol

button to reduce or theK button toincrease the airflow.The blower speeds are shown in bars next tothe buttons.

Defrosting the windowsYou can use the "defrosting" function to defrostthe windshield or to demist the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.Only use the following settings until the win-dows are clear again.X Vehiclewithwindowheating: switch on thefront (Y page 103) and/or rear windowdefroster (Y page 103) .

X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).Vehicle with heatingX Set temperature control: and airflow con-trol; toz (Y page 97).

X Set air-distribution control? tosz(Y page 97).

X Close the center air vents (Y page 104) andthe air outlets for the headroom and the rearcompartment (Y page 105).

X Direct the side air vents towards the side win-dows and open the defroster vents for theside windows (Y page 105).

Vehicle with air conditioningX Set temperature control: toz (Y page 98).

X Press theK button until the maximumblower output is reached.All bars in the display next to the button lightup.

X Set air-distribution controlA tosz(Y page 98).

X Close the center air vents (Y page 104) andthe air outlets for the headroom and the rearcompartment (Y page 105).

X Direct the side air vents towards the side win-dows and open the defroster vents for theside windows (Y page 105).

Clearing condensation from the win-dows

Windows fogged up on the insideYou should only select this setting until the win-dows are clear again.X Vehiclewithwindowheating: switch on thefront (Y page 103) and/or rear windowdefroster (Y page 103) .

X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Switch off air-recirculation mode(Y page 103).

Vehicle with heatingX Set temperature control: to a higher tem-perature (Y page 97).

X Set airflow control; to a higher blower set-ting. It should be set at least to level two(Y page 97).

X Set air-distribution control? tosz(Y page 97).i If the windows still fog up, set the control asdescribed for defrosting (Y page 102).

Vehicle with air conditioningX Activate cooling with air dehumidification(Y page 101).

X Press the¨ button (Y page 98).Reheat mode is activated. The indicator lampin the switch lights up.To deactivate reheat mode, press the¨button again. The indicator lamp in the buttongoes out.

Windows fogged up on the outsideYou should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.X Switch on the windshield wipers (Y page 94).X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Adjust air distribution to the footwell(Y page 101).

X Close the air vents (Y page 104).

102 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

Window heating

Windshield heater

Windshield heater switchThe windshield heater consumes a lot of power.You should therefore switch it off as soon as thewindshield is clear. The windshield heating oth-erwise switches off automatically after5 minutes.X Start the engine.X To switch on/off: press thez switch.The indicator lamp in thez button comeson when the windshield heating is switchedon.

If the indicator lamp in thez windshieldheating button flashes, the on-board voltage istoo low. Thewindshield heating has switched offprematurely or cannot be activated.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interior light-ing.

If enough on-board voltage is available againwithin 30 seconds, the windshield heating auto-matically switches on again. It otherwiseremains switched off.

Rear window defroster

Rear window defroster switchThe rear window defroster consumes a lot ofpower. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the window is clear. The rear windowheating otherwise only switches off automati-cally after 12 minutes.X Start the engine.X To activate and deactivate: press the|button.The indicator lamp in the| button comeson when the rear window defroster isswitched on.

If the indicator lamp in the| rear windowdefroster button flashes, the on-board voltage istoo low. The rear windowdefroster has switchedoff prematurely or cannot be activated.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interior light-ing.

If enough on-board voltage is available againwithin 30 seconds, the rear window heatingautomatically switches on again. It otherwiseremains switched off.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

Important safety notesWhen you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows could fog upmore quickly, in particularat low outside temperatures. Only switch on air-recirculation mode for a short time.You can deactivate the intake of fresh air ifunpleasant odors enter the vehicle from out-side. The air inside the vehicle will only be cir-culated.

Operating the climate control system 103

Climatecontrol

Heating and air-conditioning systemAir-recirculation mode switches off automati-cally after about 10 to 30minutes, depending onthe outside temperature.X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X To activate/deactivate: press thee but-ton.If the indicator lamp in thee button lightsup, air-recirculation mode is activated.

Rear-compartment heating and rear-compartment air-conditioning systemOn vehicles with rear-compartment heating anda rear-compartment air-conditioning system,you can activate or deactivate air-recirculationmode for the rear-compartment climate control.X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X To activate: set the temperature control ofrear-compartment heating= (Y page 99) orrear-compartment air conditioning system;(Y page 100) to the center position.Only one of the two climate control systems inthe rear compartment is activated and is inair-recirculation mode.

X To deactivate: turn the temperature controlof rear-compartment heating= (Y page 99)or rear-compartment air-conditioning sys-tem; (Y page 100) clockwise or counter-clockwise. Only change the temperature insmall increments.

Adjusting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

The center and side air vents are adjustable.

On vehicles with a rear-compartment air-condi-tioning system, you can also adjust the air ventsin the roof duct.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust thesliders of the center air vents to the centerposition.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood free ofblockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the vents or the ventilation grillesin the vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Thumbwheel for center air vent, right? Thumbwheel for center air vent, leftX To open: turn thumbwheel= to the left orthumbwheel? to the right.

X To close: turn thumbwheel= to the right orthumbwheel? to the left.

104 Adjusting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the side air vents

Side air vent (example: right-hand side of the vehi-cle)X To open: turn thumbwheel= of side airvents: upward.

X To close: turn thumbwheel= of side airvents: downward.

i If the® symbol can be seen on thumb-wheel=, defroster vent; is open.

Adjusting air vents for the passengercompartment

Air vents (example: right-hand side of the vehicle)You can use the air vents to ventilate the vehicleinterior on the left and right, in the rear and theheadroom.X To open: for the right-hand side of the vehi-cle, turn thumbwheel; to the left or for theleft-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel:to the right.

X To close: for the right-hand side of the vehi-cle, turn thumbwheel; to the right or for theleft-hand side of the vehicle, thumbwheel:to the left.

Adjusting the air vents in the roof duct! Always leave at least one air vent open.If the rear-compartment air conditioning isswitched on and all the air vents are closed,the air-conditioning systemmay be damaged.

On vehicles with rear-compartment air condi-tioning, adjustable air vents are integrated intothe roof duct.X To adjust the airflow: open or close the airflap in air vents: as needed.

X To adjust the air distribution: turn airvent: to the desired position.

Operating the auxiliary heating sys-tem

Important safety notes

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, for example inenclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck insnow. There is a risk of fatal injury.Switch the auxiliary heating off in enclosedspaces without extraction systems, e.g. ingarages. If the vehicle is stuck in snow andyou have to leave the auxiliary heating run-ning, keep the exhaust pipe and the areaaround the vehicle free of snow. To ensure anadequate supply of fresh air, open a windowon the side of the vehicle that is not facing intothe wind.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 105

Climatecontrol

Z

G WARNINGWhen the auxiliary heating is switched on,parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g.the exhaust system.Flammable materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith:Rhot parts of the exhaust systemRthe exhaust gas itselfThere is a risk of fire.When the auxiliary heating is switched on,make sure that:Rno flammable materials come into contactwith hot vehicle componentsRthe exhaust gas can escape from theexhaust pipe unhinderedRthe exhaust gas does not come into contactwith flammable materials.

! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least once amonth for approximately 10 minutes. Theauxiliary heating could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Make sure that the flow of hot air is notblocked. The auxiliary heating will otherwiseoverheat and switch off.

Your vehicle may be equipped with either anauxiliary hot-water heater or an auxiliary warm-air heater. Adjustment and operation of the:Rhot-water auxiliary heater is done via the on-board computer andwith the auxiliary heatingbutton in the control panel (Y page 107) orwith the remote control (Y page 108).Rauxiliary warm-air heater is done via the timerabove the overhead control panel(Y page 112).

The auxiliary heatingworks independently of theengine and supplements the climate controlsystem in the vehicle. The auxiliary heatingheats the air in the vehicle interior to the tem-perature set.If your vehicle is equipped with a hot-water aux-iliary heater, the auxiliary heating also keeps thecoolant warm. This way, the load on the engineis minimized and fuel is saved.The heater booster function (Y page 110) of theauxiliary heating supports the climate control

system when the engine is running and the out-side temperature is low.You can use the auxiliary heating at an outsidetemperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †). At an outsidetemperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the auxiliaryheating system and the heater booster functionswitch off automatically.

Hot-water auxiliary heating

Heating timeThe heating time when operating the auxiliaryheatingwith the vehicle is stationarywithout theengine running depends on the outside temper-ature and the electrical consumers switched on.

Outsidetempera-ture

Heatingtime

Possible startupprocedures

Above 23‡(Ò5 †)

Approx.20 minutes

6

23 ‡(Ò5 †) to5 ‡(Ò15 †)

Approx.40 minutes

3

Below 5‡(Ò15 †)

Approx.50 minutes

2

You can then switch on the auxiliary heatingagain.If you do not start the engine for awhile, the totalduration of heating is limited to a maximum of120 minutes to protect the starter battery.Switching on the auxiliary heating is then auto-matically disabled. You can, for example, switchon the auxiliary heating without the engine run-ning if the outside temperature is Ò5‡ (Ò20†) amaximum of two times. If you try it again, theindicator lamps in they button(Y page 107) flash alternately for approximately2minutes to signal switch-on interlock. The aux-iliary heating cannot be switched on withoutstarting the engine.When the condition of charge of the starter bat-tery is sufficient again, the switch-on interlockwill be deactivated. To charge the starter bat-tery, let the engine run. The engine run timerequired to reach the necessary condition ofcharge depends on the outside temperature andon the electrical consumers switched on.

106 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Outside tempera-ture

Engine runtime

Above 32 ‡ (0 †) at least 10 minutes

32 ‡ (0 †) to 14 ‡(Ò10 †)

at least 15 minutes

Below 14 ‡ (Ò10 †) at least 20 minutes

Before switching onX Check the fuel level and top up if necessary.The auxiliary heating is operated directlyusing the vehicle's fuel. The tank must be atleast a quarter full to ensure that the auxiliaryheating functions.

X Switch on climate control (Y page 100).X Set the temperature control to the desiredtemperature (Y page 101).

X Set the air distribution as required(Y page 101).

X Open the center (Y page 104) and side airvents (Y page 105) and set them to themiddleposition.

i The auxiliary heating automatically switchesto heater booster mode after the engine isstarted.

Operating with the button (controlpanel)

i Switch the heater booster function on or offwith the¢ button (Y page 110).

X To activate the auxiliary heating system:press and hold the upper section of theyswitch for longer than 2 seconds.The red indicator lamp in the button lights up.The auxiliary heating heats or ventilates the

interior to the temperature that you have set.The blower switches to the first level.

X To deactivate the auxiliary heating: pressthe upper section of they switch.

orX Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 0.The red indicator lamp in the button goes out.The auxiliary heating operates for another2 minutes and then switches off automati-cally.

Selecting a switch-on time

Important informationYou can use the on-board computer to define upto three switch-on times, one of which can beselected.The yellow indicator lamp in they buttongoes out after 30 minutes, if you:Rhave selected the switch-on time andRturn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignitionlock

On-board computer without steeringwheel buttonsX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press they button.They symbol flashes in the display.

orX Press the4 menu button on the instrumentcluster repeatedly until they symbolflashes in the display.

X Use thef org buttons on the instrumentcluster to select the switch-on time 1 to 3.The switch-on time selected is displayed.

X Wait 10 seconds for the standard display toappear.The switch-on time is selected. The yellowindicator lamp in they button lights up.If you do not preselect a switch-on time, and--:-- is shown in the display, thismeans thatthe automatic switch-on mode is switchedoff. The yellow indicator lamp in theybutton goes out.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 107

Climatecontrol

Z

On-board computer with steering wheelbuttons

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press they button.The Aux. heat submenu is shown in the dis-play.If no switch-on time has been selected, theselected switch-on time is highlighted orTimer off is highlighted.i You can also access the Aux. heat. sub-menu via the Settings (Y page 165) menu.

X Use theW orX button on the steeringwheel to select the desired switch-on time.Use the Timer off setting to deactivateautomatic switch-on.

X Press theV button on the steering wheel.The switch-on time is selected. The yellowindicator lamp in they button lights up.

Setting the switch-on timeX Use the same method to select a switch-ontime as described in the "Preselecting aswitch-on time" section.

On-board computer without steering wheelbuttonsX Press the9 reset button on the instrumentcluster.The hour display flashes.

X Use thef andg buttons on the instrumentcluster to set the hours.

X Press the9 reset buttonThe minute display flashes.

X Use thef andg buttons to set theminutes.The switch-on time is set and selected.

On-board computerwith steeringwheel but-tonsX Press the9 button on the steering wheel.The display shows the Hours menu.

X Use theW andX buttons on the steer-ing wheel to set the hours.

X Press the9 button.The display shows the Minutes menu.

X Use theW andX buttons to set theminutes.

X Press theV button.The switch-on time is set and selected.

Operation with the remote control

Important informationYou can switch the auxiliary heating on/off andset the operating duration using the remote con-trol. You can use up to 4 remote control units onthe vehicle. These must be synchronized for thereceiver in your vehicle (Y page 109).The remote control has a maximum range ofapproximately 600 meters. This range isreduced by:Rsources of interferenceRsolid objects between the remote control andthe vehicleRthe remote control being in an unfavorableposition in relation to the vehicleRtransmitting from an enclosed space

Overview of the remote control

: Indicator lamp; To confirm settings= To switch the remote control on/off, set the

operating duration or end or cancel settingsIndicator lamp: lights up in various ways toshow different operating modes:

Signaling Meaning

Lights up red Remote control switched on

Data transfer

108 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Signaling Meaning

Flashes red Auxiliary heating switchedoff

Lights upgreen

Auxiliary heating switchedon

Flashes green Change operating durationactive

Flashes alter-nately red andgreen

Remote control in synchro-nizing mode

i When the remote control battery is weak,indicator lamp: flashes red rapidly. Replacethe remote control battery (Y page 110).

You can find information on further lamp sta-tuses in the "Problems with the hot-water aux-iliary heater" section (Y page 111).

Switching the remote control on/offThe remote control switches to standby modeafter 10 seconds. Indicator lamp: goes out.X To switchon: press and hold theÜ buttonuntil indicator lamp: lights up red.If a connection between the remote controland the receiver in the vehicle has been estab-lished and indicator lamp::Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating is switchedoff.Rlights up green, the auxiliary heating isswitched on.

X To switch off: press and hold theÜ but-ton until indicator lamp: goes out.

Switching the auxiliary heating on/offX Switch on the remote control.X To switchon:when indicator lamp: flashesred, press theb button.During data transmission, indicator lamp:lights up red.When indicator lamp: lights up green, theauxiliary heating is switched on.

X To switch off: when indicator lamp: lightsup green, press theb button.During data transmission, indicator lamp:lights up red.When indicator lamp: flashes red, the aux-iliary heating is switched off.

Changing the operating durationX Switch on the remote control.X When indicator lamp: flashes red, pressÜ andb simultaneously.Indicator lamp: flashes green.

X Press theÜ button repeatedly until thedesired operating duration is shown.R20 minutesIndicator lamp: flashes green twice.R30 minutesIndicator lamp: flashes green threetimes.R40 minutesIndicator lamp: flashes green four times.

X Press theb button.During data transmission, indicator lamp:lights up red.If indicator lamp: emits two long, greenflashes, the selected operating duration isstored.i If no adjustment is made, indicator lamp:flashes six times and the remote control goesinto standby mode.

Synchronizing the remote controlX Press they auxiliary heating button in thecontrol panel (Y page 107) for longer than10 seconds.When you press and hold they button, thered indicator lamp lights up in the button.When the red indicator lamp in they but-ton flashes, the receiver in the vehicle is readyfor synchronizing.

X Press and hold theÜ remote control but-ton until indicator lamp: lights up red.If there is an active connection between theremote control and the receiver, indicatorlamp: flashes alternately red and green.The remote control is in synchronizing mode.i If you press theÜ button again on theremote control after starting synchronization,you will only synchronize this remote controlunit with the receiver. Any other remote con-trol units that were synchronized will becleared. Indicator lamp: flashes alternatelyred and green (very slowly).

X Press theb button on the remote control.During data transmission, indicator lamp:lights up red.When remote control indicator lamp: emitstwo long green flashes, the selected operat-

Operating the auxiliary heating system 109

Climatecontrol

Z

ing time is synchronized. The indicator lamp inthey auxiliary heating button goes out.

Switches the heater booster functionon/off

Vehicles with auxiliary heating

Vehicles with heater booster functionAt outside temperatures of up to 39‡ (4†) thefuel-fired heater booster system heats the vehi-cle interior as quickly as possible when theengine is running.The auxiliary heating automatically switches toheater booster mode after the engine is started.At an outside temperature above 39‡ (4†) theauxiliary heating system and the heater boosterfunction switch off automatically.If you switch off the engine without switching offthe heater booster function, the system will beswitched on the next time the engine is started(memory function).i Switch the auxiliary heating on or off withthey button (Y page 107).

X To switch on/off: press the¢ button.If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,the heater booster function is switched on.

After switching off, the auxiliary heating oper-ates for about another 2 minutes and thenswitches off automatically.

Replacing the remote control battery

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

If the indicator lamp on the remote controlflashes red rapidly, the remote control battery isdischarged. You should replace the remote con-trol battery.You need a battery of the type CR2430, whichcan be obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop.

110 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

X Remove battery cover; using a suitableimplement, e.g. a coin, by turning it counter-clockwise.

X Check the seal on battery cover; for dam-age and, if necessary, replace.

X Remove battery=.X Insert new, clean battery= into the batterytray with the positive pole facing upwards.Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Position battery cover; so that mark: onthe raised area points between tworecesses?.

X Turn battery cover; using a suitable imple-ment, e.g. a coin, clockwise to the stop.

X Check all the functions of the remote control(Y page 108).

Problems with the hot-water auxiliary heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red rapidly.

The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is notpossible.X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 110).

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlflashes red and green inrapid succession.

There is no connection between the remote control and the receiver inthe vehicle.X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the remotecontrol higher or to the side.

X Move closer.If you cannot establish a connection and the auxiliary heating isswitched on, it can then only be deactivated using they button(Y page 107).or

Several remote controls are being used at the same time.X Switch on the remote control again after a short while(Y page 109).or

The remote control is not synchronized.X Synchronize the remote control (Y page 109).

The indicator lamp onthe remote controlslowly flashes red andgreen alternately.

The remote control is being synchronized.X Wait until the remote control synchronization process is complete(Y page 109).

The remote control forthe auxiliary heating can-not be switched on.

The remote control battery is discharged.X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 110).

Operating the auxiliary heating system 111

Climatecontrol

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heatingswitches off automatically.

The auxiliary heatingswitches off automati-cally and/or cannot beswitched on.

The fuel tank is less thanÕ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines arefull.or

The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unitswitches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is lessthan 10 V.X Have the alternator and battery checked.or

The fuse is blown.X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.or

A malfunction has occurred.X Switch the ignition on and off twice.If the auxiliary heating still cannot be switched on, the heating deviceis faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The auxiliary heating isoverheated.

The coolant level is too low.X Check the coolant level and add more coolant if necessary(Y page 218).

Auxiliary warm-air heater

Operation with the timer

Important safety notesG DANGERIf a switch-on time has been selected, theauxiliary heating switches on automatically.RIf the ventilation is insufficient, poisonousexhaust gases can collect, in particular car-bon monoxide. This is the case in enclosed

spaces, for example. There is a risk of fatalinjuries.RIf highly flammable substances or flamma-ble materials are nearby, there is a risk of arisk of fire and explosion.

Always deactivate the preselected switch-ontimes if you stop the vehicle in such or similarsituations.

112 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Use the timer to:Ractivate and deactivate immediate heatingmodeRset up to three switch-on timesRset the operating duration to between 10 and120 minutes or to continuous operationRset the heating level (preselected tempera-ture) to a range between 10 and 30

Timer overview

Timer above the overhead control panel: Program column

G Sets preselection memory 1 – 3(Y page 114)Sets weekday (Mon. – Sun.) (Y page 113)

; Menu bary Switches immediate heating modeon/off (Y page 114)B Sets the program times(Y page 114)Ñ Sets the day, time and the operatingduration (Y page 113)ß Sets the heating level (Y page 114)

= Display panel for: time, heating level andoperating durationà Continuous operation mode activeß Heating level set

? Selects options in program column: ormenu bar; (forwards)Increases values

A Confirms a selection or settingB Status bar

y Heating mode activatedC Activates the timer

Cancels or ends settings in a menuD Selects options in program column: or

menu bar; (backwards)Reduces values

Activating the timerThe timer switches to standby mode after10 seconds. The display goes off.X Press and hold theÜ button until themenu bar appears in the display and the timeis shown.

Setting the day, time and operating dura-tionYou must reset the day, time, and default valuefor the operating duration:Rduring initial operationRafter a voltage supply interruption (e.g. if thebattery has been disconnected)Rafter a malfunction.You can find information on malfunctions in the"Problems with the auxiliary warm-air heater"section (Y page 115).X Press theÛ orâ button until theÑsymbol in menu bar; flashes.

X Press theb button.In program column:, the day selectedflashes.

X Press theÛ orâ button to set thedesired day.

X Press theb button.The day selected is stored. The hour setting ofthe clock flashes.

X In the same way, set the hour and subse-quently theminutes, then confirm by pressingtheb button.The time is stored. Program column: dis-appears and the operating duration flashes.i The operating duration set is the default set-ting for immediate heating mode. You can setthe operating duration from 10 to120 minutes or activate continuous opera-tion.

X Using theÛ orâ button, set theminute value or select theà symbol forcontinuous operation.

X Press theb button.The operating duration is stored. The time isshown.

Operating the auxiliary heating system 113

Climatecontrol

Z

Switching immediate heating modeon/offX To switch on: press theÛ orâ buttonuntil they symbol in themenu bar flashes.

X Press theb button.The operation duration flashes in the display.i You can preset the default value that isshown (Y page 113).

X Using theÛ orâ button, set theminute value (10 to 120) or select theàsymbol for continuous operation.

X Press theb button.Immediate heating mode is activated. Thetime and they symbol appear.

X To switch off: press theÛ orâ buttonuntil they symbol flashes in themenu bar,and then press theb button.Immediate heating mode is deactivated. They symbol disappears.The auxiliary heating operates for another2 minutes and then switches off automati-cally.i If you switch off the ignition during immedi-ate heating (operating duration 10 to120 minutes), you also switch off the imme-diate heating mode. The auxiliary heatingoperates for another two minutes and thenswitches off automatically.If you have set continuous operation as theoperating duration and you switch off the igni-tion, the auxiliary heating switches off auto-matically after about 15 minutes. If, in theremaining time, the ignition is switched onagain, continuous operation of the auxiliaryheating continues.

Setting the preselection timeYou can set three preselection times using thetimer.After a malfunction or if the battery has beendisconnected, you must set the preselectiontimes again. You can find information on mal-functions in the "Problems with the auxiliarywarm-air heater" section (Y page 115).X Press theÛ orâ button until theBsymbol in the menu bar flashes.

X Press theb button.In the program column, theG preselectionmemory numbers appear. The selected pre-selection memory flashes.

X Press theÛ orâ button to select thedesired preselection memory.

X Press theb button.The preselection memory is selected. Thedays are shown.

X Set the day and time as described in the "Set-ting the day, time and operating duration"section (Y page 113).The preselection time is stored. The programcolumn disappears. In the display panel, theon message and they symbol appear.

X Press theb button.The operating duration flashes.

X Press theÛ orâ button to set theminute value (10 to 120).

X Press theb button.The operating duration for the preselectiontime is saved. The time and number of theselected preselection memory are shown.i The preselection memory that will be acti-vated next is underlined. Additionally, the daythat is set appears.

Deactivating the preselection timeX Carry out the steps as described in the "Set-ting the preselection time" section.

If they symbol in the status bar is shown:X Press theÛ orâ button until the offmessage in the display panel is shown.

X Press theb button.The preselection time is deactivated. The timeis shown.

Setting the heating levelYou can set the heating level to a range between10 and 30.The heating level corresponds to a preselectiontemperature for the vehicle interior. This is aguide value and may, depending on the outsidetemperature, differ from the interior tempera-ture.X Press theÛ orâ button until theßsymbol in the menu bar flashes.

X Press theb button.The heating level display flashes.

X Using theÛ andâ buttons, set thedesired heating level to a range between 10and 30.

X Press theb button.The heating level is set and they symbolappears.

114 Operating the auxiliary heating systemClimatecontrol

Problems with the auxiliary warm-air heater

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The auxiliary heatingdoes not switch on.

The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heatingswitches off automatically.

The auxiliary heatingswitches off automati-cally and/or cannot beswitched on.

The fuel tank is less thanÕ full. The auxiliary heating switches offautomatically.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines arefull.or

The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unitswitches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is lessthan 10 V.X Have the alternator and battery checked.or

The fuse is blown.X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Operating the cargo compartment airvents

If your vehicle is equipped with a roof ventilator,you can ventilate and extract air from the cargocompartment.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X To activate and extract air: press the uppersection of the ´ switch.The roof ventilator removes used air from thecargo compartment.

X To activate and ventilate: press the lowersection of the · switch.The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into thecargo compartment.

X To switch off: set the switch to the middleposition.

Operating the cargo compartment air vents 115

Climatecontrol

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Breaking-in notes

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)New or replaced brake pads and brake disksonly reach their optimum braking effect after afew100miles (a few100 kilometers). Until then,compensate for this by applying greater force tothe brake pedal.For the service life and economy of your vehicleit is crucial that you break in the engine with duecare.RTherefore, protect the engine for the first1000 miles (1500 km) by driving at varyingvehicle and engine speeds.RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and highengine speeds during this period, e.g. drivingat full throttle. Do not exceedØ of the max-imum speed for each gear.RDo not change down a gear manually in orderto brake.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only beengaged when driving slowly, e.g. when driv-ing in mountainous terrain.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking-in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

If you park the vehicle for more thanthree weeks:Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger orRdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery orRswitch off the electrical system using the bat-tery main switch (Y page 116) andRdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary batteryOtherwise, you need to check the battery's con-dition of charge every three weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain the bat-tery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V,the battery must be charged. Otherwise, thebattery may be damaged by exhaustive dis-charging.Be sure to observe the notes on disconnectingand charging the batteries under "Battery"(Y page 223). You can obtain information abouttrickle chargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery isolating switch

Important safety notes! Make sure that the key is in position 0 in theignition lock and that at least five minuteshave passed before removing or reconnecting

116 DrivingDrivingandparking

the battery main switch. You could otherwisedamage components of the electrical system.

You can use the battery isolating switch to dis-connect the power supply to all your vehicle'sconsumers. This will prevent uncontrolled bat-tery discharge caused by off-load current con-sumption.If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary bat-tery in the engine compartment, you will need todisconnect both batteries. Only then is the elec-trical system fully disconnected from the powersupply.

i Only switch the vehicle to de-energizedusing the battery main switch if:Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodRit is absolutely necessaryAfter the power supply has been activated,you will need to reset the side windows(Y page 71).

Switching off the power supply

Battery main switch to the left of the center con-soleX Remove the key from the ignition lock andwait for at least five minutes.

X Press button; in the direction of the arrowand hold.

X Pull connector: from the ground pin.X Push connector: as far to the side as pos-sible so that it cannot make contact with theground pin.All starter battery consumers are disconnec-ted from the power supply.

Switching on the power supply

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.X Press connector: onto ground pin; untilyou feel it engage and the lock inhibitor isreleased.Connector: must be in full contact withground pin;.All consumers are reconnected to the DCpower supply.

Key positions

g To insert and remove the key, lock the steer-ing wheel

1 To unlock the steering wheel, power supplyfor some consumers (e.g. the radio)

2 To switch on the ignition. Power supply forall consumers, preglow and drive position

3 To start the engineOn vehicleswith a batterymain switch, youmustfirst switch on the power supply (Y page 116).

i To unlock the steering, move the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key to position1.

Driving 117

Drivingandparking

Z

Preparing for a journey

Visual check of the vehicle exteriorX In particular, check the following componentson the vehicle, and on the trailer as necessary:Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn signals,brake lamps and wiper blades for dirt anddamageRtires and wheels for firm seating, correcttire pressure and general conditionRtrailer tow hitch for play and securityThe trailer coupling is one of the mostimportant vehicle parts with regard to roadsafety. The separate instructions issued bythe manufacturer pertaining to operation,care and maintenance should be observed.Rthat contour markings on attachments andbodies are in good condition

X Rectify any noticeable defects before com-mencing the journey.

Checks in the vehicle

Emergency equipment and first-aid kitX Check the equipment to make sure that it isaccessible, complete and ready for use.

The first aid and breakdown assistance equip-ment is in the front door stowage compartmentsand behind the driver's seat.

Vehicle lightingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Check the lighting system with the aid of asecond person.

X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 87).

Before driving off

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell may restrictthe clearance around the pedals or block adepressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so thatthey do not get into the driver's footwell.When using floormats or carpets, make surethat they are properly secured so that they do

not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not placeseveral floormats or carpets on top of oneanother.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

X Secure the load as per the loading guidelines(Y page 208).

X Stow luggage items securely. Secure the loadas per the loading guidelines (Y page 208).

X Make sure that the floormats and carpets areproperly secured so that they cannot slip andobstruct the pedals.

X Close all doors.

Starting the engine

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.

X Before starting the engine, make sure that:Rall the doors are closed.Rall the vehicle occupants are wearing theirseat belts correctly.Rthe parking brake is applied.i If you depress the brake pedal before start-ing the engine, the pedal travel is short andpedal resistance is high.If you depress the brake pedal again afterstarting the engine, pedal travel and resist-ance will be back to normal again.

118 DrivingDrivingandparking

Gearshift patternj Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Move the selector lever to position P.The display in the instrument cluster shows P:Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 164)Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 160)i You can also start the engine in neutral N.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.The% preglow indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up briefly.

X Once the% preglow indicator lamp goesout, turn the key to position 3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning.i You can start the engine without preglowwhen the engine is warm.The preglow system is malfunctioning if the% preglow indicator lamp lights up forapproximately 1 minute:Rafter the ignition is switched onRwhile the engine is runningAt extremely low outside temperatures youmay then no longer be able to start theengine. Have the malfunction rectified at aqualified specialist workshop.

i Depending on the equipment installed, thevehicle either automatically locks centrallyafter switching on the ignition or after pullingaway. The locking knobs in the doors dropdown.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.

Automatic door locking can be deactivated(Y page 64).

Driving off

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Only shift into reverse gear Rwhen the vehi-cle is stationary. Otherwise, you could dam-age the transmission.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.The selector lever lock is released.

X Move the selector lever to position D or R.On vehicles with a reverse warning feature,when reverse gear is engaged a warning tonesounds to alert other road users(Y page 119).

X Release the parking brake (Y page 128).Thec indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i After pulling away or switching on the igni-tion, the vehicle automatically locks centrally.The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 64).

Reverse warning device

G WARNINGOther road usersmay ignore or fail to hear thewarning tone of the reverse warning feature.There is a risk of injury if you fail to ensure thatthe area in which you are maneuvering isclear.

Driving 119

Drivingandparking

Z

Make sure that there are no persons orobjects in the area in which you are maneu-vering. It may be necessary to enlist the helpof a second person when maneuvering.

The reverse warning feature is a systemdesigned to assist you in ensuring the safety ofother road users.A warning signal sounds to alert other roaduserswhen reverse gear is engaged. The volumeof the warning tone can be reduced for night-time driving.

X To reduce the volume of thewarning tone:engage reverse gear twice in quick succes-sion.The warning tone is now quieter.

i The warning tone sounds at a normal vol-ume by default. The volume of the warningtone has to be reduced each time you engagereverse gear if necessary.

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can beheard.

There is air in the fuel system.X Turn the key back to position0 in the ignition lock before attemptingto start the engine again.

X Start the engine again.Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attempts willdrain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The starter motor can beheard. The reserve fuelwarning lamp is lit andthe fuel gage is at 0.

The fuel tank has been run dry.X Refuel the vehicle.If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get into thefuel system. If the engine does not start after refueling, bleed the fuelsystem as follows:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately10 seconds.

X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.If the engine does not start:X Wait approximately 2 minutes.X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.X If the engine still fails to start, do not continue trying to start it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

120 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The vehicle cannot bedriven at a speedexceeding 5 mph(8 km/h).The yellow; CheckEngine lamp and the yel-lowå DEF indicatorlamp2 light up.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment system is defective or an emissions-relevant malfunction has occurred.This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas aftertreat-ment.X Observe the messages in the display:Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 175)Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons (Y page 184).

The engine does notstart.The startermotor cannotbe heard.

The battery isolating switch is switched off.X Switch on the power supply (Y page 116).

The engine does notstart.The startermotor cannotbe heard.

The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is tooweak or discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 238).If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.The startermotor cannotbe heard.

The battery is discharged or faulty.X Check the battery for damage.X Charge the battery (Y page 228).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mayroll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro-longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when beingtowed, will result in transmission damage.

Towing (Y page 239)

Selector lever

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

2 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.

Automatic transmission 121

Drivingandparking

Z

The display in the instrument cluster shows thepresent selector lever position or the currentshift range:Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons(Y page 164)Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 160)

Selector lever positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from rollingaway when stopped. Only move theselector lever to P if the vehicle isstationary.You can only remove the key whenthe selector lever is in this position.The selector lever is locked in posi-tion P if the key is removed.The parking lock should not be usedas a brake when parking. Alwaysapply the parking brake as well onceyou have parked the vehicle.

C Reverse gearOnly move the selector lever to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels. Releasingthe brakes will allow you to move thevehicle freely, e.g. by pushing.Do not move the selector lever to Nwhile driving. The automatic trans-mission could otherwise be dam-aged.If ASR is deactivated or ESP® hasmalfunctioned: only move the selec-tor lever to N if the vehicle is in dan-ger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear itself. All forward gears are avail-able.You can influence the gearshifts andshift gears yourself or limit the shiftrange.

Changing gearThe 5-speed automatic transmission adapts toyour individual driving style by continuouslyadjusting its shift points. These shift pointadjustments take into account the current oper-ating and driving conditions. If the operating ordriving conditions change, the automatic trans-mission reacts by adjusting the gearshift pro-gram.When the selector lever is in position D, theautomatic transmission selects the individualgears automatically. This depends on:Rany restriction in the shift range(Y page 123)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

TouchshiftWhen the selector lever is in position D, you canperform gearshifts yourself.X To shift down: press the selector lever to theleft towards D–.The automatic transmission shifts to the nextgear down, depending on the gear currentlyengaged. The shift range is also restricted.i The automatic transmission does not shiftdown if you press the selector lever towardsD– while traveling at too high a speed. Thisprotects the engine from overrevving.

X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever tothe right towards D+.The automatic transmission shifts to the nextgear up, depending on the current gearshiftprogram. This also extends the shift range.

X Toderestrict the shift range:press and holdthe selector lever towards D+ until D appearsin the display again.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

X To select the optimum shift range: pressand hold the selector lever to the left towardsD–.The automatic transmission will shift to arange which allows easy acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-mission will shift down one or more gears.

122 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Shift rangesWhen the selector lever is in position D you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range for the auto-matic transmission.X To extend and restrict the shift range:press the selector lever briefly to the righttowards D+ or left towards D–.The display shows the selected shift range.The automatic transmission shifts only as faras the relevant gear.i If themaximumengine speed for the restric-ted shift range is reached and you depress theaccelerator pedal, the automatic transmis-sion will not shift up.

Driving situations

5 Use the braking effect of the engineon steep downhill gradients and fordriving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 Use the braking effect of the engineon extremely steep downhill gradi-ents and long downhill stretches.

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRlots of throttle: later upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to the nextgear down, depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts up again.

ManeuveringManeuvering in a tight space:X Control the vehicle's speed by braking care-fully.

X Depress the accelerator pedal slightly andevenly.

i You can shift back and forth between driveposition D and reverse gear R at low speedswithout applying the brakes. This can helpyou, for example when rapidly maneuveringthe vehicle or rocking it out of snow or slush.

Towing a trailerX Drive at moderate engine speeds on steepuphill gradients.

X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient,shift down to a shift range adapted to thedriving situation (Y page 123), even if cruisecontrol is activated.

Automatic transmission 123

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission mal-functions when shiftinggear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The acceleration charac-teristics have deteriora-ted noticeably.The transmission doesnot shift.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear R.X Stop the vehicle.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position D or R.In positionD, the transmission shifts into second gear; in positionR,the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Releasing the parking lock manuallyIn the event of a malfunction, it is possible tomanually release the selector lever from thelock in parking position P, e.g. to have the vehi-cle towed away.

X Apply the parking brake.X Remove cover:.X Slide implement; as far as it will go into theopening.

X Push the implement in and simultaneouslymove the selector lever out of position P.The selector lever lock is released. You cannow move the selector lever freely again untilit is returned to position P.

X Remove implement;.X Re-install cover:.

i The screwdriver from the vehicle tool kitcould function as the implement, for instance(Y page 236).

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handling offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creatingsparks under all circumstances. Switch off theengine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heatingbefore refueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothing

124 RefuelingDrivingandparking

and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

H Environmental noteIf fuels are handled improperly, they pose adanger to persons and the environment. Donot allow fuels to run into the sewage system,the surface waters, the ground water or intothe ground.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Even small amounts of gasolinewill cause damage to the fuel system andengine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if you acciden-tally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Filter the fuel before transferring it to thevehicle if you are refueling the vehicle frombarrels or containers.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-tem due to contaminated fuel.

Further information on fuel and on fuel gradescan be found in the "Technical data" section(Y page 273).

Refueling procedure

The fuel filler flap is beside the front left-handdoor when viewed in the direction of travel. It isonly possible to open the fuel filler flap when thefront door is open.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Switch off the auxiliary heating system(Y page 105).

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenthe fuel filler flap.

X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel vaporsfrom entering the vehicle interior.

X Turn fuel filler cap; counter-clockwise,remove it and let it hang from strap:.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out.

X Replace tank filler cap; on tank and turnclockwise.You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap isclosed fully.

X Open the front left-hand door first, and thenclose the filler flap.

Refueling 125

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the fuel and fuel tankIf your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines or thefuel tank are defective.X Turn the SmartKey immediately to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it.

X Do not restart the engine under any circum-stances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refuelingcarry out the following steps:X Before starting the engine: switch on the igni-tion three or four times.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 117).The% preglow indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up briefly.

X Once the% preglow indicator lamp goesout, turn the SmartKey to position 3 in theignition lock and release it as soon as theengine is running.

You can start the diesel engine without preglowwhen the engine is warm.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

Important safety notes! Only use DEF in accordance withISO 22241. Never mix DEF with additives orthin it with tap water. The exhaust gas after-treatment may otherwise be damaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet 352.0.Damage that results from the use of additivesor tap water leads to the loss of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

! If DEF comes into contact with a painted oraluminum surface, wash the surface offimmediately with plenty of water.

! DEF is not a diesel additive and must not bemixed with fuel in the tank. Even smallamounts of DEF can cause engine damage.Damage that results from the blending of DEFwill not be covered by the New Vehicle Limi-ted Warranty.

i If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡(Ò11†) it may be difficult to top up. If the DEFis frozen and there is an active warning indi-

cator, topping up may not be possible. Parkthe vehicle in a warm place, e.g. in a garage,until the DEF has become liquid again. Top-ping up is then possible again. Alternatively,have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

i If you add DEF at temperatures below 12 ‡(Ò11 †) it is possible that the level is notshown correctly due to the frozen DEF.Drive for at least 20minutes (heating phase inthe tank activated) and then stop the vehiclefor at least 30 seconds. The level is thenshown correctly.

You will find further information on DEF in the"Service products" section (Y page 273).

Refueling procedure

DEF filler neckNon-lockable DEF filler cap

Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartmentX To open: switch off the ignition.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Turn filler cap: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Toclose: replace cap:on the filler neck andturn it clockwise.You will hear a click when cap: is fullyclosed.

X Close the hood (Y page 215).

126 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Lockable filler cap

Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment

X To open: switch off the ignition.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Remove tool? for unlocking tank fillercap: from the footwell on the front-passenger side (Y page 236).

X Pull cover= up, turn 90° and release.X Insert tool? into hole; of tank filler cap:.X Turn filler cap: counter-clockwise andremove it. Make sure that tool? remains intank filler cap: while doing so.

X To close: replace filler cap: and turn itclockwise until closed.

X Pull tool? out of tank filler cap: and stowwith the vehicle tool kit in the footwell on thefront-passenger side.

X Pull cover= up over hole; of tank fillercap:, turn and release.

X Turn tank filler cap:.If tank filler cap: turns freely, the DEF tankis closed.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to thevehicle or damage to the drive train.

! When the vehicle is parked, always removethe key to prevent the battery from becomingdischarged.On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,switch off the power supply if the vehicle is tobe out of use for a longer period of time.

Parking 127

Drivingandparking

Z

Always park your vehicle safely and according tolegal requirements and secure it against rollingaway.To ensure that the vehicle is properly securedagainst rolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be firmly appliedRthe selector lever must be in position P andthe key must be removed from the ignitionlockRon steep uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curbRthe rear axle must be secured, e.g. with awheel chock, on steep uphill or downhill gra-dients

Use the wheel chock (Y page 129) to do so.If you leave the vehicle parked for more thanthree weeks:Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger orRdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery orRswitch off the electrical system using the bat-tery main switch (Y page 116) andRdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary batteryOtherwise, you need to check the battery's con-dition of charge every three weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain the bat-tery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V,the battery must be charged. Otherwise, thebattery may be damaged by exhaustive dis-charging.Be sure to observe the notes on disconnectingand charging the batteries under "Bat-tery“ (Y page 223). You can obtain informationabout trickle chargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

The brake lamps are not illuminated when youbrake the vehicle using the parking brake.As a rule, you may only apply the parking brakewhen the vehicle is stationary.X To apply the parking brake: pull brakelever: up as far as the last possible detent.Thec warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up if the engine is running.i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, youcan then press lever: down to the stop.

X To release the parking brake: on vehicleswith a folding brake lever, first pull brakelever: up to the stop.

X Raise brake lever: slightly and pressrelease knob;.

X Guide brake lever: down to the stop.Thec indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

128 ParkingDrivingandparking

Exceptionally, if the service brake fails, the park-ing brake can be used to brake the vehicle in anemergency.X Emergency braking: press and hold releasebutton; and carefully apply brake lever:.

Switching off the engine

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

! If the coolant temperature is very high, e.g.after driving on hilly roads, leave the enginerunning at idle speed for about two minutesbefore turning it off.This allows the coolant temperature to returnto normal.

X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lockand remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway (Y page 127).

Wheel chockUse the wheel chock or a similar object to pre-vent the vehicle from rolling away, e.g. whenparking or changing a wheel.

Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartmentX To remove the wheel chock on CargoVans/Passenger Vans: pull restrainingcable: down a little and remove it fromretainer;.

X Remove the chock.i When stowing the wheel chock, make surethat restraining cable: is holding it securelyin retainer;.

Wheel chock to the rear of the chassis on the leftside of the vehicle (example)X To remove the wheel chock on Cab Chas-sis: pull the locking springs down and removethe wheel chock.i When stowing the wheel chock, make surethat it is secured in the retainer with the lock-ing springs.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you park your vehicle for longer thanthree weeks:Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger orRdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or

Parking 129

Drivingandparking

Z

Rswitch off the electrical system using the bat-tery main switch (Y page 116) andRdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary batteryOtherwise, you need to check the battery's con-dition of charge every three weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain the bat-tery. If the battery voltage is lower than 12.2 V,the battery must be charged. Otherwise, thebattery may be damaged by exhaustive dis-charging.Be sure to observe the notes on disconnectingand charging the batteries under "Battery"(Y page 223). You can obtain information abouttrickle chargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use. In this event, consult aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe driver's attention to the roadmust alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, we rec-ommend that you pull over to a safe locationand stop before placing or taking a telephonecall. If you choose to use the telephone whiledriving, please use the hands-free device andonly use the telephone when road, weatherand traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)every second.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

! Always observe the ground clearance of thevehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehicles witha step, ground clearance is further restricted.Obstacles can damage the vehicle.If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe-cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, haveanother person direct you.

Drive sensibly – save fuelIn order to save fuel, observe the following tips:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in moun-tainous terrain.

Overrun cutoffIf you are in overrun mode and take your foot offthe accelerator pedal, the fuel supply is cut offwhen the engine speed is out of the idle speedcontrol range.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent are greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.

130 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous substances in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work optimally if they aremaintained exactly in accordance with the man-ufacturer's specifications. Any work on theengine should therefore be carried out by quali-fied and authorized technicians at a Sprinterdealer.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. In addition, all specificmaintenance work must be carried out at regu-lar intervals and in accordance with the servicerequirements of the dealer listed here on theinside title page. Details can be found in theMaintenance Booklet.

Short journey! If the vehicle is predominantly used forshort-distance driving or is stationary for longperiods, this could lead to amalfunction in theautomatic cleaning function for the diesel par-ticle filter. This can lead to blockage of thediesel particle filter. This can also result in fuelcollecting in the engine oil and cause enginefailure.

Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances,drive on a highway or an inter-urban road for20minutes every 300miles (500 km). This facil-itates the diesel particle filter's burn-off proc-ess.

Speed limiter

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

As the driver, you must find out about the max-imum speed of the vehicle permitted for thetires (tire and tire pressure). In particular, alsoobserve the tire approval regulations for eachcountry.Youmust not exceed the speed limit for the tireslisted in the tire pressure tables. You can findinformation on tire pressures in the "Wheels andtires" section (Y page 246).You can permanently limit the speed of yourvehicle to 65 mph (105 km/h) or 75 mph(120 km/h).We recommend that you have the speed limitprogrammed at an authorized Sprinter dealer.Before overtaking, take into consideration thatthe engine speed limiter prevents the speedincreasing beyond the programmed speed limit.

Driving abroad

ServiceAn extensive network of authorized SprinterDealers is also at your disposal when you aretraveling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear inmind that service facilities or replacement partsmay not always be immediately available. Youcan obtain a list of workshops at any authorizedSprinter Dealer.

FuelIn some countries, only fuels with a higher sulfurcontent are available.Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Infor-mation on fuel (Y page 273).

Driving tips 131

Drivingandparking

Z

Low-beam headlampsWhen driving in countries in which traffic driveson the opposite side of the road to the countrywhere the vehicle is registered, the halogenheadlamps must be partially masked. This pre-vents glare to oncoming traffic and no longerilluminates the edge of the road to the sameheight and distance.Have the halogen headlamps masked at a quali-fied specialist workshop before you cross theborder, but as close to it as possible.When returning from your journey, remove theadhesive surfaces from the halogen headlampsas close to the border as possible. Clean theglass of the headlamps if necessary.It is not necessary to adjust Bi-Xenon head-lamps. Legal requirements are fulfilled evenwithout adjustment.

Transport by railTransporting your vehicle by rail may be subjectto certain restrictions or require special meas-ures to be taken in some countries due to vary-ing tunnel heights and loading standards.You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Sprinter dealer.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

Downhill gradients! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

On long and steep downhill gradients, youshould change down to shift range2 or1 ingood time. This should be observed in particularwhen driving with a laden vehicle and when tow-ing a trailer.

i You must also change the shift range ingood time when cruise control is switched on.

You thereby make use of the braking effect ofthe engine and do not have to brake as often tomaintain the speed. This relieves the load on theservice brake and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. The brakes are cooled downmore quickly in the airflow.

132 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Wet road surfacesIf you have been driving for a long time in heavyrain without braking, there may be a delayedresponse when you first apply the brakes. Thismay also occur after driving through a car washor deep water.You must depress the brake pedal more firmly.Maintain a longer distance to the vehicle infront.While paying attention to the traffic conditions,you should brake the vehicle firmly after drivingon awet road surface or through a carwash. Thisheats the brake discs, so that they dry morequickly, which protects them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsWhen driving on salted roads, salt may start tobuild up on the brake disks and brake pads. Thiscan increase braking distances considerably.Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle infront.To remove any build-up of salt that may haveformed:X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey,occasionally during journey and at the end ofthe journey.Make sure that you do not endan-ger other road users when doing so.

Checking the brake pad thicknessIn addition to monitoring using the brake padwear sensor, regularly monitor and check all ofthe brake pads by performing a visual inspectionto look for pad material wear.If you are unable to check the brake wear on theinside of thewheels, remove thewheels with thetools provided.Make sure that the brake padmaterial thicknessnever falls below 0.12 in (3mm). Have the brakepads checked and replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, if necessary.Do not solely rely on the brake pad wear sensor.It is strongly recommended that you have thebrake pads checked at a qualified specialistworkshop at every service displayed in themain-tenance interval indicator, prior to long journeysand whenever the wheels are removed.

New brake discs and brake pads/liningsNewbrake pads and brake discs only reach theiroptimal braking effect after a few100 kilometers. Until then, compensate for thisby applying greater force to the brake pedal.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brake discsand brake pads/linings:Rbrake discs that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz or are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake discs or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake discs and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Alwaysinstall new brake pads/linings when replacingbrake discs.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered sur-faces, road salt and/or dirt may get into theparking brake. This causes corrosion and areduction of braking force.In order to prevent this, drive with the parkingbrake lightly applied from time to time. Whendoing so, drive for a distance of approximately110 yds (100m) at amaximum speed of 12mph(20 km/h).The brake lamps are not illuminated when youbrake the vehicle using the parking brake.

Driving tips 133

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving in wet conditions

Hydroplaning

G WARNINGThere is a danger of hydroplaning occurring,even if you are driving slowly and your tireshave sufficient tread depth, depending on thedepth of water on the road. There is a risk ofan accident.For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brake care-fully.

Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions inwhich hydroplaning can occur, drive as follows:Rreduce your speedRavoid tire rutsRapply the brakes with care

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhichwater has collected, please bear in mind that:Rthe water level of standing water should notbe above the lower edge of the front bumperRdo not drive faster than walking speed

Driving in winter

General notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop in good time at the onset ofwinter.

i Do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a wintercover. The measurements of the on-boarddiagnostic systemmay otherwise return inac-curate values. Some of these values arelegally prescribed and must therefore alwaysbe exact.

Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 245).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mayroll only briefly in the neutral position N. Pro-

134 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

longed rolling of the wheels, e.g. when beingtowed, will result in transmission damage.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to neutral position N.X Try to maintain control of the vehicle usingcorrective steering.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads.Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and brakingmaneuvers. Do not use cruise control.You can find further information on winter tiresand snow chains in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 245).

Driving off-road

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

G WARNINGWhen driving off-road, your body is subject toforces from all directions, due to the unevensurface. You could be thrown from your seat,for instance. There is a risk of injury.Alwayswear a seat belt, evenwhendriving off-road.

G WARNINGIf you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer-ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causinginjury to your hands.Always hold the steering wheel firmly withboth hands. When driving over obstacles, youmust expect steering forces to increasebriefly and suddenly.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

! When driving off-road or on unpaved surfa-ces, check the underside of the vehicle andthe wheels and tires at regular intervals. Inparticular, remove any trapped foreignobjects, e.g. stones and branches.Such foreign objects may:Rdamage the chassis, the fuel tank or thebrake systemRcause imbalances and thus vibrationsRbe flung out when you continue drivingIf there is any damage, inform a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

When driving off-road and on construction sites,sand, mud and water mixed with oil, for exam-ple, may get into the brakes. This may lead to areduction in braking performance or total brakefailure, also as a result of increased wear. Thebraking characteristics will vary depending onthe material that has got into the system. Cleanthe brakes after driving off-road. If you thennotice reduced braking performance or hearscraping noises, have the brake systemcheckedat a qualified specialist workshop. Adjust yourdriving style to the changed braking character-istics.Driving off-road or on construction sites increa-ses the possibility of vehicle damage which mayin turn lead to the failure of certain assembliesand systems. Adapt your driving style to the off-road driving conditions. Drive carefully. Haveany vehicle damage rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.When driving on rough terrain, do not shift thetransmission into the neutral position. You couldlose control when attempting to brake the vehi-cle with the service brake. If your vehicle cannotmanage an uphill slope, drive back down theslope in reverse gear.

Driving tips 135

Drivingandparking

Z

When loading your vehicle for driving off-road oron a construction site, keep the vehicle's centerof gravity as low as possible.

Checklist before driving off-roadX Check the fuel and DEF levels (Y page 159)and top up (Y page 126).

X Engine: check the oil level (Y page 216) andadd oil (Y page 218).Before driving up or down steep gradients, fillthe oil to the maximum level.i If you drive up or down steep gradients, the4 symbol may appear in the display. Theengine operating safety is not put at risk if youhave filled the engine oil to themaximum levelbefore the journey.

X Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is work-ing (Y page 236).

X Make sure that a lug wrench (Y page 236),wooden underlay for the jack, a robust towcable and a folding spade are carried in thevehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depth(Y page 244) and tire pressure(Y page 246).

Rules for driving off-road! Always bear the vehicle's ground clearancein mind and avoid obstacles, e.g. deep ruts.Obstacles may damage the following parts ofthe vehicle:Rthe chassisRthe drive trainRthe fuel and supply tanksFor this reason, you should always driveslowly when driving off-road. If you have todrive over obstacles, have the frontpassenger direct you.

i We recommend that you additionally carry ashovel and a recovery ropewith shackle in thevehicle.REnsure that loads and items of luggage aresecurely stowed or lashed down(Y page 208).RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle andshift to a low gear.RIf the surface demands it, temporarily deacti-vate ASR when pulling away (Y page 54).

ROnly drive off-road with the engine runningand a gear engaged.RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace isnecessary in many situations.RAvoid spinning the drive wheels.RMake sure that the wheels always remain incontact with the ground.RDrive with extreme care over unknown terrainwhere you can only see for a short distance.As a precaution, get out of the vehicle to takea look at the route to be taken in advance.RCheck the water depth before fording.RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes,tree stumps and ruts).RAvoid edges where the surface could crumbleor break away.

Checklist after driving off-road! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterdriving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Off-road driving places a higher demand on yourvehicle than normal road operation. Check yourvehicle after driving on rough terrain. By doingso you will notice any damage in good time andreduce the risk of an accident for yourself andother road users. Clean your vehicle thoroughlybefore driving on public roads.Observe the following points after driving off-road, on construction sites and before driving onpublic roads:X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: deactivateall-wheel drive (Y page 145).

X Activate ASR (Y page 54).X Clean the headlamps and tail lamps andcheck them for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the windshield, windows and exteriormirrors.

X Clean the steps, door sills and grab handles.This increases safety of footing.

X Clean the wheels and tires, wheel arches andthe underbody of the vehicle with a water jet.This increases road grip, especially on wetroad surfaces.

136 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

X Check the wheels and tires and wheel archesfor trapped foreign objects and remove them.Trapped foreign objects can damage thewheels and tires or may be flung out from thevehicle when you continue driving.

X Check the underbody for trapped branches orother parts of plants and remove them.

X Clean the brake disks, brake pads and axlejoints, particularly after operation in sand,mud, grit and gravel, water or similarly dirtyconditions.

X Check the entire floor assembly, the tires,wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steering,chassis and exhaust system for any damage.

X Check the service brake for operating safety,e.g. carry out a brake test.

X If you notice strong vibrations after driving off-road, check the wheels and drive train for for-eign objects again. Remove any foreignobjects which can lead to imbalances andthus cause vibrations.

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains the speed of the vehi-cle for you.Use cruise control if road and traffic conditionsmake it appropriate to maintain a steady speedfor a prolonged period. You can set any speedfrom 20 mph upwards in increments of 1 mph.

i If you have set km/h as the unit for the dig-ital speedometer (Y page 167), you can setany speed from 30 km/h upwards in incre-ments of 1 km/h.

Cruise control should not be activated whendriving off-road or on construction sites.Cruise control may not be able to maintain thestored speed on uphill or downhill gradients. Ifthe gradient evens out and the vehicle's speeddoes not fall below 20 mph (30 km/h), thestored speed is resumed.

i The speed shown in the speedometer maydiffer slightly from the speed stored by cruisecontrol.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, cruise control can neither reducethe risk of an accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Cruise control cannot take road,weather and traffic conditions into account.Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable fordriving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traf-fic, on winding roads or off-road.Ron slippery roads. Braking or acceleratingmay cause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle could then skid.Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow.

If there is a change of drivers, make sure thatyou inform the new driver about the set cruisespeed.

Cruise control lever

Operating cruise control

: To activate and store the current speed or ahigher speed

; To activate at the last stored speed= To activate and store the current speed or a

lower speed? To deactivate cruise controlThe cruise control lever is the upper lever on theleft of the steering column.

Displaying the cruise control speedVehicles with steering wheel buttons: whenyou activate cruise control, the text field in thedisplay briefly shows the speed limitmessage

Driving systems 137

Drivingandparking

Z

and the stored speed. The status area of thedisplay then shows theV symbol and thestored speed.Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:when you activate cruise control, the displaybriefly shows theV symbol and the storedspeed.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brakemust be released. Thecindicator lamp in the instrument cluster is offRyou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h)Rneither the brake or clutch pedal is depressed

i Other drive and brake systems not descri-bed in this Operator's Manual, such as aretarder, may affect cruise control. You canfind information on this in the separate oper-ating instructions provided by the body man-ufacturer.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speedabove 20 mph (30 km/h).

X Briefly push the cruise control lever up: ordown?.

X Release the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The current speedis stored.The display shows theV symbol and thestored speed.

Resuming the stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.

X Release the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated and resumes thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.The display shows theV symbol and thestored speed.i When you pull the cruise control levertowards you for the first time after starting theengine, cruise control adopts the currentspeed.

Setting the speedIt may be a moment before the vehicle starts toaccelerate or brake to the set speed. Take thisdelay into account when setting the speed.X Briefly push the cruise control lever up: toincrease the speed or down= to reduce thespeed.The last stored speed increases or decreasesin 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments).

orX Press and hold the cruise control lever up:or down= until the desired speed has beenreached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The current speed is stored.The display shows theV symbol and thestored speed.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate briefly to overtake, for example, cruisecontrol resumes the vehicle’s speed to thelast speed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are various ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards?.

orX Apply the brakes.The last speed set remains stored. The lastspeed stored is deleted when you switch off theengine.

138 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Cruise control is deactivated automaticallywhen:Ryou apply the brakesRyou apply the parking brake and thecindicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup

Ryou are driving slower than 20mph (30 km/h)Ryou shift the automatic transmission to neu-tral position N while the vehicle is in motionRESP® or ASR intervenesRthere is amalfunction in the ESP®, ASRor ABSsystem

Problems with cruise control

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

On vehicleswith steeringwheel buttons, thespeed cannot be setwhen cruise control isactivated.

The display shows a high-priority message. Thus a change in speed isnot possible.X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display.X Deactivate cruise control

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprises thedistance warning function and adaptive BrakeAssist.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Note the section on 'Important safety notes'(Y page 53).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.

In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

OperationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically. Withoutyour intervention, the distance warning functioncannot prevent a collision.The distance warning function will issue a warn-ing at speeds of around 20 mph (30 km/h) ormore if:Ryou approach a vehicle ahead of you veryquickly. You will then hear an intermittentwarning tone and the red· warning lampin the instrument cluster flashes.

X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

Driving systems 139

Drivingandparking

Z

If you want the distance warning function toassist you, the function must be activated andoperational.Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditions may cause thesystem to display an unnecessary warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of around 45 mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function can also react to sta-tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parkedvehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision, thesystem will alert you both visually and acousti-cally.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else coveringthe sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference from other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineFollowing damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating the distancewarning functionWhen you switch on the engine, the distancewarning function switches on after a few sec-onds.X To deactivate: press theæ button(Y page 36).Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:theÄwarning lamp in the instrument clus-ter lights up and the OFFmessage flashes. Themessage then disappears and theÄ indi-cator lamp remains lit.Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: theÄ warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes and the Distance warning systemdeactivated message appears .The mes-

sage then disappears and theÄ warninglamp remains lit.

X To activate: press theæ button again(Y page 36).Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:theÄwarning lamp in the instrument clus-ter lights up and the onmessage flashes. Themessage then disappears and theÄ indi-cator lamp goes out.Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: theÄ warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes and the Distance warning systemactivated message appears in the multi-function display. The message then disap-pears and the indicator lampÄ goes out.

Adaptive Brake Assisti Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 53).

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRto stationary obstaclesRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Adaptive Brake Assist aids you when brakingduring hazardous situations at speeds above

140 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

20 mph (30 km/h). With the help of AdaptiveBrake Assist, the distance warning signal candetect obstacles that are in the path of yourvehicle for an extended period of time.When you approach an obstacle and adaptiveBrake Assist detects that there is a risk of a col-lision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates the brak-ing force necessary to avoid a collision. Shouldyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to the calculated level.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes function as usual again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicleAdaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.Up to the maximum vehicle speed, adaptiveBrake Assist can react to moving obstacles thathave already been recognized as such at leastonce over the period of observation. AdaptiveBrake Assist does not react to stationary obsta-cles.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else coveringthe sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference from other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineIf adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, the fullbrake boosting effect with the help of BASremains available.Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.

Lane Tracking package

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensorsin the bumper. It supports you from speeds ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws your atten-tion to vehicles detected in the monitored area.If you then switch on the corresponding turnsignal to change lane, you will also receive anoptical and audible collision warning.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removal, tampering, or alteringof the device will void any warranties, and isnot permitted by the FCC. Do not tamperwith,alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Driving systems 141

Drivingandparking

Z

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else coveringthe sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRnarrow and short vehicles, e.g. motorcyclesor bicyclesRvery wide lanesRnarrow lanesRvehicles not driving in the middle of their laneRbarriers or other road boundariesVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area approx-imately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle andapproximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft (3.5 m)each side of it. The monitoring range behind thevehicle may also be larger depending on the sit-uation.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if the vehicles are driving on the inner sideof their lane.

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, for exam-ple trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the sides of the rear bumper. Makesure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slushin the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensorsmust not be covered, for example by rear-moun-ted cycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage to thebumper, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work prop-erly.

Indicator and warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp and red warning lampIf yellow indicator lamp: lights up:Ryou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RBlind Spot Assist is deactivatedRBlind Spot Assist is malfunctioningBlind Spot Assist is active from a speed of20mph (30 km/h). If a vehicle is detected in theblind spot monitoring range, red warninglamp: on the corresponding side lights up.This warning occurs when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind or fromthe side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warn-ing only occurs if the difference in speed is lessthan 14 mph (22 km/h).Yellow indicator lamp: goes out if reverse gearis engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then deactiva-ted.

142 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to thebrightness of the ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds once. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, detected vehiclesare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assisti Blind Spot Assist is activated when youswitch on the ignition.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

X To deactivate: press thek button in thecenter console (Y page 36).The yellow indicator lamp in exteriormirror:first flashes and then lights up continuously.

X To activate: press thek button in thecenter console again (Y page 36).The yellow indicator lamp in exteriormirror:flashes initially. If you exceed 20 mph(30 km/h) while driving, the yellow indicatorlamp in exterior mirror: goes out.

Towing a trailerIf you attach a trailer, make sure that you havecorrectly established the electrical connection.This can be accomplished by checking the trailerlighting. Blind Spot Assist is deactivated as aresult. The indicator lamp in the exterior mirrorslights up yellow.On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, theBlind Spot Assist Deactivated messagealso appears in the display.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notesLaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front ofyour vehicle by means of a camera at the top ofthe windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detectslanemarkings on the road and warns you beforeyou leave your lane unintentionally.

: Lane Keeping Assist cameraLane Keeping Assist supports you from speedsof approximately 40 mph(60 km/h).If Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings,theà indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter lights up green. LaneKeepingAssist is opera-tional.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. Lane KeepingAssist cannot take into account road,weather ortraffic conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.

Driving systems 143

Drivingandparking

Z

Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehiclein its lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rif the vehicle is incorrectly loaded(Y page 208)Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lanemarkings are pres-ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction areaRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditions onthe road

A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lane marking. In addition, a warning tonesounds and theà indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes red.

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistLane Keeping Assist is automatically activatedwhen you start the engine.X To deactivate: press thej button in thecenter console (Y page 36).On vehicles without steering wheel but-tons:OFF flashes briefly in the display and theÃindicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes yellow and then lights up continu-ously.On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:The Lane Keep. Assist Deactivatedmes-sage appears in the display and theÃindicator lamp in the instrument clusterflashes yellow and then lights up continu-ously.

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.X To activate: press thej button in thecenter console again (Y page 36).On vehicles without steering wheel but-tons:on flashes briefly in the display and theÃindicator lamp in the instrument cluster goesout. If a lane marking is detected, theÃindicator lamp lights up green.On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:The Lane Keep. Assist Activated mes-sage appears in the display and theÃindicator lamp in the instrument cluster goesout. If a lane marking is detected, theÃindicator lamp lights up green.Lane Keeping Assist is activated.

A Lane Keeping Assist warning is suppressed if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou have set the turn signal and a lane changeis detected. In this case, the warnings aresuppressed for a certain period of time.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehi-cles with an automatic transmission.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.Lane Keeping Assist warns you earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.Warnings are given later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

All-wheel drive

Important safety notes! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must

144 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

remain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the all-wheel drive system can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. The all-wheel drive systemcannot take road, weather and traffic conditionsinto account. The all-wheel drive system is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and forbraking in good time.4ETS ensures permanent drive for all fourwheels, and together with ESP® it improves thevehicle's traction.If a driven wheel spins due to lack of traction:RWhen pulling away, make use of the tractioncontrol integrated in ESP®. Depress theaccelerator pedal as far as necessary.RWhile driving, slowly take your foot off theaccelerator pedal

In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains(Y page 246). This is the only way to get the fullbenefit from the all-wheel drive system.For information on "Driving off-road", see(Y page 135).

Engaging all-wheel drive

Conditions for engaging/disengagingAll-wheel drive can only be engaged or disen-gaged if:Rthe engine is runningRthe vehicle is stationaryIf it is not possible to engage all-wheel-drive:Rmove the selector lever to position NRrelease the brake pedalRpress the; buttonRmove the selector lever from N to D or R

Engaging/disengaging all-wheel drive

X To engage/disengage: press the; but-ton.The indicator lamp in the; button flashes.Theh and: indicator lamps light up inthe instrument cluster. ESP® and ASR aredeactivated for the duration of the engaging/disengaging process.If the engaging/disengaging process is suc-cessful, theh and: indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out and ESP® andASR are reactivated.If the indicator lamp in the; button is lit,all-wheel drive is engaged. On vehicles withsteering-wheel buttons, the display thenshows the following message: Four-wheeldrive active.If the engaging/disengaging process fails, theindicator lamp in the; button flashesthree times briefly. One of the gear changeconditions was not fulfilled.

As long as the indicator lamp in the; buttonis flashing, you can cancel the engaging/disen-gaging process by pressing the; again.

i If the LOW RANGE transmission ratio(Y page 145) is engaged, all-wheel drive can-not be disengaged.

LOW RANGE transmission ratio

General notesThe LOW RANGE transmission ratio assists youwhen driving on difficult terrain. If you engageLOW RANGE, the engine's performance charac-teristics and the automatic transmission's shift-ing characteristics are adjusted accordingly.The transmission ratio from the engine to thewheels is around 40% lower than in the on-roadposition. This increases the drive torque.

Driving systems 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Conditions for engaging/disengagingLOWRANGE can only be engaged or disengagedif:Rthe engine is runningRthe vehicle is stationaryRthe brake pedal is depressedRthe selector lever of the automatic transmis-sion is in position P or NRall-wheel drive is engaged

Engaging and disengaging LOW RANGE

: Engages and disengages LOW RANGEX To engage or disengage: press button:or;.The+ indicator lamp flashes in the instru-ment cluster for the duration of the engaging/disengaging process.If the engaging/disengaging process is suc-cessful:Rand LOWRANGE is engaged, the+ indi-cator lamp lights up.Rand LOW RANGE is disengaged, the+indicator lamp goes out.

As long as the+ indicator lamp is flashing,you can cancel the engaging/disengagingprocess by pressing button: or; again.If the engaging/disengaging process fails, the+ indicator lamp briefly flashes threetimes. One of the gear change conditions wasnot fulfilled.

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

Important safety notesObserve the notes on braking in the section on"Driving and parking". If you fail to adapt yourdriving style or you are inattentive, DSR can nei-ther reduce the risk of accident nor override the

laws of physics. DSR cannot take road, weatherand traffic conditions into account. DSR is onlyan aid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and forbraking in good time.

General notesDSR supports you with the LOW RANGE trans-mission ratio when you are driving downhill off-road and on construction sites. DSRmaintains apreset speed for you on downhill gradients byapplying the brakes as required.Maintaining thespeed is dependent on the road surface condi-tions and the downhill gradient and cannottherefore be guaranteed in all situations.You can set the speed to between 2.5 mph(4 km/h) and 11mph (18 km/h) using the brakeand accelerator pedals or the cruise controllever.RIf the vehicle is stationary, or its speed is lessthan 2.5 mph (4 km/h) the speed is set to2.5 mph (4 km/h).RIf you drive faster than 11 mph (18 km/h) off-road, DSR switches to standby mode. DSRremains activated, but does not brake auto-matically.RIf you drive downhill slower than 11 mph(18 km/h), DSR sets the speed to the previ-ously set speed.RDSR switches off automatically if you drivefaster than 28 mph (45 km/h).

Cruise control lever

: Activates DSR and stores the current orhigher speed

; Activates DSR and stores the current speed= Activates DSR and stores the current or

lower speed? Deactivates DSRThe cruise control lever is the uppermost leveron the left of the steering column. For as long as

146 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is engaged,only use the cruise control lever to operate DSR.When the LOW RANGE transmission ratio is dis-engaged, use cruise control.

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DSR, both activation condi-tions must be fulfilled:RThe LOW RANGE transmission ratio isengaged. The+ indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.RThe vehicle is stationary or you are not drivingfaster than 11 mph (18 km/h).

Activating DSRYou can activate DSR when the vehicle is sta-tionary or moving.X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to therequired speed between 2.5 mph (4 km/h)and 11 mph (18 km/h).

X Briefly push the cruise control lever up: ordown=.

orX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou;.

X Release the brake or accelerator pedal.The current speed is stored. When the vehicleis stationary, the speed is stored at 2.5(4 km/h). DSRmaintains the stored speed onthe downhill gradient and brakes automati-cally.

When DSR is activated and the vehicle pullsaway, accelerates or brakes, the speed set cor-responds to the speed at which the acceleratoror brake pedal is released. This is only the caseif you are not driving faster than 11 mph(18 km/h).

DSR status indicator in the on-board com-puterVehicles with steering wheel buttonsLOW RANGE is engagedRThe DSR message is displayed in the statusarea of the on-board computer.RDSR can be activated.DSR is activatedRThe DSR message and the set speed are dis-played in the status area of the on-board com-puter.

DSR is activated but is not interveningRYou are driving at between 11mph (18 km/h)and 28 mph (45 km/h).RThe DSR message is displayed in the statusarea of the on-board computer. Also, thespeed 11 mph (18 km/h) flashes.

DSR is activated but is not interveningRYou are driving faster than 28mph (45 km/h).RThe DSR message is displayed in the statusarea of the on-board computer. Also, the ---message is displayed for 5 seconds.

DSR is activated but is not interveningRThe DSR ---message is displayed in the sta-tus area of the on-board computer.There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brak-ing System (EBS). Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsLOW RANGE is engaged:RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-boardcomputer.RDSR can be activated.DSR is activatedRThe DSR symbol and the set speed are dis-played in the on-board computer.

DSR is activated but is not interveningRYou are driving at between 11mph (18 km/h)and 28 mph (45 km/h).RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-boardcomputer. Also, the speed 11mph (18 km/h)flashes.

DSR is activated but is not interveningRYou are driving faster than 28mph (45 km/h).RThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-boardcomputer. Also, the ---message is displayedfor 5 seconds.

DSR is activated but is not interveningRThe DSR symbol is displayed in the on-boardcomputer. Also, the --- message is perma-nently displayed.There is a malfunction in the Electronic Brak-ing System (EBS). Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Setting the speed whilst driving downhillYou can set the speed to between 2.5 mph(4 km/h) and 11mph (18 km/h) using the brake

Driving systems 147

Drivingandparking

Z

and accelerator pedals or the cruise controllever.X Brake or accelerate the vehicle to therequired speed on the downhill gradient.

X Release the brake or accelerator pedal. Thecurrent speed is stored.

orX Briefly push the cruise control lever up: toincrease the speed or down= to reduce thespeed.The last speed stored is increased or reducedincrementally.

X Release the cruise control lever. The currentspeed is stored.

orX Press and hold the cruise control lever up:or down= until the desired speed has beenreached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The current speed is stored.

i It may take a moment before the vehiclebrakes to the set speed. Take this delay intoaccount when setting the speed with thecruise control lever.

Deactivating DSRX Briefly press the cruise control leverforward?.

orX Accelerate and drive faster than 28 mph(45 km/h).

DSR deactivates automatically if:Ryou are driving faster than 28mph (45 km/h).Ryou disengage the LOW RANGE transmissionratio.Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP® or ABS sys-tem.

PARKTRONIC

General notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. Thesystem is equipped with ultrasonic sensors inthe front and rear bumpers to monitor the areaaround your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indicates vis-ually and audibly the distance between yourvehicle and an object.Your vehicle features two separate sound emit-ters with different frequencies for the warning

tones. The warning ranges in front of and behindthe vehicle are indicated by different warningtones.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lockRrelease the parking brake andRmove the selector lever to D, N or R.PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). PARKTRONIC is reactivatedat speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h).

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is only an aid. It cannot replaceyour own awareness of the immediate surround-ings. You are responsible for safe maneuvering,parking and pulling away. When maneuvering,parking and pulling away, make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in themaneu-vering area.

! Pay particular attention to obstacles aboveor below the sensors when parking, such asflower pots or trailer towbars. PARKTRONICdoes not recognize such objects when theyare in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.You could damage the vehicle or objects.PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from:Rultrasonic sources such as a truck'scompressed-air brakes, an automatic carwash or a pneumatic drillRattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear moun-ted racksRnumber plates (vehicle license plates) thatare not affixed flat against the bumperRdirty or icy sensors

Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is nolonger required. PARKTRONIC measures theminimum detection range to an obstacle fromthe bumper, not the ball coupling.

Range of the sensorsPARKTRONIC does not account for obstaclesthat are:Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons, ani-mals or objectsRabove its detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, overhangs or truck loading ramps

148 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush.Otherwise, they cannot function correctly.Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not toscratch or damage them (Y page 232).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 39 in(100 cm)

Corners Approx. 26 in (65 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 71 in(180 cm)

Corners Approx. 39 in(100 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 12 in (30 cm)

Front corner sensors Approx. 10 in (25 cm)

Rear corner sensors Approx. 12 in (30 cm)

If an obstacle is within this range, all segmentsof the warning displays light up and you hear a

warning tone. If the distance between the vehi-cle and the obstacle falls below the minimumrange, it is possible that the distance may nolonger be displayed.

Warning displays

Warning display, front area

Warning display for the left-hand rear area in theleft-hand exterior mirror: Warning segments for the left front area; Warning segments for the right front area= Operational readiness symbol for the front

area? Warning display segmentsA Operational readiness symbol for the rear

areaThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensor and the obstacle.The warning display is divided into five yellowand two red segments for each side of the vehi-cle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow indi-cator segments= andA are lit.There is a malfunction if only the red segmentsof the warning display light up .The position of the gear lever determineswhether the front and/or rear area ismonitored.

Driving systems 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Selector lever posi-tion

Monitoring

D Front area

R or N Front and rear area

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment, an intermittent warning tonesounds for approximately 2 seconds.Rseventh segment, a continuous warning tonesounds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Roll-back warningPARKTRONIC automatically monitors the areabehind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to rollbackwards without reverse gear engaged, e.g.after stopping on an uphill gradient.If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at a dis-tance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all the segmentsin the warning displays light up. A continuouswarning tone also sounds as the vehicleapproaches the obstacle and for a further2 seconds after the vehicle has come to a halt.

Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC

X Press thef button.If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indicatorlamp in the switch lights up.

Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC detects a coupled trailer if yourvehicle is equippedwith the corresponding elec-trical installations for trailer towing.PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer. If you use anadapter for the socket, remove it from thesocket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise,PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for the reararea.Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is nolonger required. PARKTRONIC measures theminimum detection range to an obstacle fromthe bumper, not the ball coupling.

150 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.In addition, a warningtone sounds for approx.two secondsPARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds.The indicator lamp of thef button lights upand the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing display go out.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

The PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays implausibledistances.For example, all the seg-ments may be lit eventhough there is no obsta-cle present.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 232).X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.

The license plate or other parts attached near the sensors may not besecured correctly.X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensors forcorrect seating.

An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interference.X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It cannotreplace your own awareness of the immediatesurroundings. You are responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and pulling away. Whenmaneuvering, parking and pulling away, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the maneuvering area.The rear view camera is a visual parking aid.Information on operation can be found in theseparate Audio 15 supplement.The camera is in themiddle of the roof above thehigh-mounted brake lamp (Y page 232).You can find information on cleaning the camerain the "Maintenance and care" section(Y page 232).

Working mode

ADR (working speed governor)

General notesWhen activated, ADR automatically increasesthe engine speed to a preset speed or a speedyou have set.

i After a cold start, the idling speed of theengine is increased automatically. If the pre-set working speed is lower than the increasedidling speed, the working speed is onlyreached once the engine has completed thewarm-up phase.It is only possible to activate ADR with thevehicle stationary and the parking brakeapplied.The selector lever of the automatic transmis-sion must be in position P.

Working mode 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching ADR on and off

X To activate: press upper section: of theE switch while the engine is running.The indicator lamp in the switch comes on.TheK indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up or the display shows the fol-lowing message: Operating speed gover‐nor active.

X To deactivate: press lower section; of theE switch while the engine is running.The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

ADR is automatically deactivated if:Ryou release the parking brake.Rthe brake pedal is depressed.Rthe vehicle moves.Rthe control unit detects a malfunction.

Setting the working speed

X Activate ADR.X To increase: press theE button.X To decrease: press theF button.

Towing a trailer

Notes on trailer towing

Important safety notes

G WARNINGInstalling an unsuitable ball coupling mayresult in overloading of the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle. This applies especially if theball coupling in question is longer or angleddifferently. This could seriously impair thedriving characteristics and the trailer cancome loose. There is a risk of an accident.You should only ever install a ball couplingthat has the permissible dimensions and thatis designed to meet your trailer-towingrequirements. Do not modify the ball couplingor the trailer tow hitch.

G WARNINGIf you use a ball coupling that is not approvedfor your vehicle, it may cause excessive strainon the trailer tow hitch. This can cause dam-age to the vehicle and the trailer may comeloose during the journey. The handlingmay beimpaired and the rear axlemay be overloaded.This may lead to an accident involving seriousor even fatal injury.Therefore note the following:ROnly install a ball coupling that is approvedfor your vehicle.RBefore the journey, make sure that the ballcoupling is correctly installed and secured.To do this, observe the operating instruc-tions of the ball coupling manufacturer.RDo not make any modifications to the ballcoupling or the trailer tow hitch.

You must observe the operating instructionsof the trailer tow hitch or ball coupling manu-facturer.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly installedand secured, it could come loose while drivingand endanger other road users. There is a riskof an accident and injury.

152 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal-lation instructions. Make sure that the ballcoupling is correctly installed and securedbefore every journey.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

Always observe the operating instructions pro-vided by the manufacturers of the trailer cou-pling and the ball coupling.Couple and decouple the trailer carefully. Whenbacking up the towing vehicle, make surenobody is standing between the vehicle and thetrailer.A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to the tow-ing vehicle could break away. A correctly cou-pled trailer must be positioned horizontallybehind the towing vehicle.Ensure that the following weights are not excee-ded:Rthe permissible noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe permissible gross weight of both the tow-ing vehicle and the trailerRthe permissible gross combination weightThe applicable permissible values that may notbe exceeded can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the type plates for the trailer tow hitchRon the type plates for the trailerRon the vehicle identification plate(Y page 272).

Where the values differ, the lowest is valid.You will find values approved by the manufac-turer on the identification plates and those forthe towing vehicle in the "Permissible trailer

loads and trailer drawbar noseweights" section(Y page 156).Your vehicle behaves differently with a trailerthan without one.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis more susceptible to strong crosswindsRrequires more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis may impair the handling characteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedto suit the road and weather conditions. Drivecarefully. Maintain a safe distance.If you require any further explanation of theinformation contained in theOperator'sManual,please contact an authorized Sprinter dealer.

General notesRObserve the legally prescribed maximumspeed for vehicle/trailer combinations in therelevant country, state or Canadian province.Before setting off, check the vehicle docu-ments of the your trailer to find out the per-missible maximum speed.This reduces the risk of accidents.RInstall only an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle. Only use a ball coupling that isapproved for your vehicle and Sprinter trailertow hitch. More information on the availabil-ity, mounting and installation of the trailerelectrics is available at any qualified specialistworkshop.RThe trailer coupling is one of the most impor-tant vehicle parts with regard to road safety.The notes on operation, care and mainte-nance issued by the manufacturer should beobserved.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitablefor installing detachable trailer couplings.RDo not attach rented trailer tow hitches orother detachable trailer tow hitches to thebumper.RMinimize the risk of damage to the ball cou-pling. If you do not require the ball coupling,remove it from the ball coupling recess.

Towing a trailer 153

Drivingandparking

Z

Weight information can be found in the “Per-missible trailer and drawbar noseweights” sec-tion (Y page 156).

i The height of the ball neck changes accord-ing to the load on the vehicle. If this is case,use a trailer with a height-adjustable trailerdrawbar.

Driving tipsThe maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combination depends on the type oftrailer. Before setting off, check the vehicledocuments of the your trailer to find out thepermissible maximum speed. Observe thelegally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the relevant country,state or Canadian province.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparison towhen driving without a trailer and it will con-sume more fuel.On long, steep downhill slopes you must selectshift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time.

i This also applies if cruise control is activa-ted.

This enables you to utilize the engine's brakingeffect and you do not need to brake so heavily tokeep the correct speed. which protects thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating andwearing too quickly. If you needto brake additionally, to not depress the brakepedal constantly, but periodically.

Driving tipsIf the trailer begins to swing from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.i You can reduce the risk of the trailer swing-ing and rocking by retrofitting anti-roll bars ortrailer stability programs. More information isavailable from your authorized SprinterDealer.

RMaintain a greater distance than you wouldwhen driving without towing a trailer.RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes gen-tly at first to allow the trailer brake to overrun.Then, increase the brake force quickly.RThe figures for the gradient climbing capabil-ities from a standstill refer to sea level. Whendriving in mountainous areas, note that thepower output of the engine, and with it itsgradient climbing capability, decrease withincreasing altitude.

Coupling up a trailer

Trailer coupled ready for useX Make sure the selector lever of the automatictransmission is in position P.

X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.X Close all doors.X Position the trailer horizontally behind yourvehicle.i The height of the ball neck changes accord-ing to the load on the vehicle. In this case, usea trailer with a height-adjustable trailer draw-bar.

X Couple the trailer.X Establish all electrical and other connectionsto the trailer. When doing so, hook the break-away cable of the trailer into eyelet: on theball coupling.

X Remove the objects that are preventing thetrailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks.

X Release the trailer parking brake.

i The subharness of the vehicle has a cableconnection to the brake lamp indicator lamp.

Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).

154 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Most federal states and all Canadian provincesrequire by law:Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle andthe trailer. The chains should be cross-woundunder the trailer drawbar. They must be fas-tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not tothe bumper or the axle.Leave enough slack in the chains. This allowsyou to drive round tight corners.Ra separate brake system for certain types oftrailer.Ra safety shut-off for braked trailers. Find outthe specific requirements according to theapplicable laws.If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-ing vehicle, the safety feature applies thetrailer brakes.

Towing a trailerThere are numerous legal requirements con-cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restric-tions.Many states require a separate functional brak-ing system for your trailer once a certain weightlimit is exceeded. For your safety, it is recom-mended to use a separate functional brakingsystem on any towed vehicle.Make sure your vehicle/trailer combinationcomplies with local laws. This not only meanswhere you live, but also anywhere you are driv-ing to. Information is available from the policeand local authorities.Observe the following when towing a trailer:RPractice driving around bends, stopping andbacking up at a place where there is no traffic.This enables you to gain experience and getused to the new handling characteristics.RBefore driving, check:

- that the trailer tow hitch and ball couplingare secure

- that the safety switch for a braked trailer isfunctioning properly

- that the safety chains are secure and notdamaged

- that the electrical connections are secure- that the lights are working- that the wheels are in good order and thetire pressure is correct

RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide anunobstructed view of the rear section of thetrailer.RIf the trailer is equipped with an individualbraking system, check before each journeywhether the brakes are functioning correctly.RIf the trailer has electronically controlledbrakes, pull the vehicle/trailer combinationaway carefully. Brake manually using thebrake controller and check that the brakesare working.RSecure the load on the trailer according to theapplicable specifications and current stand-ards on securing loads (Y page 210).RWhen driving with a trailer, check at regularintervals that the load is secured and that thebrakes and lights are working.RBear in mind that the handling will be lessstable when towing a trailer thanwhen drivingwithout one. Avoid sudden steering move-ments.RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,accelerates more slowly and has a decreasedgradient climbing capability and a longerbraking distance.It is more susceptible to crosswinds andrequires cautious steering.RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but rathermoderately at first so that the trailer can acti-vate its brakes. Then increase the force on thebrake pedal.RIf the automatic transmission repeatedlyshifts between gearswhen driving on inclines,restrict the shift range. Select shift range4,3,2 or 1.Driving in a low gear and at a low speedreduces the risk of damaging the engine.RWhen driving on a downhill gradient, shift to alow gear and take advantage of the engine'sbraking effect.Avoid continuous brake application as thismay overheat the vehicle brakes and, if instal-led, the trailer brakes.RIf the coolant temperature increases dramat-ically while the air-conditioning system isswitched on, switch off the air-conditioningsystem.Coolant heat can also be dissipated byswitching the airflow and the temperature of

Towing a trailer 155

Drivingandparking

Z

the heater/air conditioning to the maximumlevel. Open the windows if necessary.RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention tothe extended length of your vehicle/trailercombination.Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer com-bination you need an additional distancebefore you can return to your original lane.

Uncoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle couldbe damaged by the rebounding of the overrunbrake.

X Make sure the selector lever of the automatictransmission is in position P.

X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle.X Close all doors.X Apply the parking brake of the trailer.X In addition, secure the trailer against rollingaway with a wheel chock or similar object.

X Remove the trailer cable and safety chainsand decouple the trailer.

Permissible trailer loads and trailerdrawbar noseweights

Weight information! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicleweight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissi-ble gross combination weight is less than thetotal of the permissible gross vehicle weightand the permissible trailer load. Exceedingthe permissible gross combinationweight canlead to damage to the drivetrain, to the trans-mission or to the trailer tow hitch.If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, therelevant value for the permissible gross vehi-cle weight or the permissible trailer load is

therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or thevehicle may only be partially loaded.

The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated byadding the weight of the trailer to the weight ofthe load and equipment. If the trailer is equippedwith a separate functional braking system, thenthe maximum gross trailer weight is 5000 lbs(2268 kg) or 7500 lbs (3402 kg).

G WARNINGIf you tow a trailer without a separate func-tional braking system and a gross trailerweight (GTW) of more than 1635 lbs (750 kg),then the vehicle brake system may overheat.This increases the braking distance and thebrake system may even fail. There is anincreased risk of accident and injury, possiblyeven fatal.Always use a trailer with a separate functionalbraking system when towing a trailer with agross trailer weight (GTW) of more than1635 lbs (750 kg).

The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-weight on the ball coupling is 500 lbs (227 kg) or750 lbs (340 kg). The actual noseweightmay notexceed the value given on the identificationplates of the trailer tow hitch or the trailer. If thevalues vary, the lowest value always applies.The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) iscalculated by adding the gross weight of thetrailer to the gross vehicle weight including adriver's weight of approximately 150 lbs (68 kg).The maximum permissible gross combinationweight is vehicle-specific and equipment-dependent.When driving with a trailer, you should notexceed the maximum permitted gross combi-nation weight rating (GCWR).The permissible values, which must not beexceeded, can be found in your vehicle docu-ments and on the trailer tow hitch type plates forthe trailer and the vehicle (Y page 272). Thebasic values approved by the manufacturer canalso be found in the "Technical data" section(Y page 282). If the values vary, the lowestvalue always applies.

156 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

Loading a trailer! Utilize the maximum permissible nose-weight as fully as possible. Do not allow theweight to fall below the minimum permissiblenoseweight, otherwise the trailer may comeloose.RThe load must be distributed over the vehicleand the trailer so as not to exceed either themaximum permissible values for the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) and gross trailerweight (GTW), the gross combination weightrating (GCWR), nor the maximum permissiblegross axle weight rating (GAWR) and trailerdrawbar noseweight rating of your vehicle.RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball cou-pling (TWR) to the rear axle load. This will pre-vent you from exceeding the permissiblegross axle weight (GAWR).RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball cou-pling (TWR) to the vehicle payload. This willensure that you do not exceed the permissi-ble gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRMake sure the weights of the towing vehicleand the trailer comply with the maximum per-missible values. Have the vehicle/trailer com-bination weighed on a calibrated weigh-bridge. The vehicle/trailer combination con-sists of the towing vehicle including the driver,passengers and load, as well as the loadedtrailer.RCheck the maximum permissible gross axleweight rating of the front and rear axles(GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), thegross combination weight rating (GCWR) andthe noseweight of the trailer drawbar (TWR).

Trailer power supply! Incorrect wiring of the connector plug could,under certain circumstances, cause malfunc-tions in the vehicle's other electronic sys-tems. We therefore recommend having theconnector plug wired at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! You can connect accessories with a maxi-mum power consumption of 240 W to thepermanent power supply.

Youmust not charge a trailer battery using thepower supply.

Your vehicle may be equipped with various elec-trical installations for trailer towing. Dependingon your trailer, you may need an adapter to con-nect the electrical system of the trailer with thatof the vehicle.The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped atthe factory with a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is on the trailersocket pin assignment 4.Note that the permanent power supply of thetrailer is not switched off when the on-boardvoltage is low. This can completely dischargethe starter battery of your vehicle.Further information on the electrical equipmentcurrently installed on your vehicle and on instal-ling trailer electrics can be obtained at any quali-fied specialist workshop.

Towing a trailer 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you are driving and reach through the steer-ing wheel to operate the adjustment knob,you could lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Only operate the adjustment knobs when thevehicle is stationary. Do not reach through thesteering wheel when driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.The on-board computer display only showsmes-sages and warnings from certain systems. Youshould thereforemake sure your vehicle is oper-ating safely at all times. If the operating safety ofyour vehicle is impaired, stop the vehicle assoon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions. Then consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Instrument cluster

Overview

: Instrument cluster on vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons

; Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

= Adjustment buttonsf andg? Reset button9A Service button Ë (engine oil level check)B Menu button4You will find a full overview of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 33).The display in the instrument cluster is activatedwhen you:Ropen the driver's doorRturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lockRpress the9 reset buttonRswitch on the lights

158 Instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

The display switches off automatically afterapproximately 30 seconds if:Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock.Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on.

Instrument lightingWhen the lights are switched on, you can adjustthe brightness of the instrument cluster lightingusing thef andg buttons.X To brighten: press thef button.X To dim: press theg button.

i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode:the instrument lighting also adapts to auto-matic headlamp mode.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

H Environmental noteAvoid driving at high engine speeds. Thisunnecessarily increases the fuel consumptionof your vehicle and harms the environment asa result of increased emissions.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.To protect the engine, the fuel supply is inter-rupted when the red band is reached.

Outside temperatureYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around the freez-ing point.On vehicles without steering wheel buttons(Y page 160) and on vehicles with steeringwheel buttons (Y page 164), the outside tem-perature display is in the display.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

SpeedometerThe speed can also be shown in the display. Youcan find information on the digital speedometer

for vehicles without steering wheel buttonsunder (Y page 160) and for vehicles with steer-ing wheel buttons under (Y page 164).

i In some countries, a warning sounds whenthe vehicle reaches themaximum speed limit,e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h).

Trip odometerX To reset:make sure that the display is show-ing the trip odometer if you have a vehiclewithsteering wheel buttons (Y page 164).

X Press and hold the9 reset button until thetrip odometer is reset to 0.0.

Fuel gauge

: Fuel gage on vehicles without steeringwheel buttons

; Fuel gage on vehicles with steering wheelbuttons

= Fuel filler flap location indicatort: thefuel filler flap is on the left-hand side. Fuelfiller flap location indicatoru: the fuelfiller flap is on the right-hand side

? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 196)

DEF gauge

Vehicles without steering wheel but-tonsIf the DEF supply is less than 1.5 US gal (5.5 l),the dEF Chk message appears in the display.In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warningtone sounds.

Instrument cluster 159

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve rangeof 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) the StArtS RExx messageappears in the display. Also, the yellowåDEF indicator lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster and three warning tones sound.In the display, xx corresponds to the number ofpossible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ).When the display shows that the number ofremaining starts is 0, the StArtS IdLEmessageappears in the display and three warning tonessound.In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lampand the; Check Engine indicator lamp lightup in the instrument cluster and three warningtones sound.The engine management only allows speeds ofup to 5 mph (8 km/h).Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF(Y page 126).The display message only disappears when thevehicle is stationary, at the latest after20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the igni-tion or start the engine after refueling.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsIf the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal(5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust FluidSee Operator's Manual message appears inthe display.If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve rangeof 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the XX starts remainingmessage is displayed.Three short warning tones also sound.In the display, xx corresponds to the number ofpossible remaining engine starts (16 to 0 ).When the display shows that the number ofremaining starts is 0, the StArtS IdLEmessageappears in the display.The yellow; Check Engine indicator lampalso lights up and three short warning tonessound.The engine management only allows speeds ofup to 5 mph (8 km/h).Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF(Y page 126).The display message only disappears when thevehicle is stationary, at the latest after20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the igni-tion or start the engine after refueling.

On-board computer (vehicles withoutsteering wheel buttons)

Operating the on-board computer

General notesThe on-board computer is activated as soon asyou turn the key to position1 in the ignition lock.The on-board computer shows vehicle informa-tion and settings in the display.You can control the display and the settings inthe on-board computer using the adjustmentbuttons on the instrument cluster.

Standard display

: Odometer; Trip odometer= Clock? Outside temperature or digital speedometerA Fuel gage (Y page 159)B Selector lever position or current shift range

with automatic transmission (Y page 121)X To call up the standarddisplay: turn the keyto position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the4 menu button for longer than1 second.The information shown in the display changesfrom the outside temperature to the digitalspeedometer.

Menus in the on-board computer

OverviewIf you wish to exit a menu and go to the standarddisplay:X Press the4 menu button for longer than1 second.

orX Do not press any button for 10 seconds.The display accepts the changed settings.

160 On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Using thef,g,4 or9 adjustment buttons,you can select the following functions:RCalling up the service due date(Y page 222)RChecking the oil level (Y page 216)RChecking the DEF supply (Y page 159)RPreselecting/setting the auxiliary heatingswitch-on time (Y page 107)RTire pressure monitor(Y page 249)RSetting the time (Y page 161)RActivating/deactivating Highbeam Assist(Y page 168)RSetting the daytime running lamps(Y page 80)

Setting the timeX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4menu button repeatedly until thehours figure flashes.

X Press thef org button to set the hour.X Press the9 reset button.The minute display flashes.

X Press thef org button to set the minute.

i If you keep thef org button pressed, thevalue will change continuously.

Activating/deactivating HighbeamAssistX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4menu button repeatedly until the_ indicator lamp flashes and the on or OFFmessage appears in the display.

X Use thef org button to switch HighbeamAssist on/off.

Switching the daytime running lampson/offIf you switch the daytime running lamps on, thedaytime running lamps will automatically lightup when the engine is running.For safety reasons, it is only possible to changethis setting when the vehicle is stationary. Thefactory setting is on in countries where daytimerunning lamp mode or daytime running lampsare mandatory.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the4menu button repeatedly until theL indicator lamp flashes and the on or OFFmessage appears in the display.

X Press thef org button to activate or deac-tivate the daytime running lamps.

i USA only:If you turn the light switch to T or L,the corresponding light switches on. If youturn the light switch toÃ, the daytimerunning lamps remain switched on.Canada only:If you turn the light switch to L, the low-beam headlamps switch on. If you turn thelight switch to T orÃ, the daytime run-ning lamps remain switched on.

On-board computer (vehicles withsteering wheel buttons)

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

X To activate the on-board computer: turnthe key to position 1 in the ignition lock.

The on-board computer shows vehicle informa-tion and settings in the display.You can control the display and the settings inthe on-board computer with the buttons on thesteering wheel.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 161

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

: Display

On-board computer operation

; W andX

RSelects submenusRChanges valuesRAdjusts the volumeUsing the telephone6 Accepts a call~ Ends a call

= Scrolls from one menu to anotherV ForwardsU BackScrolls within a menu9 Forwards: Back

ControlsYou can think of the order of the menus and ofthe functions within a menu as a circle:X Press theV orU button repeatedly.The menus are displayed one after the other.

X Press the: or9 button repeatedly.The functions in the menu or submenu aredisplayed successively.

Several functions are combined thematically inthe menus.The display changes when you press one of thebuttons on the steering wheel. You can use afunction to call up information or to change thesettings for the vehicle.For example, theAUDIOmenu has functions forcontrolling the radio or CD player.Unlike in other menus, you will find submenus inthe Settings menu. For information on how touse these submenus, see the "Settings menu"section (Y page 165).The number ofmenus depends on your vehicle'sequipment.

i Operation of the audio equipment using thesteering wheel buttons and making settingsusing the AUDIO menu only function withSprinter audio equipment. If you are usingaudio equipment from another manufacturer,the described functions may be restricted ornot available at all.

162 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Menu overview

Diagrams

This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus.

Generic termsThe illustration shows the menus on a vehiclewith Audio 15.On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-board computeralways shows the AUDIO and TEL (telephone)menus in English. This is the case even if a dif-ferent language is selected for the display.

Operation

: Operation menu (Y page 163)RStandard displayRCalling up the service due date(Y page 222)RTire pressure monitor (Y page 249)RChecking the engine oil level(Y page 216)

; Audio menu (Y page 164)

= Message memory menu (Y page 173)

? Settings menu (Y page 165)

A Trip computer menu (Y page 171)

B Telephone menu (Y page 172)

i The generic terms in the tabular overviewshould make orientation easier for you. How-ever, they are not always shown on the dis-play.

Operation menu

OverviewYou can select the following functions in theOperation menu by pressing the9 or:button on the steering wheel:RDisplaying the trip odometer and odometer(standard display) (Y page 164)RDisplaying the coolant temperature(Y page 164)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 222)RTire pressure monitor (Y page 249)RChecking the oil level (Y page 216)

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 163

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Standard display

: Odometer; Trip odometer= Outside temperature or digital speedometer? ClockA Selector lever position or current shift range

(Y page 121)In the basic setting, the odometer and the tripodometer are shown in the upper part of thedisplay. This is referred to as the standard dis-play.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the standard display is shown.

Displaying the coolant temperature

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the standard display is shown.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecoolant temperature.

The temperature displayed may climb to 250 ‡(120 †) when the vehicle is being driven in nor-mal conditions and if the coolant contains thecorrect concentration of corrosion inhibitor andantifreeze. At high outside temperatures andwhen driving inmountainous terrain, the coolanttemperature may rise to the end of the scale.

Audio menu

General notesUse the functions in the Audiomenu to operatethe audio equipment when switched on.

i Operation of the audio equipment using thesteering wheel buttons and making settingsusing the AUDIO menu only function withSprinter audio equipment. If you are usingaudio equipment from another manufacturer,the described functions may be restricted ornot available at all.

If no audio equipment is switched on, you willsee the message AUDIO off.Selecting a radio station

: Reception frequency; Waveband orwavebandwithmemory preset

numberUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the audio equipment (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the station selected appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired station.

i You can only store new stations on the audiosystem itself. See the separate operatinginstructions.You can also operate the audio equipment inthe same way as usual.

164 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Operating the CD player

: Current CD (with CD changer); Current trackUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Switch on the audio equipment and select theCDplayer (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

X Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the settings for the current CD appear inthe display.

X Press the9 or: button to select a CDtrack.

Settings menu

IntroductionIn the Settingsmenu, the following options andsubmenus are available:RResetting all settingsRResetting the functions of a submenuRInstrument cluster (Y page 166)

- Units and language settings- Status bar settingsRTime(Y page 168)RLighting (Y page 168)

- Switching surround lighting on/off- Switching the daytime running lampson/off

- Setting the exterior lighting delayed switch-off

- Activating/deactivating Highbeam AssistRVehicle

- Setting the radio station selection- Setting the windshield wiper sensitivityRStationary heating or auxiliary heating(Y page 107)RConvenience (Y page 170)

- Key-dependent settings

i For safety reasons, it is not possible to resetall of the functions while the vehicle is inmotion. For example, in the Lighting sub-menu, the Daytime runn. lamps functionremains unchanged.

Resetting all settings

Settings menuWhen the Settings message is displayed, youcan reset all functions of the submenu to thefactory settings.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press and hold the9 reset button for approx-imately 3 seconds.You will see a message in the display prompt-ing you to press the9 reset button again toconfirm.

X Press the9 reset button again.The functions in all submenus are reset to thefactory settings.

i If you want to retain the settings, do notpress the9 reset button a second time. TheSettings menu appears again after approx-imately 5 seconds.

Resetting the functions of a submenuYou can individually reset the functions of eachsubmenu to the factory settings.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select asubmenu.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 165

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press and hold the9 reset button for approx-imately 3 seconds.You will see a message in the display prompt-ing you to press the9 reset button again toconfirm.

X Press the9 reset button again.All functions in the submenu are reset to thefactory settings.

i If you want to retain the settings, do notpress the9 reset button a second time. TheSettings menu appears again after approx-imately 5 seconds.

Selecting submenus

You will see the collection of submenus. Therearemore submenus than can be displayed at thesame time.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select asubmenu.The submenu currently selected is highligh-ted.

X Press the9 button to select the functionwithin a submenu.

X Change the setting by pressing theW orX button.The changed setting is saved.

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit for temperature

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. cluster submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Tem‐perat. function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for all messages in the display: °C(degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahrenheit).

Selecting the unit for the digital speed-ometer

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. cluster submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Dig.speedo. function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for the digital speedometer: km/h ormph .

166 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Selecting the unit for distance

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. cluster submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Tripfunction.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for all messages in the display: km (kilo-meters) or miles .

Selecting the language

The selected range of languages shown is justan example. The range of languages available isspecific to each country.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. cluster submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Languagefunction.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to set the lan-guage for all messages.

Selecting the display for the status bar

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. cluster submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Selectdisp. function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to selectwhether to display the outside temperature orthe speed (digital speedometer).The selected display is then shown perma-nently in the lower part of the display.

Selecting the unit for the tire pressure

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theInst. cluster submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Tirepres. function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to select theunit for the tire pressure in the display: baror psi.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 167

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Clock/Date submenu

Setting the time

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theClock/Date submenu.X Press the9 button to select Set clockHours or Minutes .X Press theW orX button to set the val-ues.

Selecting the time format

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theClock/Date submenu.X Press the9 button to select the 12/24 hfunction.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to select the12 h or 24 h clock format.

Lighting submenu

Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLighting submenu.X Press the9 button to select the High‐beam Assist function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to switchHighbeam Assist On or Off .i For safety reasons, it is not possible to resetthe Highbeam Assist function to the factorysettings during a journey. You will see the fol-lowing message in the display: Settingonly possible at standstill.

For further information about Highbeam Assist,see (Y page 84).

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off

If you switch the daytime running lamps functionto On, the daytime running lamps will automati-cally light up when the engine is running.For safety reasons, it is only possible to changethis setting when the vehicle is stationary. Thefactory setting is On in countries in which day-time running lamp mode or daytime runninglamps are mandatory .

168 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLighting submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Daytimerunn. lamps function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to switch thedaytime running lamps On or Off.i If you turn the light switch to T or L,the corresponding lamp switches on. If youturn the light switch toÃ, the daytimerunning lamps remain switched on.

i For safety reasons, it is not possible to resetthe Daytime runn. lamps function to thefactory setting while the vehicle is in motion.You will see the following message in the dis-play: Setting only possible at stand‐still.

Switching surround lighting on or off

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLighting submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Loc.lighting function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to switch thesurround lighting On or Off .

If you switch the surround lighting to On, the fol-lowing lamps light up in the dark after you haveunlocked the vehicle using the key:

Rthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampsRthe fog lampsThe surround lighting automatically switches offafter 40 seconds or if you:Ropen the driver's doorRinsert the key into the ignition lockRlock the vehicle using the key

Setting the exterior lighting delayedswitch-off

In the Headlamps submenu, you can setwhether and for how long you wish the exteriorlighting to remain on after closing the doors.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theLighting submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Head‐lamps function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to selectwhether and for how long you wish the exte-rior lighting to remain on.

If you have set the delayed switch-off and switchoff the engine, the following remain lit:Rthe parking lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampsRthe fog lamps

i You can reactivate this function by openinga door within 10 minutes.If, after switching off the engine, you do notopen a door or you close an open door, theexterior lighting switches off after60 seconds.

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 169

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle submenu

Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity

You can use the Wipe sensor function to setthe sensitivity of the rain/ light sensor.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theVehicle submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Wipesensor function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to adjust thesensitivity of the rain/light sensor.

The levels are graded as follows:RLevel 1: high sensitivity –wiping begins evenin light rainRLevel 2: moderate sensitivityRLevel 3: low sensitivity – wiping only beginsin heavy rain

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press the9 button to select the BlindSpot Assist function.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to switch BlindSpot Assist On or Off .

For further information about Blind Spot Assist;see (Y page 141).

Heating submenu

Selecting the switch-on time for the aux-iliary heating

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theHeating submenu.X Press the9 button to switch to the Aux.heat. submenu selection (Y page 107).The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to set thedesired switch-on time.Use the Timer off setting to deactivateautomatic switch-on.

X Press buttonV.The switch-on time is selected.

Convenience submenu

The Key function allows you to define whethersettings for some submenus are stored with akey dependence.

170 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

This function pertains to the Inst. cluster(instrument cluster) menu, the Lighting menuand the Vehicle menu.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the Settings menu appears in the dis-play.

X Press the9 button to switch to the sub-menu selection.

X Press theW orX button to select theConvenience submenu.X Press the9 button to select the Key func-tion.The selectionmarker is on the current setting.

X Press theW orX button to activate ordeactivate key dependency.

Trip computer menu

General notesYou can call up or reset statistical data for thevehicle in the Trip computer menu.

i When you call up the trip computer again, itdisplays the last function called up.The units of the statistical information dis-played are set permanently for each specificcountry, and are therefore independent of theunits selected in the Settings menu.

Trip computer "After start" or "Afterreset"

Example: "After start" trip computer: Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumption

Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button to selectAfter start.orX Press the9 or: button to selectAfter reset.The values in theAfter start submenu refer tothe start of the journey. The values in the Afterreset submenu refer to the last reset of the tripcomputer.The After start trip computer function isautomatically reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan 4 hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The After reset trip computer is automaticallyreset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

i If you turn the key to position 0 in the igni-tion lock or remove it, all the values are resetafter approximately four hours.The values will not be reset if you turn the keyback to position 1 or 2 during this time.

Calling up the rangeUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button to selectAfter start.X Press the9 or: button to selectRange.The approximate distance which can be cov-ered with the tank's current contents andyour current style of driving is shown.

i If there is only a small amount of fuel left inthe fuel tank, the7 Please refuelmes-sage is shown instead of the range.

Resetting the trip computerUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button to selectAfter start.X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction you would like to reset.

X Press and hold the9 reset button until thevalues are reset to "0".

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 171

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements of thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating a mobile phone in the vehicle. If it ispermitted to operate a mobile phone while thevehicle is in motion, only operate it when roadand traffic conditions permit.If you have connected a mobile phone to theSprinter hands-free system, you can operate itusing the functions in the TEL menu.X Switch on themobile phone (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Switch on the audio equipment (see the sep-arate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection betweenthe mobile phone and the audio equipment(see the separate operating instructions).

X Press theV orUbutton on the steeringwheel to select the TEL menu.

X When Please enter PIN: appears in thedisplay, enter the PIN using the mobile phoneor audio equipment.The mobile phone will search for a network.The display remains blank during this time.You will see the mobile phone operationalreadiness display once the mobile phone hasfound a network.

i You can obtain further information aboutsuitable mobile phones and connectingmobile phones via Bluetooth® at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i If the mobile phone operational readinesssymbol goes out, your vehicle is outside of thetransmission and reception range.

Accepting a callX Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.The display shows the call duration.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press~ button on the steering wheel toreject or end a call.The caller then hears the engaged tone.The display shows the mobile phone opera-tional readiness symbol again.

Dialing a number from the phone bookYou can enter new telephone numbers into thephone book via the mobile phone (see the sep-arate operating instructions). If your mobilephone is able to receive calls, you can search forand dial a number from the phone book.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Use theV orU button to select the TELmenu.The display shows the mobile phone opera-tional readiness symbol.

X Press the9 or: button to switch tothe phone book.The on-board computer reads the phone bookstored on the SIMcard or in themobile phone.This may take more than a minute.When the message is no longer displayed,reading has ended.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold the9 or: button longer than 1 second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

Using the steering wheel buttonsX To start dialing: press the6 button.The on-board computer dials the correspond-ing phone number.When a connection is established, the nameof the other person and/or the call durationappear in the display.

X To exit the phone book: press the~ but-ton.

172 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)On

-board

computerand

displays

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Use theV orU button to select the TELmenu.The display shows the mobile phone opera-tional readiness symbol.

X Press the6 button.The display shows the most recently dialednumbers or names in the redial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X To start dialing: press the6 button.The on-board computer dials the correspond-ing phone number.When a connection is established, the nameof the other person and/or the call durationappear in the display.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~button.

Display messages

Notes on display messages

Important safety notes

G WARNINGNo information will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the display is inopera-tive.As a result, you will not be able to see warningand indicator lamps or information about thedriving conditions, such as speed or outsidetemperature. Driving characteristics may beimpaired. Adjust your driving style and vehiclespeed accordingly.Contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

G WARNINGIf service work is not carried out correctly, theoperating safety of your vehicle may be affec-ted. This could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and cause an accident. More-

over, the safety systems may no longer beable to protect you or others as they aredesigned to do.Always have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

i If you turn the key to position 2 in the igni-tion, a display check is performed. All warningand indicator lamps (except the turn signalindicator lamps) and the display are activa-ted. Before starting the journey, check thatthewarning and indicator lamps are operatingcorrectly.

Vehicles without steering wheel but-tonsWarnings, malfunctions or additional informa-tion may also be shown in the display. The fol-lowing tables show all the display messages. Awarning tone sounds with certain display mes-sages.

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsThe on-board computer shows warnings, mal-functions or additional information in the dis-play. A warning tone sounds with certain displaymessages. Display messages of a high priorityare shown in red.Please respond in accordance with the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.You can hide low-priority display messages bypressing theV,U,9 or: buttonon the steering wheel or the9 reset button.You cannot hide displaymessages of the highestpriority. These messages will continue to beshown in the display until their cause has beeneliminated.The on-board computer stores certain displaymessages in the message memory(Y page 173).

Message memoryThe on-board computer only records and showsmalfunctions and warnings from certain sys-tems. Therefore, make sure that your vehicle issafe to use. You could otherwise cause an acci-dent by driving an unsafe vehicle.

Display messages 173

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

The on-board computer stores certain displaymessages. In theMessagememorymenu, youcan call up stored display messages.Using the steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the number of stored display messages,e.g. 2 messages, appears in the display.If no malfunctions have occurred, the Nomessages message appears.

X Scroll through the stored display messageswith the9 or: button.

X To exit the message memory menu: presstheV orU button.

When you switch off the ignition, all displaymes-sages are deleted from the message memory.You can only remove the key when it is in thebasic position.

Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

_ _ _V

The activation conditions for cruise control have not been met.You can only activate cruise control from speeds of 20 mph(30 km/h).or

Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

NO TPMS The NOmessage is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMSmessage is alsodisplayed after 30 seconds.The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

NO TPMS The NOmessage is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMSmessage is alsodisplayed after 30 seconds.The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or morewheels because:Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheelelectronics.Rthemaximum temperature on one of thewheel electronics units hasbeen exceeded.Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

— — TPMS The — — message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message isalso displayed after 30 seconds.The pressure is insufficient in one ormore tires, or the pressures of theindividual tires differ significantly.X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 249).

174 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

dEF Chk In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lamp lights up in the instru-ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).X Add DEF supply (Y page 126).Theå DEF indicator lamp only disappears when the vehicle isstationary, at the latest after 20 seconds as soon as you switch onthe ignition or start the engine after refueling.

In addition, the yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp and the yel-lowå DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and awarning tone sounds.The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliantwith ISO 22241.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as possible.

StArtS RExx In addition, the yellowåDEF indicator lamp lights up and awarningtone sequence sounds.The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reservemark.After themessage appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supplywill last for approximately 1200miles (1900 km). The engine can thenonly be started another 16 times.The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 to 1) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started.X Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF (Y page 126).Theå DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched onthe ignition or started the engine after refueling.

In addition, the yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp and the yel-lowå DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster andthree short warning tones sound.The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliantwith ISO 22241.The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

¯StArtS IdLE

In addition, the yellowå DEF indicator lamp and the; CheckEngine indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and threewarning tones sound.If the StArtS IdLEmessage is displayed, you cannot drive the vehicleat a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).X Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF (Y page 126).Theå DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched onthe ignition or started the engine after refueling.

Display messages 175

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

In addition, the yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp and the yel-lowå DEF indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster and awarning tone sounds.You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Err flashes for 5 seconds, in addition theà indicator lamp flashes inthe instrument cluster and then lights up yellow continuously.Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:RThere are no lane markings present.RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow orfog.RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:

- It is too dark.- The lanemarkings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt orsnow.

RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 127).X Clean the windshield (Y page 231), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If theà indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is opera-tional again.If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Err flashes for 5 seconds, the _ indicator lamp also flashes and thengoes out.Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily not operational orHighbeam Assist is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow orfog.RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 127).X Clean the windshield (Y page 231), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If the _ indicator lamp goes out, Highbeam Assist is operationalagain.If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

176 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Blind_ Err flashes for 5 seconds, the yellow indicator lamps flash in the exteriormirrors and then light up constantly.Blind Spot Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Err flashes for 5 seconds, theÄ indicator lamp also flashes and thenlights up constantly.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 177

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ABSVisit workshop

ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR and BAS,as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as a result.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The brak-ing distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The drivenwheels can spin when accelerating.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ABSUnavailable

ABS is temporarily unavailable or is deactivated due to undervoltage.ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable asa result.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The brak-ing distance can increase in emergency braking situations. The drivenwheels can spin when accelerating.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive for a short distance at a speed of more than 13 mph(20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

178 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

:Visit workshop

ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The engine power output may be reduced.

G WARNINGThe driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

:Visit workshop

BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without elec-tronic support.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

:Unavailable

ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

#Brake wear Visitworkshop

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 179

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bBrake fluid Visitworkshop

There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir(Y page 219).

If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark:X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake fluid is above the MIN mark:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

bBrake force distri‐bution

EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The brakingdistance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

bBrake force distri‐bution Visit work‐shop

EBD has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The brakingdistance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

180 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ESPVisit workshop

ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. As a result, cruisecontrol has also been deactivated.Engine power output may be reduced.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ESPUnavailable

ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. As a result, cruisecontrol has also been deactivated.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.

cParking brakeRelease brake

Additionally, a warning tone sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake (Y page 128).

7Seatbelt sys. Visitworkshop

The belt system has malfunctioned.

G WARNINGIn the event of an accident or a rapid deceleration, the seat belts eithercannot protect you as intended.There is a risk of injury.X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.

6Restraint systemVisit workshop

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual systems could betriggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the event ofan accident.There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 181

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bLow beam left

The left-hand low beam is faulty3.X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 88).

X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

bLow beam right

The right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty3.X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible(Y page 88).

X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

bCornering lt. left

The left-hand cornering light is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 88).

bCornering lt. right

The right-hand cornering light is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 88).

bLights on auto‐matic. Remove key

The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in theà position and you have forgotten to remove the key.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

bTurn signal left

The left-hand turn signal is faulty.X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 89) or rear(Y page 90) indicator lamp.

bTurn signal right

The right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 89) or rear(Y page 90) indicator lamp.

bBrake lamp left

The left brake lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).

bBrake lamp right

The right brake lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).

bThird brake lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty3. This displaymessagewill onlyappear if all LEDs have failed.X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.

bHigh beam left

The left high-beam headlamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 88).

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turnsignals.

182 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

bHigh beam right

The right high beam headlamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 88).

bLicense plate lamp

A license plate lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 91).

bSwitch off lights

You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving the vehicle.X Turn the light switch to$.

bFoglamp front left

The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty.3

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

bFoglamp front right

The right-hand front fog lamp is faulty3.X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

bRear foglamp

The rear fog lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).

bParking lamp frontleft

The front left parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 88).

bParking lamp frontright

The front right parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 88).

bReverse lamp

A backup lamp is faulty3.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).

bTail lamp left

The left-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).

bTail lamp right

The right-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 90).

bMarker lamp

A perimeter lamp is faulty.3

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 92).

3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turnsignals.

Display messages 183

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Highbeam Assistinoperative Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Highbeam Assist tem‐porarily unavaila‐bleHighbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow orfog.RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 127).X Clean the windshield (Y page 231), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If the malfunction has been rectified, the Highbeam Assistavailable again message appears.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check DieselExhaust Fluid SeeOperator's ManualThe DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).X Add DEF supply (Y page 126).The displaymessage only disappearswhen the vehicle is stationary,at the latest after 20 seconds, as soon as you switch on the ignitionor start the engine after refueling.

åXX starts remaining

Three short warning tones also sound.After themessage appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supplywill last for approximately 1200miles (1900 km). The engine can thenonly be started another 16 times.The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started.X Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF (Y page 126).

åIdle Mode

The yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp also lights up and threeshort warning tones sound.You cannot drive the vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).X Add at least 1.5 US gal (5.5 l) of DEF (Y page 126).The display message and the yellow; Check Engine indicatorlamp only disappear when the vehicle is stationary, at the latestafter 20 seconds as soon as you switch on the ignition or start theengine after refueling.

Check DieselExhaust Fluid SeeOperator's ManualIn addition, the yellow;DEF indicator lamp lights up and awarningtone sounds.The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliantwith ISO 22241.X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as possible.

184 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

åXX starts remaining

The yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp also lights up and threeshort warning tones sound.After themessage appears for the first time, the remaining DEF supplywill last for approximately 1200miles (1900 km). The engine can thenonly be started another 16 times.The number of remaining engine starts xx (16 to 0) is shown in themessage every time the engine is started.

The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compliantwith ISO 22241.The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

åIdle Mode

The yellow; Check Engine indicator lamp also lights up and threeshort warning tones sound.The vehicle cannot be driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

?Coolant Stop, turnengine off

The coolant temperature is too high.If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, thecoolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is switched onor the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving inmountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message con-tinues to be shown.

*Check coolant level

The coolant level is too low.Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine couldoverheat and be damaged.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes(Y page 280).

X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

7Reserve fuel Driveto a gas station

The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 124).

:Water in fuel Visitworkshop

The water that has collected in the water separator has reached themaximum level.X Drain the water separator (Y page 220).

Display messages 185

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

mFuel filter Visitworkshop

The fuel filter is dirty.X Have the fuel filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

4Engine oil Add 1.0quart (Canada: 1.0liter)

The oil level is too low.X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 216), and addoil.

4Engine oil levelNot when eng. run‐ning

You want to check the engine oil level even though the engine is stillrunning.X Switch off the engine.X Check the oil level (Y page 216).

4Engine oil levelReduce oil level

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging theengine or catalytic converter.X Check the oil level (Y page 216).X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted at the nextqualified specialist workshop.

X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified at the nextqualified specialist workshop.

4Engine oil levelStop, turn engineoff

There is not enough or no oil in the engine. There is a danger of enginedamage.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 217).X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectifiedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

4Oil sensor Visitworkshop

There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

_ _ _Cruise control

The activation conditions for cruise control have not been met.You can only activate cruise control from speeds of 20 mph(30 km/h).

Cruise controlVisit workshop

Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

186 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Lane Keep. AssistTemporarilyUnavailableand theà indicator lamp lights up yellow.Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:RThere are no lane markings present.RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow orfog.RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:

- It is too dark.- The lanemarkings are worn or are covered, for example, by dirt orsnow.

RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 127).X Clean the windshield (Y page 231), particularly in the camera'sfield of vision.If theà indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is opera-tional again.

Lane Keep. AssistInoperative Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Blind Spot AssistInoperative Blind Spot Assist is faulty.X Have Blind Spot Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist Inoper‐ativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is faulty.X Have COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Recognition by the radar sensor systemcan be impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference from other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineX Clean the radar sensor system area.

Intervention Cross‐wind Assist Thed indicator lamp also flashes in the instrument cluster.Crosswind Assist has intervened perceptibly.

Display messages 187

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tire pres. Adjustpres.O

The pressure is insufficient in one ormore tires, or the pressures of theindividual tires differ significantly.X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it ifnecessary (Y page 249).

Tire pres.monitor inoperative

The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Tire pres.monitor currentlyunavailable

The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable due toradio interference or undervoltage.X Once the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure monitor isautomatically activated.

Tire pres.-monitor inoperativeNo wheel sensors

The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or morewheels because:Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheelelectronics.Rthemaximum temperature on one of thewheel electronics units hasbeen exceeded.Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Check tire(s)O

The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If the tirepressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheel positionis also displayed.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the tires.X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 262).X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 249).The display message disappears automatically after driving for afew minutes with the corrected tire pressure.

Warning Tire defectO

One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitor hasdetected the affected wheel, the wheel position is also displayed.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 262).

188 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÐSteering AssistanceFailure

The power assistance for the steering has malfunctioned. You need tosteer more forcefully.X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have thesteering checked immediately.

#Battery/AlternatorVisit workshop

The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defectivealternator or a torn poly-V-belt.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soonas possible by a qualified specialist workshop.

÷Electrically oper‐ated step

The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all.X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.X Open or close the sliding door again.X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push thestep in manually (Y page 66). Before stepping out, remind the pas-sengers that the step is missing.

1Hood open

You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood is notclosed.X Close the hood.

9Please enter PIN:

You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone.X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.

1Doors open

You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all the doorsare closed.X Close the doors.

¦Washer fluid Checklevel

The washer fluid level is too low.X Add washer fluid (Y page 220).

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+Replace key Visitworkshop

The key is no longer working.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

When switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warninglamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem. Only whenthese indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine has started or during thejourney has a malfunction occurred.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

· The red distancewarning lamplights up while thevehicle is inmotion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.Increase the distance.

· The red distancewarning lampflashes while thevehicle is inmotion. Addition-ally, an intermit-tent warning tonesounds.

You are approaching a vehicle ahead at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay particular attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

à The yellow LaneKeeping Assistindicator lamplights up whileyou are driving.

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.X Activate Lane Keeping Assist if necessary (Y page 144).

à The green LaneKeeping Assistindicator lamplights up whileyou are driving.

Lane Keeping Assist is operational.

à The red LaneKeeping Assistindicator lamplights up whileyou are driving.Additionally, anintermittentwarning tonesounds.

You are driving with the front wheel on a lane marking.

d The yellowASR/ESP® warn-ing lamp flasheswhile the vehicleis in motion.

G WARNINGESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels hasreached its tire grip limit.Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions. Donot use too much throttle.

X Drive slowly.

190 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

d The yellowASR/ESP® warn-ing lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

The all-wheel drive is activated/deactivated. When changing gear,ASR and ESP® are deactivated.After changing gear, ASR and ESP® are automatically reactivated.Engage/disengage the all-wheel drive (Y page 145).

d The yellowASR/ESP® warn-ing lamp flashesslowly while thevehicle is inmotion.

In vehicles with all-wheel drive the brake system is overheated.

G WARNINGThe performance of 4ETS is reduced. The braking power output maybe lower.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully and adapt your driving style to suit the road andtraffic conditions.

X When themessage is no longer displayed, 4ETS and normal brakingpower are available again.

d The yellowASR/ESP® warn-ing lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

ASR is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Activate ASR again. Exceptions (Y page 54).

h ! :b

The yellow ESP®, ABSand ASR/BAS indicatorlamps and the red brakesystem indicator lampare lit while the engine isrunning.

EBD is malfunctioning or deactivated due to undervoltage or malfunc-tion.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you apply thebrakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking sit-uations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe themessages inthe display (Y page 173).

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b The red brake sys-tem indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine is run-ning.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the expansion tank.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe themessages inthe display (Y page 173).

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the brake fluid level in the expansion tank (Y page 219).X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on!X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

b When towing atrailer: the redbrake systemindicator lamp islit while theengine is running.Additionally, awarning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe brake force booster in the trailer is faulty.The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle could change.There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losing control overthe truck/trailer combination.There is a risk of an accident.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe themessages inthe display (Y page 173).

X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

: The yellowASR/BAS indica-tor lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.The engine power output may be reduced.

G WARNINGThe driven wheels can spin when accelerating.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

: The yellowASR/BAS indica-tor lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without elec-tronic support.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is a risk of an accident.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

192 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

: The yellowASR/BAS indica-tor lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGThe brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

! The yellow ABSindicator lamp islit while theengine is running.

ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction or is temporarily unavailable.ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also unavailable asa result.Self-diagnosis may not be complete, or the battery may not be charg-ing.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if thebrakes are applied with maximum force.This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired.The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the indi-cator lamp goes out.

If the indicator lamp does not go out:X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

å The yellow DEFindicator lamp islit while theengine is running.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment ismalfunctioning or the current DieselExhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the range.X Observe the messages in the display.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h The yellow ESP®indicator lamp islit while theengine is running.

ESP® is deactivated due to undervoltage or a malfunction. As a result,cruise control has also been deactivated.Engine power output may be reduced.The battery may not be being charged.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe themessages inthe display (Y page 173).

X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 The red warninglamp does not goout approx-imately 4 secondsafter the ignitionis switched on, orit lights up again.

The restraint systems have malfunctioned.

G WARNINGIf the restraint systems are malfunctioning, individual systems couldbe triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the eventof an accident.There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.X Drive on with care.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# The red batteryindicator lamp islit while theengine is running.

The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defectivealternator or a torn poly-V-belt.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult the near-est qualified specialist workshop.

X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soonas possible by a qualified specialist workshop.

# The red batteryindicator lamp islit while theengine is running.

The battery is faulty.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# The yellow brakepad wear indica-tor lamp is lit afterthe engine is star-ted or while thevehicle is inmotion.

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

G WARNINGBraking performance can be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

194 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

4 The yellow engineoil level warninglamp lights upafter the engine isstarted or whilethe vehicle is inmotion.

The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.X Check the engine for oil loss.X If oil loss is detected: consult a qualified specialist workshop imme-diately.

X If no oil loss is detected: check the oil level and add engine oil(Y page 217).

4 The yellow warn-ing lamp flashesand the warningbuzzer soundsafter the engine isstarted or whilethe vehicle is inmotion.

On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level display additionallyappears in the display, e.g. – 2.0 qts (Canada: – 2.0 ltr).There is not enough or no oil in the engine.There is a danger of engine damage.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 217).X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectifiedimmediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

4 The yellow engineoil level warninglamp lights up andthe warning buz-zer sounds afterthe engine is star-ted or while thevehicle is inmotion.

The engine oil level is above the maximum level.There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 217).X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted as soon aspossible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified as soon aspossible at a qualified specialist workshop.

4 On vehicles with adiesel engine, theyellow warninglamp lights uprepeatedly duringthe journey.

There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

% The yellow cool-ant level warninglamp lights upwhile the engineis running.

The coolant level is too low.Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine couldoverheat and be damaged.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes(Y page 218).

X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 195

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? The red coolantwarning lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

The coolant temperature is too high.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

? The red coolantwarning lamp is litwhile the engineis running.

The coolant temperature is too high.If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads, thecoolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is switched onor the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for example, driving inmountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message con-tinues to be shown.

7|

The yellowreserve fuel warn-ing lamp is on. Atthe same time, 0appears in thefuel tank contentdisplay while theengine is running,although there isfuel in the fueltank.

The fuel filler cap is not closed.X Close the fuel filler cap.You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.

X If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectified imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

; The yellow CheckEngine indicatorlamp is lit up orflashes while theengine is running.

You have used up all fuel in the tank.The engine is running in emergency mode.X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 124).X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 120).X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling.Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does notneed to be checked.

; The yellow CheckEngine indicatorlamp is lit up orflashes while theengine is running.

The injection control is malfunctioning.The engine is running in emergency mode.Engine power output may be reduced.X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soonas possible.

In some states it is legally prescribed that after the Check Engineindicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist work-shop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.

196 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; The yellow CheckEngine indicatorlamp is lit whilethe engine is run-ning.

The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission rel-evant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can dam-age the exhaust gas aftertreatment.After the first message and under normal operating conditions, youcan drive on for up to approximately 500 mi (800 km). Then a warningtone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started another 16times.X Observe the messages in the display.X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

In some states it is legally prescribed that after the Check Engineindicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist work-shop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.

% If you turn theSmartKey to posi-tion 2 in the igni-tion lock, the yel-low preglow indi-cator lampremains lit forapproximately1 minute. Or theyellow preglowindicator lamplights up forapproximately1 minute whilethe engine is run-ning.

At extremely low temperatures, the engine may not start.There is a malfunction in the preglow system.X Have any malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

È The yellow air fil-ter indicator lampis lit while theengine is running.

The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filter is dirty.X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

h The yellow tirepressure monitorwarning lampcomes on.

G WARNINGThe tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss of pressurein at least one tire.X Stop the vehiclewithoutmaking any extreme steeringmaneuvers orbraking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions while doingso.

X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continues tolose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tires imme-diately.The warning light will go out after the flat tire has been rectified andyou have been driving for a few minutes.

X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe themessages inthe display (Y page 173).

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 197

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

h US vehicles only:The yellow tirepressure monitorwarning lampflashes for60 seconds andthen remains lit.

The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

: The yellow waterseparator indica-tor lamp is litwhen the ignitionis switched on.

Thewater that has collected in thewater separator of the fuel filter hasreached the maximum level.X Drain the water separator (Y page 220).

m The yellow waterseparator indica-tor lamp is litwhen the ignitionis switched on.

The fuel filter is dirty.X Have the fuel filter element replaced as soon as possible at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

¦ The yellowwasher fluid levelindicator lamp forthe windshieldwasher/head-lamp cleaningsystem is lit afterthe engine is star-ted or while thevehicle is inmotion.

The water level is too low.X Add washer fluid (Y page 220).

7 The red seat beltwarning lamplights up continu-ously or flashes. Awarning tone mayalso sound.

The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt.X Fasten seat belt (Y page 43).

b When the Smart-Key is turned toposition 2 in theignition lock, theyellow bulb warn-ing lamp lights up.

One of the exterior lighting bulbs is faulty, with the exception of theperimeter lamps and the trailer lighting.

i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can fail forall lamps with the exception of the turn signal lamps.

X Replace the faulty bulb as soon as possible (Y page 87).

1 The yellow "dooropen" indicatorlamp is lit whiledriving.

The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed.X Close the doors or hood.

198 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

1 The yellow "dooropen" indicatorlamp is lit.

The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not at all.X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.X Open or close the sliding door again.X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push thestep in manually (Y page 66). Before stepping out, remind the pas-sengers that the step is missing.

Ð The indicatorlamp for thesteering is litwhen the ignitionis switched on.

The power assistance for the steering has malfunctioned. You need tosteer more forcefully.X Carefully continue to a qualified specialist workshop and have thesteering checked immediately.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 199

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Stowage spaces and stowage com-partments

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

In addition, observe the information in the"Loading guidelines" section (Y page 208).

Glove box

Glove box (example: glove box with a lockable lid)1 Unlocked2 Locked= Glove box handleYou can lock and unlock the glove box using themechanical or folding key.X To open: unlock the glove box lid if neces-sary.

X Pull glove box handle= in the direction of thearrow.

? Card holderA Pen holderX To close: fold the glove box up and press ituntil it engages.

200 Stowage spaces and stowage compartmentsStow

ingandfeatures

Eyeglasses compartment in the over-head control panel

X To open: briefly press cover:.The eyeglasses compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press the eyeglasses compartmentinto the overhead control panel until itengages.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment isalways closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Dashboard stowage compartments

G WARNINGObjects protruding from the stowage com-partment above the front passenger front airbag could obstruct or even prevent deploy-ment of the front passenger front air bag. Thefront passenger front air bag may then fail toprovide the intended protection. There is anincreased risk of injury.Do not place any protruding objects in thestowage compartment above the frontpassenger front air bag.

! The right and left storage spaces may beloaded with a maximum of 11 lb (5 kg) each.

Stowage space (example: front passenger side)

Stowage compartment equipped with smartphoneconnections= USB port? 3.5 mm audio jack

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USBport and an AUX-in connection is installed inthe stowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for portable audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate audio system operatinginstructions).

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 201

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

Stowage compartment on the dashboard abovethe center console (example with lid)The stowage compartments on and in the centerconsole can be used to store small, light objects.X To open: pull release handle;.Lid: swings up.

X To close: close lid: and engage it.The lid of the stowage compartment mustremain closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion toensure that stowed objects are containedsafely.

Stowage space above the headliner! The entire stowage space may be loadedwith a maximum of 66 lb (30 kg).Do not place high, bulky loads in the stowagespace. You could otherwise damage the head-liner in the event of sharp braking.

On vehicles with a partition, stowage space:can only be loaded from the cargo compart-ment.

Stowage space above the windshield! The right and left stowage spaces may beloaded with a maximum of 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)each.

Stowage compartment (example: driver's side): Stowage compartment

Stowage compartment under the twinfront-passenger seat

Twin front-passenger seat (example: Cargo Van)You can stow various articles in the stowagecompartment under the twin front-passengerseat.X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the seatcushion out of front anchorage:.

X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and outof rear anchorage;.

X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.X To fold the seat cushion back: fold downthe seat cushion by the rear edge.

X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-rest into rear anchorage;.

X Push down on the seat cushion at the frontuntil it engages in front anchorage:.

202 Stowage spaces and stowage compartmentsStow

ingandfeatures

Stowage compartment under the rearbench seat

G WARNINGAlways secure the folded-up seat cushionwith the retainer loop. The seat cushion couldotherwise drop down unexpectedly andthereby cause injury to yourself or others.

G WARNINGWhen folding down the seat cushion, makesure that nobody can become trapped.

! The retainer loop is neither a grab handle forpeople to use nor a securing point for loads. Itmay tear if used incorrectly.

For vehicles with a crewcab, you can use thestowage compartment under the rear benchseat to safely store tools and other small items.X To fold up the rear bench seat: lift seatcushion: out of the front anchorage andfold it upwards in the direction of the arrow.

Retainer loops; are secured to the outer headrestraints.X Attach retainer loop; to hook= under-neath folded-up seat cushion:.

X To fold down the seat cushion: hold seatcushion: and detach retainer loop; fromhook=.

X Fold down seat cushion:.The seat cushion engages automatically.

Paper holder

X To open: press the top of paper holder:.

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 203

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot hold a container securewhilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilsttraveling, the container may be flung aroundand liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-pants may come into contact with the liquidand if it is hot, they may be scalded. You maybe distracted from the traffic conditions andyou could lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only use the cup holder for con-tainers of the right size. Always close the con-tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.

! Do not use the cup holder recesses as ash-trays. This could damage the cup holders.

Cup holders in the dashboard

Cup holder in dashboard stowage compartment(example: right-hand side of vehicle): Cup holder

Cup holders in the center console

Cup holders in the center consoleX To open: pull out ashtray compartment: bythe recess.Clamping arm; of the cup holder opens outfully.i Vehicles with the non-smoking packagehave an additional cup holder instead of theashtray.

X Place the beverage container into the cupholder and push clamping arm; against thecontainer.

X To close: push ashtray compartment: intothe center console until it engages.

Bottle holder

Bottle holders: in the front doors (example: co-driver's door)

204 Bottle holderStow

ingandfeatures

Ashtray

Ashtray in the center console

Ashtray in the center consoleX Pull ashtray compartment: out byrecess;.

X To open: fold cover= upwards.X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray bythe recesses on the left and right and pull theinsert out to empty it.

X To replace the insert: press it down into theholder as shown.Make sure that the insert is inserted correctly.Otherwise youwill not be able to close ashtraycompartment:.

Ashtrays in the passenger compart-ment

Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panelsX To open: fold out the ashtray.X To remove the insert: press retaining clip:down and remove the ashtray from the trim.

X To replace the insert: insert the ashtraydown into the trim and close it.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the key toposition 1 in the ignition lock.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket byits handle.

Cigarette lighter 205

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

12 V socket

Socket on the lower section of the center console: 12 V socket (25 A)The 12 V sockets for accessories are:Ron the lower section of the center console(12 V, 25 A)Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame (12 V,15 A)Rin the respective corner trim next to the reardoors in the passenger compartment (12 V,15 A)Rin the cargo compartment next to the left reardoor (12 V, 15 A)

You can use the 12 V sockets (15 A) for acces-sories with a maximum power consumption of180 W. You can connect accessories with amaximum power consumption of 300 W to the12 V socket (25 A) on the lower section of thecenter console.

i The sockets are supplied with power evenwhen the key is removed from the ignitionlock. If accessories, e.g. a coolbox, remainconnectedwhile the engine is not running, thebattery will discharge.

Mobile phone

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating mobile phones.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is cov-ering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14m)every second.You and others can suffer health-related dam-age through electromagnetic radiation. By usingan exterior antenna, a possible health riskcaused by electromagnetic fields, as discussedin scientific circles, is taken into account. Onlyhave the exterior antenna installed by a qualifiedspecialist workshop.We recommend the use of an approved exteriorantenna for operating the mobile phone. Only inthis way can optimal mobile phone receptionquality in the vehicle be ensured and mutualinterference between the vehicle electronicsand mobile phones minimized.Observe the legal requirements for each indi-vidual country.

Mobile phone pre-installationThe mobile phone pre-installation includes ahands-free system integrated into the vehicle.The microphone for the hands-free system isinstalled in the overhead control panel or in theoverhead stowage compartment together withthe front interior light.In order to use the hands-free system, you willneed a special bracket. The Sprinter accesso-ries include brackets for various mobile phonemodels.

i Mobile phone brackets which are availablefrom various manufacturers on the open mar-ket are not compatible with the Sprinter tele-phone system. You can recognize suitableholders for your mobile phone by the imprin-ted star and the B6 spare part number on theback of the bracket.

Detailed instructions for use can be found in theoperating instructions for the mobile phone

206 Mobile phoneStow

ingandfeatures

bracket and in the separate operating instruc-tions for the mobile phone pre-installation.

i The mobile phone battery is chargeddepending on the condition of charge and theposition of the key in the ignition lock. Themobile phone display indicates the chargingprocess.

Additional communications equip-ment

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating mobile communication equipment.Please remember, a navigation system does notsupply information on the load-bearing capacityof bridges or the overhead clearance of under-passes. The driver remains responsible forsafety at all times.You and others can suffer health-related dam-age through electromagnetic radiation. By usingan exterior antenna, a possible health riskcaused by electromagnetic fields, as discussedin scientific circles, is taken into account. Onlyhave the exterior antenna installed by a qualifiedspecialist workshop.You will find information on installing electricalor electronic equipment in the “Vehicle elec-tronics” section (Y page 271).

Installation for PNDmobile navigationdevicesYou can secure a personal navigation device(Personal Navigation Device PND) using a com-mercially available adapter.

PND connector (on the side behind the instrumentcluster)= USB port? 3.5 mm audio jack for the PND audio signal

(voice announcements)X Connecting the PND: connect the PND portsto the appropriate jacks in the vehicle.i You can also use USB port= and 3.5 mmaudio jack? for external audio sources.

The voice announcements are heard throughthe radio speakers when you start navigation.The audio source played until this point is thenmuted for the duration of the voice announce-ments.

i If you use audio devices or personal naviga-tion devices which have been recommendedby Mercedes-Benz, you can use all of thefunctions available, such as the mute func-tion.

You can obtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Additional communications equipment 207

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Loading guidelines

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAs a result of improperly placed or unevenlydistributed loads, the center of gravity of theload being transported may be too high or toofar back. This can significantly impair handlingas well as steering and braking characteris-tics. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the center of gravity ofthe load is:Rbetween the axlesandRas low as possible, near the rear axle.

G WARNINGWhen objects are unsecured or inadequatelysecured, they can slip, turn over or be thrownabout, striking vehicle occupants. This alsoapplies to:Rluggage or loadsRa rear bench seat which has been removedand is being transported in the vehicle in anexceptional case.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of braking maneuvers or abruptchanges in direction.Always stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about. Before traveling,secure objects, luggage or loads to preventthem slipping or tipping over. If you remove a

rear bench seat, it is advisable to store it out-side the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen the permissible wheel loads, axle loadsand/or the maximum permissible gross vehi-cle weight are exceeded, driving safety iscompromised. The handling as well as steer-ing and braking characteristics may be signif-icantly impaired. Overloaded tires may over-heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk ofan accident.When transporting a load, always observe thepermissible wheel loads, axle loads and themaximum permissible gross vehicle weightfor the vehicle (including occupants).

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

! If you are using a roof carrier, observe themaximum roof load andmaximum roof carrierload.

You will find information about the maximumroof load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 282) and information about roof carri-ers in the "Carrier systems" section(Y page 212).RDo not stack luggage or loads higher than thebackrests.RStow objects preferably in the cargo com-partment.RWhen transporting luggage, always use thecargo tie-down rings and a parcel net, if pres-ent.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteners whichare suitable for the weight and size of theload.

Always observe the operating instructions of therespective manufacturer when using suitableload securing aids or tie downs. In particular, theinformation on service life.

208 Loading guidelinesTransportin

gloads

Load securing aids and tie downs may not beused, for example, if:Ridentification marks are missing or illegibleRthere are yarn breakages, damage to bearingseams or other signs of tearingRthere are signs of shearing, deformation,pinching or other damageRthere is damage to clamping or connectingelements

Such load securing aids and tie downs are worn;they should not be used andmust be replaced. Ifyou use load securing aids or tie downs whichare worn, the load may not be sufficientlysecured and could cause damage to property.After an accident, the following must bechecked at a specialist workshop:RCargo compartment floorRLoad surfaceRCargo tie-down ringsRTie downsOtherwise, the load may not be correctlysecured the next time anything is stowed.Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the loadincreases the risk of injury in the event of anaccident. Observe the tips in the "Securing lug-gage/loads" (Y page 210) and "Load distribu-tion" (Y page 210) sections.

Before loading! The anti-slip mats cannot be used for secur-ing goods and must be replaced when theyshow signs of:RPermanent deformation and crushingRCrack formationRCuts

X Tire pressure: check the tire pressure andcorrect if necessary (Y page 246).

X Cargo compartment floor: clean the cargocompartment floor.The cargo compartment floor must be freefrom oil and dust, dry and swept clean to pre-vent the load from slipping.

X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on thecargo compartment floor if necessary.

During loading! On passenger van versions with maximumseating layout, the permissible rear axle loadwould be exceeded if the full payload were tobe loaded in the cargo compartment.

X Observe the gross axle weight rating and per-missible gross vehicle weight for your vehicle.Take into account that your vehicle's curbweight is increased if accessories or optionalequipment are installed. The maximum pay-load is thus reduced.

X Observe the notes on load distribution(Y page 210).The overall center of gravity of the load shouldalways be as low as possible, centered andbetween the axles near the rear axle.

X Secure the load (Y page 210).Observe the legal requirements of the countryin which you are currently driving.

Checks after loading

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases, such as carbonmonoxide. If the slidingdoor or rear door is open when the engine isrunning, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior, especially during the journey. Thereis a risk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe sliding door or rear door. Never drive thevehicle when the sliding door or rear door isopen.

X Securing loads: check that the load is securebefore every journey and at regular intervalsduring a long journey, and correct if neces-sary.

X Doors: close the sliding doors and rear doors.X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressuresaccording to the vehicle load (Y page 246).

X Driving style: adapt your driving styleaccording to the vehicle load.

Loading guidelines 209

Transportin

gloads

Z

Load distribution

General notes! Excessive loads on individual points of thecargo floor or on the load surface impair vehi-cle handling characteristics and could causedamage to the floor covering.

The overall center of gravity of the load shouldalways be as low as possible, centered andbetween the axles near the rear axle.On Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans:X Always transport loads in the cargo compart-ment.

X Always place the load against the backrests ofthe rear bench seat.

X Move large and heavy loads as far towards thefront of the vehicle as possible against therear bench seat. Stow the load flush with therear bench seat.

X Always additionally secure the load with suit-able load-securing aids or tie downs.

Observe the following notes:RDonot stack loads higher than the upper edgeof the backrests.RTransport loads behind seats that are notoccupied.RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied, insertthe seat belts crosswise into the buckle of theopposite seat belt.

Securing loads

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you attach the tie-down incorrectly whensecuring the load, the following may occur inthe event of abrupt changes in direction, brak-ing maneuvers or an accident:Rthe cargo tie-down rings may becomedetached or the tie-down may tear if thepermissible load is exceededRthe load may not be restrained.This may cause the load to slip, tip over or betossed about, striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Always tension the tie-downs in the propermanner and only between the describedcargo tie-down rings. Always use tie-downsdesigned specifically for the loads.

G WARNINGYou may not transport anyone in the cargocompartment or on the load surface. Never letmore people ride in the vehicle than there areseat belts available. Make sure everyone rid-ing in the vehicle is correctly restrained with aseparate seat belt. Never use a seat belt formore than one person at a time.

! Observe the information on the maximumloading capacity of the individual cargo tie-down points.If you use several cargo tie-down points tosecure a load, you must always take the max-imum loading capacity of the weakest cargotie-down point into account.If you brake hard, for example, the forces act-ing could be up to several times the weightforce of the load. Always use multiple cargotie-down points in order to distribute the forceabsorption. Load the anchorages evenly.

Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie-down points or tie-down rings.Please also refer to the notes about qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 27).Always observe the operating instructions or thenotes of the lashing strap manufacturer for theoperation of the lashing strap.Information about the maximum loading capa-city of the cargo tie-down points can be found inthe "Technical data" section (Y page 281).As the driver, you are responsible for ensuringthat:RThe load is secured against slipping, tipping,rolling or falling off. This applies both in nor-mal traffic conditions and if the vehicle mustswerve to avoid an obstacle, in the event offull brake application and on poor road surfa-ces.RThe applicable requirements and guidelinesrelating to load-securing practices must bemet.If this is not the case, this may constitute apunishable offense, depending on local legis-lation and any ensuing consequences.

210 Securing loadsTransportin

gloads

You should therefore observe the respectivelegal requirements for the relevant country.

Make sure that the load is secure before everyjourney and at regular intervals during a longjourney. Correct an incorrectly or inadequatelysecured load if necessary.You can obtain information about securing theload correctly from themanufacturer of the loadsecuring aids or tie down for securing the load.X Fill spaces between the load and the cargocompartment walls or wheel housings (form-locking). Use rigid load securing aids, such aswedges, wooden fixings or padding.

X Attach secured and stabilized loads in alldirections. Use the cargo tie-down points orcargo tie-down rings and the loading rails inthe cargo compartment or on the cargo area.Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods orlashing nets and lashing straps, that havebeen tested in accordance with currentstandards (e.g. DIN EN).Always use the cargo tie-down rings closest tothe load to secure it and pad sharp edges forprotection.Loads, and heavy loads in particular, shouldpreferably be secured using the cargo tie-down rings.i Tie downs tested in accordancewith currentstandards (e.g. DIN EN) are available at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Cargo tie-down points (example: Passenger Van): Cargo tie-down rings

Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van withoutloading rails): Cargo tie-down rings

Cargo tie-down points (example: Cargo Van withloading rails): Cargo tie-down rings; Load railsSecure loose loads with a tested lashing net or atarpaulin.X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulin toall available cargo tie-down points. Make surethat the retaining hooks are secured againstaccidental opening.

If your vehicle is equipped with loading rails;in the floor, you can place lashing rods directly infront of and behind the load. The lashing rodsdirectly absorb the potential shifting forces.Securing loads on the cargo compartment floorby lashing them down is only recommended forlightweight loads. Place non-slip mats (anti-slipmats) under the load to increase load security.

Securing loads 211

Transportin

gloads

Z

Installing/removing cargo tie-downrings for the load rails

G WARNINGIf the cargo tie-down ring is not properlyinstalled, it may slip or become detached inthe event of abrupt changes in direction, brak-ingmaneuvers or an accident. This may causeobjects, luggage or the load to slip, tip over orbe tossed about, striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury.Before using the cargo tie-down rings, alwaysmake sure they are properly installed andcannot be moved.

X To install: slide the cargo tie-down ringthrough a recess in the loading rail close tothe load until locking mechanism: engagesin the recess.i When you pull lockingmechanism: up andout of the recess, the cargo tie-down ring isable to move within the loading rail. Makesure that locking mechanism: is alwaysengaged in a recess.

X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seat-ing.

X To remove: pull locking mechanism: upand pull the cargo tie-down ring towards thelocking mechanism and out of the loading railthrough a recess.

Carrier systems

Roof carrier

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

You can find information about the maximumroof load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 282).

! Make sure that:Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tightenedin the sliding blocks to a torque of6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft (8 – 10 Nm)Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touch therails.Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area ofthe plastic caps.Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section.Rthe mounting rails in the interior are free ofdirt.Rthe screws are retightened evenly afterapproximately 300 miles (500 km).

We recommend that you only use roof rackstested and approved by Sprinter. These helpavoid vehicle damage.

! If you want to retrofit securing rails, have itdone at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcould otherwise damage the vehicle.

: Securing rails

212 Carrier systemsTransportin

gloads

It is possible to install a roof carrier if your vehi-cle is equipped with securing rails on the roof.Special mounting elements (grooved plates) areavailable as accessories.These mounting elements are available at anyauthorized Sprinter Dealer.

Ladder carrier

Example: ladder rack on Chassis Cab: Front ladder rack; Rear ladder rackPay attention to the important safety notes inthe "Loading guidelines" section (Y page 208).You can find information about the maximumladder rack load in the "Technical data" section(Y page 212).You will find information about cleaning andcare in the "Notes on care" (Y page 229) and"Power washers" (Y page 230) sections.

Carrier systems 213

Transportin

gloads

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.

If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe fuel injection system operates with a highvoltage. If you touch the live components, youcould receive an electric shock. There is a riskof injury.Never touch components of the fuel injectionsystem when the ignition is switched on.

The live components of the fuel injection systemare, for example, the injectors.

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

If you have to carry out work in the engine com-partment, only touch the following components:RHoodROil dipstickREngine oil filler neck capRWasher fluid reservoir capRCoolant expansion tank cap

Opening the hood! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

214 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Release handle for the hoodX Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Pull release handle: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap and push lever; on thehood catch up.

X Swing the hood up until support strut=engages and the hood is supported.

Closing the hood

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it could tip forwardduring rapid deceleration of the vehicle andhit persons or objects within its path. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, always make sure that the hood isclosed and locked completely before drivingoff.

If the hood is not locked and you are alreadydriving at walking pace:Rthe yellow1 indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes on for vehicles withoutsteering-wheel buttons.Rthe1 Hood open display appears for vehi-cles with steering-wheel buttons.

! When you press the support strut back,make sure that you do not press it against thedetent position and cause it to bend.

! Do not use your hands to push the hooddown. You could damage it otherwise.

X Lift the hood slightly.X Press support strut= towards the back.X Lower the hood and allow it to fall withmomentum from a height of approximately1 ft (30 cm).The hood locks audibly.

X Check that the hood is correctly locked.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. If the hood is not correctlyengaged, open the hood again. Let the hoodfall with a little more momentum.

Engine compartment 215

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Overview of the engine compartment

Example: engine: Coolant expansion tank cap (Y page 218); DEF filler neck cap (Y page 126)= Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 216)? Brake fluid expansion tank cap

(Y page 219)A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 220)Regularly check the fluid level and the assemblyfor leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oil flecks onthe vehicle parking space, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.

Engine oil

General notes! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of opera-tion and its quality and volume are graduallydiminished. Regularly check the oil level, andtop up or have it replaced as needed.

Observe the information on engine oils and oilconsumption in the "Technical data" section(Y page 277).You can check the oil level in the engine:Ron the display of the on-board computerRwith the oil dipstick

Checking the oil level shown in the dis-playIf at extremely low temperatures no engine oillevel is displayed after 5 minutes, repeat theengine oil level check after another 5 minutes.If an oil level reading is still not displayed, checkthe engine oil level with the dipstick(Y page 217). Have the engine oil level checkedat a qualified specialist workshop.

Only check the oil level when the engine is atnormal operating temperature.X Park the vehicle on a level surface.X Switch off the engine.X Wait 5 minutes.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.The display is activated.

X Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:press the4 menu button on the instrumentcluster (Y page 33) repeatedly until the dis-play shows the1 symbol.The --:-- display message appears in thedisplay while the engine oil level measure-ment is running.

X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:press theË service button on the instrumentcluster (Y page 33).The4 Engine oil level Measuringin progress display message appears in thedisplay while the engine oil level measure-ment is in progress.

Display message for vehicles without steer-ing-wheel buttons: the display may show thefollowing messages after the engine oil levelmeasurement.

1 Action

OK X Do not add oil.

– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oilshown (Y page 218).

X Check the engine oil levelagain after a few minutes.

– 1.5 qts– 2.0 qtsHI The oil level is too high.

X Have excess oil removed.

Measurement units in the display:Rqts USA onlyRltr Canada onlyDisplay message for vehicles with steering-wheel buttons: the display may show the fol-lowingmessages after the engine oil level meas-urement.

1 Action

Engine oillevel OKX Do not add oil.

216 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Engine oilAdd1.0 quartX Add the amount of oilshown (Y page 218).

X Check the engine oil levelagain after a few minutes.Engine oilAdd1.5 quarts

Engine oilAdd2.0 quartsEngine oillevelReduce oillevel

The oil level is too high.X Have excess oil removed.

Eng. oillev. Turnignitionon forlevel

X Turn the key to position2 inthe ignition lock.

Observewait.periodX Repeat the engine oilmeasurement after about5minutes if the engine is atnormal operating tempera-ture.

X Repeat the engine oilmeasurement after about30 minutes if the engine isnot at normal operatingtemperature.

Engine oillevel Notwhen eng.running

X Switch off the engine whenit is at normal operatingtemperature and waitapproximately 5 minutesbefore measuring theengine oil level.

Measurement units in the display:Rqts USA onlyRltr Canada only

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

Example: 4-cylinder diesel engine

Example: 6-cylinder diesel engineFor vehicles with a red oil dipstick, only checkthe oil level when the engine is at normal oper-ating temperature:X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Switch off the engine.X Wait 5 minutes.For vehicleswith a yellowoil dipstick, only checkthe oil level when the engine is cold.X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Pull out oil dipstick:.X Wipe oil dipstick: using a lint-free cloth.

Engine compartment 217

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Insert oil dipstick: back into the guide tubeas far as it will go and remove it again.If the level is between minimum mark= andmaximum mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to or below mini-mummark=, open cap? and add engine oil(Y page 218).The difference in quantity between marks;and= is approximately 2 qt (2 l).

X Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube as faras it will go.

X Close the hood (Y page 215).OM651 4-cylinder diesel engine:At outside temperatures between 32 ‡ (–0 †)and 86 ‡ (30 †), the oil level can be checkedwhen the engine is cold.Measuring the engine oil when the engine is coldis less precise than measuring when the engineis at normal operating temperature.When the appropriate warning is shown in thedisplayX Add engine oil (Y page 218)orX Have engine oil siphoned off.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

! The alternator is located below the engineoil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto the alter-nator, there is a danger of alternator damage.Be very careful when adding engine oil.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Unscrew and remove cap?.X Add engine oil.X Replace cap? on the filler neck and tighten.When doing so, make sure that the capengages correctly.

X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick(Y page 217) or on the display (Y page 216).

X Close the hood.

Coolant

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level and/or fill the cool-ant if the vehicle is on a level surface and theengine has cooled down. The coolant tempera-ture must be below 122 ‡ (50 †).

! Check the engine cooling and heating sys-tem regularly for leaks.If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Take care not to spill any coolant on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

218 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Example: cap and coolant expansion tankChecking the coolant levelX Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further and remove it.X Check the coolant level.If the coolant reaches the maximum mark oncoolant expansion tank;, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.

Adding coolantX If the coolant drops under the minimummarkon coolant expansion tank;, add coolant tothe maximum mark.Observe the information on coolant mixtureratio and water quality in the "Technical data"section (Y page 280). To prevent damage tothe engine cooling system, use only approvedcorrosion inhibitor and antifreeze that com-plies with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise totighten.

X Start the engine.X After approximately 5 minutes, switch off theengine and allow it to cool down.

X Check the coolant level again and add coolantif necessary.

X Close the hood.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Also observethe safety notes in the "Service products andcapacities" section (Y page 273).

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-ber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come intocontact with brake fluid, rinse with waterimmediately.

Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 years at aqualified specialist workshop. Observe the infor-mation on brake fluid in the "Technical data"section (Y page 279).

Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g. weeklyor when refueling.

Engine compartment 219

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking the brake fluid levelX Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic aspossible on level ground.

X Switch off the engine.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Check the brake fluid level.The brake fluid level is correct if the level isbetween the MIN mark and MAX mark onbrake fluid reservoir:.

X Close the hood.

! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluid res-ervoir has fallen to the MIN mark or below,check the brake system immediately forleaks. Also check the thickness of the brakelinings. Visit a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does not correctthe malfunction.

Washer fluid

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

Example: washer fluid reservoir

Add windshield washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round. Observe the infor-mation on washer fluid in the "Technical data"section (Y page 281).Adding washer fluidX Mix the washer fluid to the appropriatemixingratio in a container beforehand.

X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Pull cap: on the washer fluid reservoirupwards at the tab.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X Press cap: onto the filler neck until itengages audibly.

X Close the hood.

Fuel system

Draining the fuel filter

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handling offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creatingsparks under all circumstances. Switch off theignition and auxiliary heating before carryingout work to the fuel system. Always wear pro-tective gloves.

H Environmental noteDispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi-ronmentally responsible manner.

! When the: indicator lamp lights up,drain the fuel filter with water separatorimmediately. Otherwise, the engine may bedamaged.

220 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

If the: indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes on, drain the fuel filter with thewater separator immediately.i We recommend that you have this mainte-nance work carried out at a qualified special-ist workshop.

X Park the vehicle safely and secure it from roll-ing away.

X Switch off the auxiliary heating system .X Switch off the engine.X Open the hood (Y page 214).X Place a suitable receptacle under drainhose:.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open drain plug; immediately until thewater/fuelmixture flows out of drain hose:.

X Screw in drain plug; as soon as approx-imately 0.2 qt (0.2 l) of thewater/fuelmixturehas been collected.The electrical fuel pump automatically haltsthe flow of the water/fuel mixture after30 seconds.

X After draining, turn the SmartKey back toposition 0 in the ignition lock.

X Dispose of the collected water/fuel mixturein an environmentally responsible manner,e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check drain plug;. The drain plug must beclosed.When the engine is running and drain hose;is open, fuel is lost through drain hose:.

X Close the hood (Y page 215).If the: indicator lamp does not go out afterdraining:X Drain the fuel filter again.X If the: indicator lamp does not go outafter draining for the second time, have thecause checked immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Vehicle interior

Air filter for the rear-compartment airconditioning! Regularly check the air filters for visible dirt.Clean or replace a dirty filtermat. The dirtmay

otherwise lead to damage to the air-condi-tioning system.

Filter magazine, located on the roof in the rearcompartmentAn increased amount of sand or dustmay collectin the air filter of the rear-compartment air con-ditioning when you drive on dusty or sandyroads.X To remove the filter mat: carefully prycover: out of recesses; and remove.

X Remove the filter mat from the air duct.X To clean the filter mat: wash the dirty filtermat with clear water.

X Leave the filter mat to dry.i The filtermatmust not be cleaned or dried ina machine.

X To install the filter mat: insert the filter matinto the air duct.

X Replace and engage cover:.

Maintenance

General notes

H Environmental noteObserve measures to protect the environ-ment when working on the vehicle. You mustobserve the legal requirements when dispos-ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. Thisalso includes all components, e.g. filters,which have come into contact with serviceproducts. Any qualified specialist workshopcan provide information about this.Dispose of empty containers, cleaning clothsand care products in an environmentally

Maintenance 221

Maintenance

andcare

Z

responsible manner. Comply with the instruc-tions for use of the care products.Do not run the engine for longer than neces-sary when the vehicle is stationary.

Before having maintenance and repairs per-formed, it is essential to read the materials rela-ted to the maintenance and repairs:Rthe applicable sections of the technical doc-umentation, e.g. the Operator's Manual andworkshop information.Rregulations such as industrial safety regula-tions and accident prevention regulations.

While working under the vehicle, you mustsecure the vehicle on jack stands with sufficientload capacity.Never use the jack as a substitute. The vehicle'sjack is intended only to raise the vehicle for ashort time when changing a wheel. It is notsuited for performing maintenance work underthe vehicle.Please also refer to the notes about qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 27).The scope and regularity of the inspection andmaintenance work primarily depend on theoften diverse operating conditions. Specialistknowledge beyond the scope of this Operator'sManual is required when carrying out testingandmaintenancework. Thiswork should only becarried out by trained staff.The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describes thescope and frequency of maintenance work andcontains additional notes on the New VehicleLimited Warranty and on service products.Maintenance services must be carried out inaccordance with the provisions and recommen-dations in the Maintenance Booklet. Not doingso could void the warranty claim and lead torefusal of goodwill gestures after the manufac-turer has submitted a damage report.

i Observe the notes on genuine Sprinter parts(Y page 29).

Service interval display

General notesA service that is due is displayed in the serviceinterval display about 1 month in advance. Amessage is then displayed while the vehicle is inmotion or when the ignition is switched on.

i The service interval display does not provideinformation about the engine oil level. Theservice interval display should therefore notbe confused with the5 engine oil leveldisplay.

The service due date is displayed in days ormiles (kilometers), depending on the total dis-tance driven.The symbols or letters on the service displayshow the type of service that is due.¯ or A for a minor service° or B for a major service

Service due date displayVehicles with steering wheel buttons: thefollowing messages may be displayed.R¯ Service A due in ... daysR¯ Service A due in ... mi (km)R¯ Service A Carry out nowVehicles without steering wheel buttons:the following messages may be displayed.R¯ for service AR° for Service BAdditionally, you will see the remaining distancein miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or the remainingtime in days (d).Service due date has been exceededVehicles with steering wheel buttons: if youhave missed the service due date, one of thefollowing messages appears in the display andwarning tone also sounds.R¯ Service A overdue by ... daysR¯ Service A overdue by ... km (km)Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: ifyou have missed the service due date, the¯or° symbol for the service flashes for10 seconds after the ignition is switched on. Aminus sign also appears in front of the servicedue date.

Calling up the service due dateX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.The display is activated.

222 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Vehicles without steering wheel buttonsX Press the4 menu button on the instrumentcluster repeatedly until the¯ or°symbol for the service appears in the display.Additionally, you will see the remaining dis-tance in miles (mi) or kilometers (km) or theremaining time in days (d).

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsX Press theV orUbutton on the steeringwheel until the standard display (Y page 164)appears in the display.

X Press the& or* button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the service messageappears in the display, for example:R¯ Service A in ... daysR¯ Service A in ... mi (km)

Battery

Important safety notesWork on the battery, e.g. removing or installing,requires specialist knowledge and the use ofspecial tools. Therefore, always have work onthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. You

should have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Further information can be found under "ABS"(Y page 53) and under "ESP®" (Y page 55).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The flammable gas mix is produced when thebattery is charged or when the vehicle is jump-started.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery are electro statically charged. Electrostaticcharging results, for example, from:Rwearing synthetic clothingRfriction between clothing and the seatRdragging or pushing the battery across carpetflooring or any other synthetic materialsRrubbing the battery with cloths or towels.Comply with the following safety precautionsand take protective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion. Explosive oxyhy-drogen is produced when batteriesare being charged. Only charge bat-teries in well-ventilated areas.Fire, open flames and smoking aretherefore prohibited when workingon the battery. Avoid creatingsparks.Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Wear acid-proof protective gloves. Ifskin or clothes are splashed withacid, neutralize the splashes imme-diately with soapy water or an acidneutralizer, and then clean the affec-ted areas with water. Consult a doc-tor if necessary.Wear eye protection. When mixingwater and acid, the liquid can splashinto your eyes. Rinse acid splashesto the eyes immediately with clean

Battery 223

Maintenance

andcare

Z

water and contact a doctor immedi-ately.Keep children at a safe distance.Children are not able to assess thedangers posed by batteries andacid.When handling batteries, observethe safety precautions and specialprotective measures contained inthis Operator's Manual.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

Observe the following notes:RRecharge the battery more frequently, if you:

- predominantly drive short distances- predominantly drive at low outside temper-atures

- park the vehicle longer than 3 weeksIn order for the batteries to achieve their max-imum possible service life, they must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the Smart-Key if you do not require any electrical con-sumers. The vehicle will then use very littleenergy, thus conserving battery power.RWhen replacing a battery, only use batteriesthat are recommended for use in Sprintervehicles.

RHave the battery removed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.RIf you leave your vehicle parked longer than3 weeks:- consult a qualified specialist workshop or- switch off the power supply using the bat-tery main switch (Y page 116) or

- disconnect the batteries (Y page 225).Otherwise, you need to check the battery'scondition of charge every 3 weeks, sincestandby power consumption can drain thebattery. If the battery voltage is lower than12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-tive discharging.Be sure to observe the notes on charging thebatteries (Y page 228).

Installation locationsYour vehicle may be equipped with three bat-teries, depending on the equipment version:RStarter battery in the battery case in the leftfootwellRAdditional battery in the engine compartmentRAuxiliary battery under the left-hand frontseat

Have the auxiliary battery removed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Installing/removing the floor cover-ing (starter battery)

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

224 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X To remove: remove screws= and take offtrim;.

X Remove floor covering:.X To install: insert floor covering: and alignwith the driver's seat base and the doorway.

X Put trim; in place and screw screws=back in.

Disconnecting/connecting thestarter battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

Disconnecting the starter battery! Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock. Firstly remove the bat-tery terminals. Otherwise, you could destroyelectronic components such as the alterna-tor.Always disconnect the starter battery in thebattery case in the left-hand side footwellfirst.

! Always disconnect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never swap the terminalclamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-cle electronics.

If the vehicle is expected to be out of use for over3 weeks, disconnect the batteries. This will pre-vent battery discharge caused by off-load cur-rent consumption.

Battery cover in the left footwellX Switch off all electrical consumers.X Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

X Remove the floor covering (Y page 224).X Loosen screws; and slide battery cover:in the direction of the arrow.The screws must protrude beyond the largerrecesses.

X Remove battery cover: upwards.

Battery 225

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Starter battery in the left footwellX First loosen and remove the negative terminalclamp so that it is no longer in contact withthe terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positive terminal.X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and fold itup to the side together with the pre-fuse box.

Reconnecting the starter battery! Always connect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never swap the terminalclamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-cle electronics.

X Fold the positive terminal clamp with the pre-fuse box down to the terminal.

X Connect the positive terminal clamp.X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.X Connect the negative terminal clamp.X Position battery cover: so that screws;are positioned over the large recesses.

X Slide battery cover: in the direction oftravel into the smaller recesses.

X Tighten screws;.X Install the floor covering (Y page 224).Carry out the following work after connectingthe battery:X Reset the side windows (Y page 71).

Removing/installing the starter bat-tery

Removing the starter battery

X Disconnect the battery (Y page 225).X Pull breather hose with connector bracket;from connection: on the degassing cover.

X Loosen the bolts holding retainer=, whichprevents the battery from moving around.

X Pull retainer= upwards.X Slide the battery from its anchorage in thedirection of travel.

X Fold the bar of the battery upwards andremove the battery from the battery case.

226 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

Installing the starter batteryX Insert the battery into the battery case.X Fold down the bar of the battery.X Slide the battery into its anchorage in theopposite direction to the direction of travel.

X Insert retainer=.X Tighten the bolts on retainer= which holdsthe battery in place.

X Attach breather hose with connectorbracket; to connection: of the ventilationcover.

X Connect the battery (Y page 225).

Disconnecting and connecting theadditional battery (engine compart-ment)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

Disconnecting the additional battery! Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock. Firstly remove the bat-tery terminals. Otherwise, you could destroy

electronic components such as the alterna-tor.Always disconnect the starter battery in thebattery case in the left-hand side footwellfirst.

! Always disconnect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never swap the terminalclamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-cle electronics.

Additional battery in the engine compartmentX Switch off all electrical consumers.X Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

X Open the hood (Y page 214).X First loosen and remove the negative terminalclamp so that it is no longer in contact withthe terminal.

X Remove the cover from the positive terminal.X Loosen and remove the positive terminalclamp.

Connecting the additional battery! Always connect the battery in the orderdescribed below. Never swap the terminalclamps. You may otherwise damage the vehi-cle electronics.

X Connect the positive terminal clamp.X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.X Connect the negative terminal clamp.X Close the hood.Carry out the following work after connectingthe battery:X Reset the side windows (Y page 71).

Battery 227

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Installing and removing the additionalbattery (engine compartment)

Removing the additional batteryX Disconnect the battery (Y page 227).X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer that pre-vents the battery from moving around.

X Remove the battery holder and take out thebattery.

Installing the additional batteryX Insert the battery into the battery case.X Insert the battery holder.X Tighten the bolts holding the retainer thatprevents the battery in the engine compart-ment from moving around.

X Connect the battery (Y page 227).

Charging

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up inthe instrument cluster when temperatures arelow, it is probably because the discharged bat-tery has frozen. Should this be the case, do notjump-start the vehicle or charge the battery. Theservice life of a thawed battery may be shorter.Start-up behavior may deteriorate, in particularat low temperatures. Have the thawed batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

! Only charge the installed battery with a bat-tery charger that has been tested andapproved by the distributor named on theinside of the front cover. This device allowsthe battery to be charged when it is installedin the vehicle. The vehicle's electronics mayotherwise be damaged.

A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. Only this device permits the chargingof the battery in its installed position. Onlycharge the installed battery with a batterycharger that has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz, using the jump-start connec-tion point in the engine compartment. Contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for infor-mation and availability. Read the operatinginstructions for your charger before chargingthe battery.The additional battery cannot be charged fromthe jump-starting connection point.Recharge the battery more frequently if you usethe vehicle mainly for short trips and/or drive atlow outside temperatures.X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in theoperating instructions for your batterycharger.

X If necessary, install battery. Observe thenotes on reconnecting the battery.

i Recharge uninstalled, out of service batter-ies every three months. This will counter self-discharging and prevent battery damage.

Care! Dirty battery clamps and battery surfacescause leak currents which lead to the batter-ies discharging.

228 BatteryMaintenance

andcare

! Do not use cleaning agents containing fuel.Cleaning agents containing fuel corrode thebattery housing.

! If dirt gets into the battery cell, battery self-discharge will increase and the battery maybe damaged.

The following points on battery care must beobserved:X Regularly check the battery terminals and thefastening of the negative cable to the chassisto ensure that they are firmly seated.

X Always keep the battery terminals and batterysurfaces clean and dry.

X Lightly grease the undersides of the batteryterminals with acid-resistant grease.

X Only clean the battery casing with a commer-cially available cleaning product.

Care

Notes on care

G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself tofall.

There is a risk of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-ble ladder.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-

rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

H Environmental noteOnly clean your vehicle at specially designedwash bays. Dispose of empty containers andused cleaning products in an environmentallyresponsible manner.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved for Sprinter vehicles.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle.Before washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, fold in the exterior mirrors andremove any additional antennas. Otherwise,the exterior mirror, antenna or the vehicleitself could be damaged.Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fullyfolded out again and that any additionalantennas are re-installed when you leave theautomatic car wash.

Care 229

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof are com-pletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehiclein an automatic car wash.After putting the vehicle through an automaticcar wash, wipe off wax from:Rthe rear view camera lens (Y page 232)Rthe windshieldRthe windshield wiper bladesThis will prevent smears and reduce wipingnoises caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements of the countryyou are currently in when washing by hand.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft car sponge.X Use amild cleaning agent, e.g. a car shampooapproved for use with Sprinter vehicles.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlets.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Under no circumstances use powerwashersin the vehicle interior. The pressurized waterand associated spray produced by the powerwasher could cause extensive damage to thevehicle.

! Observe the minimum distance to be main-tained between the nozzle of the high-pres-sure cleaner and the object to be cleaned:Rapproximately 2.2 ft(70 cm) when usinground-jet nozzlesRapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using 25°flat-spray jets and concentrated-power jets

Keep the water jet moving while cleaning. Toavoid causing damage, do not point the waterjet directly at:Rdoor jointsRbrake hosesRelectrical componentsRelectrical connectionsRsealsRdrive train, especially not at the intermedi-ate bearing of the propeller shaftRrear view cameraKeep a minimum distance of 1.6 ft(50 cm).

Cleaning the engine! Water must not enter intake or ventilationopenings. When cleaning with high pressurewater or steam cleaners, the spray must notbe aimed directly at electrical components orthe terminals of electrical lines.Preserve the engine after the engine has beencleaned. Protect the belt drive system fromexposure to the preservative agent.

Also observe the information under "Powerwashers" (Y page 230).

230 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove impurities immediately, where pos-sible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield unless the hood is closed. Oth-erwise, you could damage the hood.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

Before cleaning the windshieldX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lockor remove it.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield until you feel them engage.Before switching the ignition on again, foldthe windshield wipers back into position.

Cleaning the windowsX Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that isrecommended and approved for Sprintervehicles.

Exterior

Cleaning the wheels! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaningagents. They can cause corrosion on thewheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainersprings for the wheel-balancing weights.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

If you clean the wheels with a power washer,observe the safety notes for the power washer(Y page 230). You could otherwise damage thetires.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

Care 231

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Do not fold the windshield wipers away fromthe windshield unless the hood is closed. Oth-erwise, you could damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove the SmartKey.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield until you feel them engage.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold back the wiper arms before switching onthe ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic covers of the exterior light-ing with a damp sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. car shampoo for Sprinter vehicles,or with cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signal! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the sensors! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and donot scrub. You will otherwise scratch or dam-age the sensors.

If you clean the sensors with a power washeror steam cleaner, observe the informationprovided by the manufacturer regarding thedistance to be maintained between the vehi-cle and the nozzle of the power washer.

PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, leftside of vehicle)X Clean all sensors: in the front and rearbumpers with water, shampoo and a softcloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and donot scrub. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the lens of the reversing camera.When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pres-sure or steam cleaner, observe a minimumdistance of 1.6 ft (50 cm) to the rear viewcamera. Do not aim directly at the rear viewcamera. You could otherwise damage the rearview camera.

Rear view camera in the middle of the roof abovethe high-mounted brake lamp: Camera lensX Clean camera lens: with clean water and asoft cloth.

232 CareMaintenance

andcare

Make sure that you do not apply any wax tocamera lens: when waxing the vehicle. If nec-essary, remove the wax using water, shampooand a soft cloth.

Cleaning the sliding doorX Remove foreign objects from the vicinity ofthe contact surfaces and contact pins of thesliding door.

X Clean the contact surfaces and contact pinswith a mild cleaning agent and a soft cloth.

Do not oil or grease the contact plates and con-tact pins.

Steps

Cleaning the electrical stepClean the electrical step at least once a month.Make sure that no dirt accumulates in the hous-ing or on the step.X Extend the electrical step (Y page 66).X Close the sliding door until the door lockengages.The electrical step remains extended forcleaning.

X Clean the electrical step and the housing witha power washer.

X After cleaning, spray the step guides on eachside with silicone spray when the housing andelectrical step are dry.Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant.

X Retract the electrical step.

Access step in the bumper

Example: access step in the bumperPay attention to the important safety notes inthe "Notes on care" (Y page 229) and "Powerwashers" (Y page 230) sections.

Keep step in the bumper: free from dirt, suchas:RmudRclayRsnowRiceX Clean access step in the bumper: with apower washer.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch! Do not clean the ball coupling with a powerwasher. Do not use solvents.

! Observe the notes on care in the Operator'sManual for the trailer tow hitch and the ballcoupling manufacturer.

You can also have the maintenance work on theball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried outby a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior

Cleaning the interior! When using liquids to clean the vehicle inte-rior, observe the following points:RUnder no circumstances use power wash-ers.RMake sure that no fluids enter or remain ingaps and cavities.REnsure sufficient ventilation when clean-ing.RMake sure that the vehicle interior is com-pletely dry after cleaning.

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

Care 233

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Switch off the audio equipment and let thedisplay cool down.

X Clean the display surface with a commerciallyavailable microfiber cloth and cleaner forTFT/LCD displays.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use a mild detergent or careproducts and cleaning agents recommendedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-tor leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth.

Cleaning the trim elements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care products and clean-ing agents recommended and approved forSprinter vehicles.

Cleaning the seat covers! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean artifi-cial leather covers. If used often, a microfibercloth can damage the cover.

! Clean:Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois-tened with a solution containing 1% deter-gent, e.g. dish washing liquid.Rcloth covers with a microfiber cloth mois-tened with a solution containing 1% deter-gent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Wipe entireseat sections carefully to avoid leaving visi-ble lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type of dirtand how long it has been there.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

Remove any stains or dirt immediately. This willavoid residue or damage.X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headlinerX Use a soft brush or dry shampoo to removeheavy soiling.

234 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the curtains! The curtains must not be washed. Washingcould cause the curtains to shrink and losetheir fire-retardant properties. Always havethe curtains dry-cleaned.

Care 235

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit is in the stowage compart-ment in the footwell on the front-passengerside.The vehicle tool kit consists of:Ra towing eyeRa screwdriver with Torx, Phillips and slottedbits

If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheelbracket and a jack, the vehicle tool kit addition-ally contains:Ra lug wrenchRa wrenchRa pump lever rod

i The jack has a maximum weight of 7.5 kgdepending on the vehicle's equipment.The maximum payload of the jack can befound on the sticker on the jack itself.In the event of amalfunction, please contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Jack maintenanceX After use: clean all movable parts and greaseagain.

X Every six months: extend and retract thepiston fully.

Stowage compartment in the front-passenger footwell

Unlocking and removing the coverX Turn quick-release fastener: counter-clock-wise or clockwise2.

X Slightly raise and pull out the cover.

Removing the vehicle tool kit and the jackX Remove vehicle tool kitA.X Pull up quick-release lever= and unhook theretaining strap of jack?.

X Lift jack? upwards out of the holder.i When stowing away the jack, place it in theholder as shown in the illustration. Make surethat the retaining strap of the jack is hookedin and tensioned.

Inserting and engaging the coverX Slide in the cover and fold it down.X Press down quick-release fastener: until itengages.

236 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

Warning triangle and warning lamp

Removing the warning lamp

X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position2.The cover is unlocked.

X Lift up the cover.X Take warning lamp= out of the retainer.X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-releasefasteners to position1.The cover is locked.

Removing the warning triangle

Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seatbase

X Lift warning triangle: up and out of thebracket.

First-aid kit

X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position2.The cover is unlocked.

X Lift up the cover.X Take first-aid kit= out of the retainer.X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-releasefasteners to position1.The cover is locked.i Check the expiration date on the first-aid kitat least once a year. Replace any expired ormissing contents.

Where will I find...? 237

Breakdow

nassistance

Fire extinguisher

Removing the fire extinguisher

Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co-driver's seatX Pull tabs; upwards.X Take fire extinguisher: out of its holder.Please read the instructions on fire extin-guisher: carefully and familiarize yourself withits operation. Have fire extinguisher: refilledafter each use and checked every one or twoyears. It may otherwise fail in an emergency.Observe the legal requirements for each indi-vidual country.

Flat tire

Information on breakdown assistance in thecase of a flat tire can be found in the chapter"Wheels and tires" (Y page 262).

Jump-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

Do not use a rapid charging device to start thevehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from anothervehicle or from a donor battery using jumpercables. For this purpose, the vehicle has a jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment.The additional battery in the engine compart-ment is not suitable for jump-starting opera-tions. If your vehicle requires jump-starting, or ifyou use it to jump-start another vehicle, use thejump-starting connection point in the enginecompartment.When jump-starting, observe the followingpoints:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. Ifthe other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a donor batteryor a jump-starting device.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen.Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed frombatteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables that have a sufficientcross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach thebattery of another vehicle for a few minutesbefore attempting to start. This charges theempty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamps do not comeinto contact with other metal parts while thejumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contactwith parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.These parts move when the engine is startedand while it is running.

i Jumper cables and further informationregarding jump starting can be obtained atany qualified specialist workshop.

238 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Before connecting the jumper cablesOn vehicles with a battery main switch, checkwhether the battery main switch is switched on(Y page 116).X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever of the automatictransmission to position P.

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. audioequipment, blower.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lockand remove it (Y page 117).

X Open the hood (Y page 214).

Tow-starting and towing away

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on the gross vehicle weight can befound on the vehicle identification plate(Y page 272).

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could bedamaged.

! Observe the following points when towingwith a tow rope:RSecure the tow rope on the same side onboth vehicles.REnsure that the tow cable is not longer thanlegally permitted. Mark the tow cable in themiddle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm).This will make other road users aware thatthe vehicle is being towed.ROnly secure the tow cable to the towingeye.RObserve the brake lamps of the towingvehicle while driving. Alwaysmaintain a dis-tance so that the tow rope does not sag.RDo not use steel cables or chains to towyour vehicle. You could otherwise damagethe vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recoverthe vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

When towing away, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.It is preferable to have the vehicle transportedon a transporter or trailer instead of towing it.

Tow-starting and towing away 239

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The automatic transmission selector lever mustbe in the N position when towing the vehicle.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2Rcannot move the selector lever to position Non vehicles with automatic transmission

Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the auto-matic locking feature (Y page 64). You couldotherwise lock yourself out of the vehicle whenpushing or towing away the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

The fixture for the front towing eye is located in thebumper.

Rear towing eye under the bumper, attached to thechassisYour vehicle may be equipped with rear towingeye;. If you tow or tow-start a vehicle, attachthe towing device to rear towing eye;.If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towhitch, attach the towing device to the trailer towhitch (Y page 152).

Installing the front towing eyeX Take the towing eye and screwdriver from thevehicle tool kit (Y page 236).

X Press cover: and remove cover: from theopening.You will see the fixture for the towing eye.

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.X Insert screwdriver into the towing eye andtighten it.

Removing the front towing eyeX Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle toolkit.

X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye andturn the screwdriver counter-clockwise.

X Unscrew the towing eye.X Insert cover:with the lug at the bottom andpress it in at the top until it engages.

X Place the towing eye and screwdriver back inthe vehicle tool kit.

Towing away in the event of malfunc-tions

Front or rear axle damage on all-wheel-drive vehicles! For vehicles with all-wheel drive, all fourwheels must be raised for towing away. Oth-erwise, you may damage the transfer case.If the vehicle can only be raised by the frontaxle, you must remove the propeller shaftbetween the rear axle and the transfer case.Always use new bolts when installing the pro-peller shaft.

If the vehicle has front or rear axle damage, haveit transported on a transporter or trailer.

With transmission damage! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

i Only have the propeller shafts fitted orremoved by qualified, skilled personnel.

If the vehicle has transmission damage, have thepropeller shaft removed before towing away.

240 Tow-starting and towing awayBreakdow

nassistance

Towing with the front or rear axleraised

General notes! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi-cle is being towed with the front or rear axleraised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene anddamage the brake system.

! Always use new bolts when installing thepropeller shafts.

i Only have the propeller shafts installed andremoved by qualified, skilled personnel.

Observe the following before towing a vehiclewith a raised front or rear axle:Rthe information on towing in the event of mal-functions (Y page 240) andRthe important safety notes (Y page 239).If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle atthe front axle and if the rear axle is damaged,raise the vehicle at the rear axle.

TowingIf the front axle is raised, the vehicle may betowed a maximum of 30 miles (50 km). For atowing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), thepropeller shafts to the driven axles must beremoved.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lockand leave it in this position.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 83).

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X If the front axle is raised, do not exceed thetowing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) and thetowing distance of 30 miles (50 km).

Towing the vehicle with both axles onthe ground

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

! Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph(50 km/h). You could otherwise damage thetransmission.

i Only have the propeller shafts fitted andremoved by qualified, skilled personnel.

Before towing the vehicle, observe the follow-ing:Rthe information on towing in the event of mal-functions (Y page 240) andRthe important safety notes (Y page 239).

TowingYou may only tow the vehicle a maximum dis-tance of 30miles (50 km). For a towing distanceof over 30 miles (50 km), the propeller shafts tothe driven axles must be removed.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Leave the key in position2 in the ignition lock.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 83).

X Do not exceed the towing speed of 30 mph(50 km/h) and the towing distance of30 miles (50 km).

Recovering a vehicle that is stuck! When recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as pos-sible. Excessive tractive power could damagethe vehicles.

Tow-starting and towing away 241

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose ormuddy ground, recover the vehicle with theutmost care. This is especially the case if thevehicle is laden.Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a trailerattached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, usingthe tracks it made when it became stuck.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)

Vehicles with automatic transmission! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.

You can find information on jump-starting under"Jump-starting“ (Y page 238).

Electrical fuses

The fuse allocation chart and further informationon the electric fuses and relays can be found inthe "Fuse allocation chart" supplement.

242 Electrical fusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Important safety notes

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsContact an authorized Sprinter dealer if yourequire information on tested and recommen-ded wheels and tires for summer and winterdriving. Advice on purchasing and caring fortires is also available there.Information on tire and wheel dimensions andtypes as well as the recommended tire pressurefor your vehicle can be found in the "Tire pres-sure" section (Y page 252).This data can also be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar.Modifications to the brake system or wheels arenot permitted. The use of a spacer and brakedust shields is not permitted. This invalidatesthe general operating permit for the vehicle.

i Further information on wheels and tires canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop.

Operation

Information for a journeyIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tirepressures, and correct them, if necessary(Y page 246).While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,speed humps or similar elevations, try to do soslowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, thetires, particularly the sidewalls, can get dam-aged.

Operation 243

Wheelsandtires

Z

Regular wheel and tire checks

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle fordamage regularly, i.e. at least every two weeks,as well as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tirepressure. Pay particular attention to damagesuch as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 244). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not installanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved for yourvehicle by dealers listed on the inside of thefront cover. Do not install any other valve capsor systems, e.g. tire pressure monitor systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires,particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure if necessary (Y page 246).The service life of tires depends on various fac-tors, including the following:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRmileage

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular where

speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Bar marking: for tread wear is integrated intothe tire tread.Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned over the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth isapproximatelyá in (1.6mm). If this is the case,the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and renewingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 65 miles (100 km).

244 OperationWheelsandtires

RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after 6 years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to thespare wheel.

Operation in winter

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snowchains are stowed in the vehicle (Y page 246).Also observe the notes in the "Changing awheel" section (Y page 262).Regularly check the vehicle and remove snow orice when traveling in wintry conditions.An accumulation of snow and ice, particularlywhen frozen, caught in the area around the airintake slots, moving parts, the axles and thewheel arches may:Rrestrict air intakeRdamage vehicle partsRcausemalfunctions by restricting themobilityintended by the design (e.g. reduced possiblesteering input).

If there is any damage, inform a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tire. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause tears to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently. Wecannot accept responsibility for this type ofdamage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristicsmay

be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

Use winter tires or all-season tires at tempera-tures below 45 ‡ (+7 †). Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.For safe driving, useM+S tires of the samemakeand tread pattern on all wheels.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.If you install M+S tires that have a lower maxi-mum permissible speed than the maximum per-missible speed of the vehicle, affix an appropri-ate warning sign in the driver's field of vision.You can obtain this at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Operation in winter 245

Wheelsandtires

Z

Once you have mounted the winter tires:X Check the tire pressure (Y page 246).X Reactivate the tire pressure moni-tor* (Y page 251).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf you drive too fast with snow chains moun-ted, they may snap. As a result, you couldinjure others and damage the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.Observe the maximum permissible speed foroperation with snow chains.

When driving with snow chains installed, do notexceed the maximum permissible speed of30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the country-spe-cific laws and regulations for operation withsnow chains.

! Check the snow chains for damage beforemounting them. Damaged or worn snowchains may snap and damage the followingcomponents:RwheelRwheel housingRwheel suspensionFor this reason, you must use only snowchains that are free of defects. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mountsnow chains on steel wheels, you may dam-age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps fromthe relevant wheels before mounting thesnow chains.

Snow chains increase traction on roads inwintryconditions.For reasons of safety we only recommend usingsnow chains or traction aids that are approvedfor the Sprinter. The snowchains or traction aidsmust be of class U or meet the SAE type Uspecification. Information on snow chains isavailable at any qualified specialist workshop.When mounting snow chains, please bear thefollowing points in mind:RSnow chains cannot be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations.Whenmounting the

snow chains, note the permissible tire andsnow chain dimensions.RMount snow chains only in pairs and only tothe rear wheels. On vehicles with twin tires,mount the snow chains to the outer wheels.Observe the manufacturer's mountinginstructions.RVehicles with all-wheel-drive: snow chainsare not permitted on the front axle. There isnot sufficient space for commercially-availa-ble snow chains. Information about snowchains for all-wheel-drive vehicles can beobtained from an authorized Sprinter Dealer.ROnly use snow chains when the road is cov-ered by a layer of snow. Remove the snowchains as soon as possible when you come toa road that is not snow-covered.RThe use of snow chains may be restricted bylocal regulations. Observe the appropriateregulations before mounting snow chains.RActivate all-wheel drive before driving off withsnow chains (Y page 145).RWhen driving with snow chains installed, donot exceed the maximum permissible speedof 30 mph (50 km/h).RCheck the tension of the chains after a dis-tance of approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km).

You can deactivate ASR (Y page 54) when pull-ing away with snow chains mounted. This allowsthe wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-ieving an increased driving force (cuttingaction).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

246 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

* optional

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications shown on the sample Tireand Loading Information placard and tirepressure plate are examples. Tire pressuredata are vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data illustrated here. The tire pres-sure data applicable to your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard or tire pressure plate of your vehicle.

H Environmental noteCheck the tire pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.

General notesYou will find information on tire pressure for thevehicle's factory-mounted tires on the platesdescribed here.The recommended tire pressure can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placard4 orthe tire pressure table on the B-pillar on thedriver's side of your vehicle.Further information on tire pressure can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

Example: Tire and Loading Information placard4

The Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 254).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains recommended tire pressures: for coldtires. Recommended tire pressures: are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible speed of the vehicle.

Tire pressure plate

Example: tire pressure tableThe tire pressure plate is located on the B-pillaron the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 254).The tire pressure table contains recommendedtire pressures for cold tires. Recommended tirepressures are valid for the maximum permissi-ble load and up to the maximum permissiblespeed of the vehicle.

4 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg)

Tire pressure 247

Wheelsandtires

Z

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Use a suitable pressure gage to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked using the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pressurewhen the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours without direct sunlight on thetires, andRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

Tire temperature changes depending on theambient temperature, driving speed and tireload. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡(10 †), the tire pressure changes by approx-imately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this intoaccount when checking the pressure of warmtires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too lowfor the current operating conditions. If youcheck the tire pressure when the tires are warm,it results in a higher value than when the tiresare cold. This is normal. Do not under any cir-cumstances release the air in order to adjust thepressure to the prescribed value for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.

Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard5on the B-pillar on the driver's side, orRon the tire pressure plate on theB-pillar on thedriver's side of the vehicle

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires:

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires can:Rfail from being overheatedRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires can:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenly

5 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

248 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Radversely affect ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Maximum permitted tire pressure (example)Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. When adjusting the tire pres-sures always observe the recommended tirepressure for your vehicle (Y page 246).

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from the valuesin the illustration.

Tire valve

G WARNINGTire valve that are not approved for your vehi-cle by the distributor named on the insidecover page may result in a loss of tire pres-sure. This may affect road safety. There is arisk of an accident.Only use tire valve that are approved for yourvehicle by the distributor named on the insidecover page. Always make sure you have thecorrect tire valve type for the tires on yourvehicle.

! Do not screw additional weights (checkvalves, etc.) onto the tire valves. The elec-tronic components could thus be damaged.

Only for vehicles without a tire pressure moni-tor:For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tire valves that havebeen tested for use on your vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure manuallyIn order to determine and adjust the tire pres-sures, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish tocheck.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it with therecommended value on the loading informa-tion table or the tire pressure table(Y page 246).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to therecommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valve. Usethe tip of a pen, for example. Then, check thetire pressure again using the tire pressuregauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat the steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-

Tire pressure 249

Wheelsandtires

Z

flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor are equip-ped with sensors in the wheels that monitor thetire pressure of all four tires. The tire pressuremonitor monitors the pressure in all four tires;you set this pressure when you activate the tirepressure monitor. The tire pressure monitorwarns you when the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled on all wheels.

You should always adjust the tire pressureaccording to the vehicle load. Restart the tirepressure monitor if you change the tire pres-sure.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you if atire pressure is incorrect. Observe the notes onthe recommended tire pressure (Y page 246).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. following pen-etration by a foreign object. In this event, brakethe vehicle until it comes to a standstill. Do notcarry out any sudden steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowhwarning lamp in the instrument cluster for indi-cating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) orpressure loss (Canada). Depending on how thewarning lamp flashes or lights up, an underin-flated tire or a malfunction in the tire pressuremonitor is displayed:Rif theh warning lamp is lit continuously,the tire pressure on one or more tires is sig-nificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor isnot malfunctioning.RUSA only: if thehwarning lamp flashes for60 seconds and then remains lit constantly,the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

Only vehicles with steering wheel buttons: theon-board computer displays information on tirepressure. After a fewminutes of driving, the cur-rent tire pressure of each tire is shown in the on-board computer.USA only: if the tire pressure monitor is mal-functioning, it may be more than 10 minutesbefore the malfunction is shown. Theh tirepressure warning lamp flashes for 60 secondsand then remains lit. When the malfunction hasbeen rectified, theh tire pressure warninglamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gage are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. wirelessheadphones, two-way radios) is operated insidethe vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehicle, thiscan interfere with the operation of the tire pres-sure monitor.

250 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally (vehicles with steering wheel but-tons)

Tire pressure displayUsing the steering wheel buttonsX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press theV orU button repeatedlyuntil the standard display is shown(Y page 164).

X Press the9 or: button repeatedlyuntil the current pressure of the individualtires is shown in the display.

If the vehicle is parked for longer than20minutes or you then drive at less than 18mph(30 km/h), the Tire pres. displayedafter driving for several minutes mes-sage appears.

i The tire pressure value shown in the displaymay differ from those measured at a gas sta-tion using a pressure gage. The on-boardcomputer will generally give you a more exactvalue.

Tire pressure loss warning system

Vehicles with steering wheel buttonsIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one ormore tires, the on-board computerdisplays the yellow Tire pres. Adjust pres.warning message. Theh tire pressure losswarning lamp in the instrument cluster(Y page 197) flashes for about 60 seconds andthen remains lit.The pressure of the affected tire is highlighted inyellow in the on-board computer (Y page 173).If the tire pressure monitor detects a significantpressure loss in one or more tires, the on-boardcomputer displays the red Tire pres. Warn‐ing Tire defect warning message. Thehtire pressure loss warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 197) flashes for about 60seconds and then remains lit. An additionalwarning tone sounds.

The pressure of the affected tire is highlighted inyellow in the on-board computer (Y page 173).

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, thecurrently set tire pressures are taken as refer-ence values for monitoring.In most cases, the tire pressure monitor detectsthe new reference values automatically, e.g.after you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged wheels or tiresRinstalled new wheels or tiresHowever, you can also define reference valuesmanually as described here.Before restarting the tire pressure monitor:X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard or the tire pressure table on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 246).Observe the notes on tire pressure whendoing so (Y page 246).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor (vehi-cles without steering wheel buttons):X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the4 menu button on the instrumentcluster repeatedly until the display shows thefollowing message:+CAL- TPMS

X Press thef button on the instrument clus-ter.The display shows:OK TPMSThe tire pressure monitor activation processhas begun. The tire pressuremeasured for theindividual wheels are stored as the new ref-erence values, provided that the tire pressuremonitor considers them to be plausible.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press theg button or the4menu button onthe instrument cluster.The activation process is canceled automati-cally if 30 seconds elapse without input.

Tire pressure 251

Wheelsandtires

Z

Restarting the tire pressure monitor (vehi-cles with steering wheel buttons):X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Press theV orUbutton on the steeringwheel until the standard display (Y page 164)appears in the display.

X Press the9 or: button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the current pressure ofthe individual tires is displayed or the displayshows the following message:Tire pres. displayed after drivingfor several minutes

X Press the9 reset button on the instrumentcluster.The display shows the following message:

Monitor current tire pressure?X Press theW button on the steering wheel.The display shows the following message:Tire pres. monitor reactivatedThe tire pressure monitor activation processhas begun. The tire pressures measured forthe individual wheels are stored as the newreference values, provided that the tire pres-sure monitor considers them to be plausible.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press theX button on the steering wheel.

Tire pressure tableFront axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with apermissible front axle load of 3970 lbs (1801 kg), 4080 lbs (1851 kg), 4100 lbs (1860 kg) or 4410 lbs(2000 kg).

Tires/disc wheel Front axle load

3970 lbs(1801 kg)4100 lbs(1860 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

205/75 R 16 C 110/108R6.5Jx16 ET626

— 400 kPa(4.0 bar/58 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N5.5Jx16Half distance between centers: 4.94 in(125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q5.5Jx16Half distance between centers: 4.94 in(125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N6.5J x 16Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

— —

6 Vehicles with Super Single tires

252 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Tires/disc wheel Front axle load

3970 lbs(1801 kg)4100 lbs(1860 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

LT 245/75 R 16 120/116Q6.5J x 16Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

340 kPa(3.4 bar/49 psi)

— —

235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R)6.5J x 16Spare wheel for vehicles withSuper Single tires

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

Rear axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with apermissible rear axle load of 5360 lbs (2431 kg), 7060 lbs (3202 kg) or 7720 lbs (3502 kg).

Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load

5360 lbs(2431 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

7720 lbs(3502 kg)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N5.5Jx16Half distance between centers: 4.94 in(125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q5.5Jx16Half distance between centers: 4.94 in(125.5 mm)

— 380 kPa(3.8 bar/55 psi)

420 kPa(4.2 bar/61 psi)

LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N6.5J x 16Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

480 kPa(4.8 bar/70 psi)

— —

285/65 R 16 C 128/126N (121R)285/65 R 16 C 128/126 N (123 R)78.5J x 16 ET 63

— 450 kPa(4.5 bar/65 psi)

—

235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R)6.5J x 16Spare wheel for vehicles withSuper Single tires

— 520 kPa(5.2 bar/75 psi)

—

7 Super Single tires

Tire pressure 253

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillarTwo instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less

than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg):Tire and Loading Information placard: ison the B-pillar on the driver's side. Tire andLoading Information placard: shows thepermissible number of occupants and themaximum permissible load of the vehicle. Italso contains details of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tires mountedat the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is located onthe base of the driver's seat. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum Gross AxleWeight Rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceedthe maximum gross vehicle weight or the

maximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Tire and Loading Information placard

General notesOnly vehicles with a gross weight of less than10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar on the driv-er's side.

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

: Maximum number of seats; Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

ratingX Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight; is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The gross weight ofoccupants and luggage must not exceed XXXkilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo,luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-ble) must not exceed the specified value.

i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard illustration are only an exam-ple. The maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating is vehicle-specific and may dif-fer from that which is illustrated. You can findthe valid maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

254 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seats

: Maximum number of seats; Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

ratingMaximum number of seats: determines themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard illustration are only an exam-ple. The number of seats is vehicle-specificand can differ from the details shown. Thenumber of seats in your vehicle can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the maximum load

Individual stepsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 inaccordance with the "National Traffic andMotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be travel-ing in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 poundpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. For reasons of safety, that weight mustnot exceed the available cargo and luggagecargo capacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to tow atrailer behind your vehicle, the load on thetrailer is transferred to your vehicle. Pleaseconsult the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard, to determine how this reduces the avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

Example: Steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximumload of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using theactual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard .

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Loading the vehicle 255

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible cargo andtrailer load/nose-weight (maximumgross vehicle weightrating from the Tireand Loading Informa-tion placardminus thegross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò750 lbs(340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò540 lbs(245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) Ò150 lbs(68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 156).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details about this canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe driver seat frame of your vehicle(Y page 272).Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of thevehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed thepermissible gross vehicle weight.

Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-missible load that can be carried by one axle(front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

256 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, thetrailer load/noseweight is included in the loadalong with occupants and luggage. The trailerload/noseweight is usually approximately 10%of the gross weight of the trailer and its load.

What you should know about wheelsand tires

Tire labeling

Overview

: DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 259)

; Maximum tire load (Y page 259)= Maximum tire pressure (Y page 249)? ManufacturerA Tire material (Y page 259)B Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed index (Y page 257)C Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load bearing indexand speed index

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Design standard; Tire width= Nominal aspect ratio in %? Tire codeA Rim diameterB Load bearing indexC Speed indexGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one let-ter: that precedes the size descriptionIf "LT" precedes the size description (as shownabove): these are light truck tires according toU.S. manufacturing standards.If "C" precedes the size description: these arecommercial motor vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.Tire width: tire width; shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio= is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculatedby dividing the tire width by the tire height.

What you should know about wheels and tires 257

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire code: tire code? specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires. "D" represents diag-onal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Rim diameter: rim diameterA is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexB is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 254).Example:The load-bearing index 120 indicates a maxi-mum load of 3,042 lb (1,380 kg) for the tire. Iftwo load-bearing capacity indices are specified(as shown above), the first number states theload-bearing capacity for single tires, the sec-ond number the load-bearing capacity for twintires. For further information on the maximumtire load in kilograms and pounds, see(Y page 259).For further information on the load-bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 258).Speed rating: speed ratingC specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.Regardless of the speed index always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Index Speed rating

F up to 50 mph (80 km/h)

G up to 56 mph (90 km/h)

J up to 62 mph (100 km/h)

K up to 68 mph (110 km/h)

L up to 74 mph (120 km/h)

M up to 80 mph (130 km/h)

N up to 87 mph (140 km/h)

P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R over 106 mph (170 km/h)

i Not all tires that have theM+S identificationoffer the driving characteristics of wintertires. In addition to the M+S marking, wintertires also have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill therequirements of the Rubber ManufacturersAssociation (RMA) and the Rubber Associa-tion of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire trac-tion on snow. They have been especiallydeveloped for driving on snow.

Further information on the reading of tire infor-mation can be obtained at any qualified special-ist workshop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load rat-ing: may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire(Y page 257).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

258 What you should know about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 254).

i The actual values for tires are specific toeach vehicle and may deviate from the valuesin the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN inor on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complies with

the requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.Further information about retreaded tires(Y page 243).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked with "3208", was manufactured inweek 32 in 2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Definitions for tires and loading

Tire structure and characteristicsDescribes the number of layers or the number ofrubber-coated belts in the tire tread and the tirewall. These consist of steel, nylon, polyester,and other materials.

What you should know about wheels and tires 259

Wheelsandtires

Z

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of theUnited States Department of Transportation.

Average weight of vehicle occupantsThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regard to tread quality, traction and tem-perature characteristics. The quality gradingassessment is made by the manufacturer fol-lowing specifications from the U.S government.The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressures are the pres-sures specified for the tires mounted on thevehicle at the factory.The tire and load information table8 contains therecommended tire pressures for cold tires, themaximum permissible load and the maximumpermissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded tire pressure for cold tires under variousoperating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speedof the vehicle.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

Wheel rimThe part of the wheel on which the tire is moun-ted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating.The actual load on an axle must never exceedthe gross axle weight rating. The Gross AxleWeight Rating can be found on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the driver seat frame(Y page 272).

Speed indexThe speed index is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)GTW is the total of weight of a trailer and theweight of the load, accessories etc. on thetrailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight if applicable. The grossvehicle weight may never exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating (GVWR) specified on the vehi-cle identification plate at the base of the driver'sseat (Y page 272).

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permitted grossweight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight ifapplicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe driver seat frame (Y page 272).

Maximum weight of the laden vehicleThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are theequivalent of 1 psi. Another tire pressure unit isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load bearing index, a loadindex can be stamped onto the sidewall of thetire. It specifies the load-bearing capacity of thetire more precisely.

8 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).

260 What you should know about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum filling capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment if theseare installed on the vehicle, but does not includepassengers or luggage.

Maximum tire loadThemaximum tire load in kilograms or pounds isthe maximum weight for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (Pounds per square inch)Standard unit of measurement for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and width inpercent.

tire pressurePressure inside the tire applying an outwardforce to every square inch of the tire's surface.Tire pressure is specified in pounds per squareinch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. Tire pres-sure should only be corrected when the tires arecold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours without direct sunlight on thetires, andRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

Tire treadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

Tire beadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thetire bead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, a roof rack or a high-performance bat-tery, are not included in the curb weight and theweight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)A unique identification number which can beused by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is composed of themanufacturer identification code, tire size, tiremodel code and manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

TWR (permissible trailer drawbar load)The TWR is the maximum permissible weightthat may act on the ball coupling of the trailertow hitch.

Wear indicatorNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Distribution of the vehicle occupantsThe distribution of vehicle occupants over des-ignated seat positions in a vehicle.

Maximum permissible payload weightNominal load and goods/luggage load plus68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number ofseats in the vehicle.

What you should know about wheels and tires 261

Wheelsandtires

Z

Flat tire

General notesIf your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel,the spare wheel is under the rear of the vehicle(Y page 268).Information about installing a wheel can befound in the "Wheel change" section(Y page 263).

Changing wheels

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 263).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the tires according to the intervals inthe tire manufacturer's warranty book in yourvehicle documents. If no warranty book is avail-able, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier iftire wear requires. Do not change the directionof rotation.

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted.Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tirepressure monitor if necessary.

Diagram showing tire rotation for single and dualtiresSingle tires: if the tires are of identical dimen-sions, you can rotate both wheels on both thefront and rear axles so that the tires' originaldirection of rotation is maintained. On unidirec-tional tires, an arrow on the sidewall shows theprescribed direction of rotation of the tire.Twin rear tires: if the tires are of identicaldimensions, you can rotate the wheels on thefront axle and the inner wheels on the rear axlein pairs such that the original direction of tirerotation is retained. With unidirectional tires,you may rotate the outside wheels at the rearaxle from one side to the other.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. You will only gain these benefits if thecorrect direction of rotation is observed.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.You may mount a spare wheel against the direc-tion of rotation. Observe the time restriction onuse as well as the speed limitation specified onthe spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom contact with oil, grease and fuel.

262 Changing wheelsWheelsandtires

Mounting a wheel

Vehicle preparationX Stop the vehicle as far away as possible fromtraffic and on a level, firm and non-slip sur-face.

X If your vehicle poses a risk to approachingtraffic, switch on the hazard warning lamps.

X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the front wheels to the straight-aheadposition.

X Move the selector lever of the automatictransmission to position P.

X Switch off the engine.X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Makesure that the passengers are not endangeredas they do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the danger areawhile the wheel is being changed. Anyonewho is not directly assisting in the wheelchange should, for example, stand behind thebarrier.

X Place the warning triangle or warning lamp ata suitable distance.Observe legal requirements.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.i Observe the safety notes on parking in thesection on "Driving and parking"(Y page 127).

X On level terrain: place chocks or other suit-able objects under the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel tobe changed.

X On slight inclines: place chocks or othersuitable objects under thewheels on the frontand rear axles opposite the wheel to bechanged.

X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack from thefootwell on the front-passenger side(Y page 236).

X Remove the sparewheel from the sparewheelbracket (Y page 269). Observe the safetynotes in the "Spare wheel" section(Y page 268).

X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove the hubcaps.

X Assemble the lug wrench extension using themiddle rod and the rod with the largest diam-eter from the three-piece jack pump lever.

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lugwrench extension as far as it will go onto thelug wrench.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the wheel bolts/wheel nuts on the wheel to be changed byabout one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheelbolts/nuts completely.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

G WARNINGOn uphill and downhill slopes, the jack couldtip over with the vehicle raised. There is a riskof injury.Do not change wheels on uphill or downhillgradients. Notify a qualified specialist work-shop.

! Only position the jack on the jacking pointsintended for this purpose. You could other-wise damage the vehicle.

Changing wheels 263

Wheelsandtires

Z

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:RWhen raising the vehicle, only use the jackwhich Mercedes-Benz has specificallyapproved for your vehicle.RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise thevehicle for a short time when changing awheel. It is not suited for performing mainte-nance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Never disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,load-bearing underlay must be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in(3 cm).RNever place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RNever lie under the raised vehicle.RNever start the engine when the vehicle israised.RNever open or close a door when the vehicleis raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

! Only use the jack pump levermiddle rod andthe rod with the largest diameter as a lugwrench extension. Only slide the middle rodas far as it will go onto the lug wrench. Therods may otherwise bend and be distorted tosuch an extent that they can no longer beused as a pump lever for the jack.

! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring orthe differential case.

Hydraulic jackPreparing the hydraulic jackX Insert the third rod of jack pump lever: intothe lug wrench extension.Jack pump lever: is assembled.

X Close pressure release screw;.X To do this, use the flattened section on pumplever: to turn pressure release screw;clockwise to the stop.i Do not turn pressure release screw;morethan 1 or 2 full turns. Hydraulic fluid couldotherwise escape.

X Insert pump lever: into the recess on thejack and secure by turning it clockwise.

X Place the jack vertically beneath the jackingpoints described below.

Jacking point, front axleX Place the jack under the jacking point in frontof the front axle.

X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: unscrew jackspindle= counter-clockwise as far as it willgo.

264 Changing wheelsWheelsandtires

Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type2500)

Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type3500)X Place the jack under the jacking point in frontof the rear axle.

Jacking point, rear axle (example: Cab Chassis)Jacking point at the rear axle on chassis ver-sionsX Place the jack next to the front leaf springsupport beneath the jacking point.

Removing a wheel! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheelnuts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheelbolts and wheel nuts could otherwise be dam-aged when being tightened.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts.X On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove thewheel nut cover.

X Remove the wheel.

Installing the adapter

G WARNINGIf you tighten the adapter bolts when the vehi-cle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is arisk of injury.Make sure that the vehicle is properly pre-pared for a wheel change. Tighten the adapterbolts with particular care and attention.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 262).

G WARNINGIf you do not tighten the bolts of the adapter tothe specified tightening torque, the adaptermay come loose with the spare wheel. Thereis a risk of an accident.Tighten the bolts of the adapter to the speci-fied tightening torque. Have the spare wheelreplaced with a complete wheel and an extra-wide tire at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if youinstall the spare wheel, do not exceed themaximum speed of 40mph (60 km/h) and donot drive further than 65 miles(100 km).The transmission could otherwise be dam-aged by the difference in wheel rotationspeeds.

On vehicles with Super Single tires, you mustattach the narrow sparewheel to the rear axle bymeans of an adapter. The adapter is bolted tothe spare wheel using the adapter bolts fortransportation.The handling characteristics of your vehicle areaffected when driving with a spare wheel instal-led. After changing a wheel, drive to the nearest

Changing wheels 265

Wheelsandtires

Z

specialist workshop and have the spare wheelreplacedwith awheel and tire assembly that hasa Super Single tire.X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Unscrew the six adapter bolts on the sparewheel and remove the adapter.

X Tighten the adapter with the six adapter boltsevenly in a crosswise pattern through theouter holes on the wheel hub.

X Tighten the six adapter bolts on thewheel hubto a tightening torque of 177 lb-ft (240 Nm).

X Push thewheel onto the adapter and attach it.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 262).Only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts that havebeen designed for thewheel and the vehicle. Forsafety reasons, we recommend that you onlyuse wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have beenapproved for Sprinter vehicles and the respec-tive wheel.

! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheelbolts to mount the steel spare wheel. Usingother wheel bolts to mount the steel sparewheel could damage the brake system.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

: Wheel bolt for alloy wheel; Wheel bolt for steel wheelX Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Vehicles with Super Single tires: first attachthe adapter for the narrow spare wheel to thewheel hub (Y page 265).Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub oronto the adapter for the sparewheel and pushit on.Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub andpush it on.

Wheels with centering by wheel bolts:X Vehicles with alloy wheels: take the shortwheel bolts that secure the steel spare wheelout of the vehicle tool kit.

X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten themlightly.

For wheels with wheel nuts:X Front wheels with wheel nut covers: press thewheel nut covers onto the wheel nuts.

X Screw in the three wheel nuts over the fixingdiscs of the wheel nut cover.

X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are inthe middle of the holes.

X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts.X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.

266 Changing wheelsWheelsandtires

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Only use the jack pump levermiddle rod andthe rod with the largest diameter as a lugwrench extension. Only slide the middle rodas far as it will go onto the lug wrench. Therods may otherwise bend and be distorted tosuch an extent that they can no longer beused as a pump lever for the jack.

! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if youinstall the spare wheel, do not exceed themaximum speed of 40mph (60 km/h) and donot drive further than 65 miles(100 km).The transmission could otherwise be dam-aged by the difference in wheel rotationspeeds.

Tightening torque pattern:—B Wheel bolts or wheel nutsX Using the pump lever, slowly turn the loweringscrew on the jack through approximately onerevolution and carefully lower the vehicle(Y page 263).

X Put the jack aside.X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off thepump lever.The shortened pump lever serves as a lugwrench extension.

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lugwrench extension as far as it will go onto thelug wrench.

X Using the extended lug wrench, tighten thewheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern inthe sequence indicated (: toB).Tighten the wheel bolts to the following tight-ening torques:RSteel wheel 177 lb-ft (240 Nm)RAlloy wheel 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)Tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening torqueof 133 lb-ft (180 Nm).

X Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in againand close the pressure release screw.

X Vehicles with all-wheel drive: turn the jackspindle clockwise as far as it will go(Y page 263).

X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the vehicle again.i You can now install the hub caps on steelwheels with wheel bolts. The installing proce-dure depends on whether the hub cap acts asa trim that covers the whole wheel, or justcovers the center.

X Wheel with hub cap: position the opening forthe tire valve in the hub cap over the tire valve.

X Push the edge of the hub cap with both handsagainst the wheel until it clicks into place.Make sure the hub cap retaining catchesengage on the steel wheel.

X Wheel with central hub cap: position theretaining lugs of the central hub cap over thewheel bolts.

X Hit the center of the hub cap to engage it onthe wheel.

X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheelbracket (Y page 269).

X Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport thedefective rear wheel in the load area. The rearwheel is too large for the sparewheel bracket.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 246).

X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to thespecified tightening torque after the vehiclehas been driven for 30 miles (50 km).

When using awheel or sparewheel with a newornewly paintedwheel rim, have thewheel bolts ornuts retightened again after approximately 600to 3,000miles (1,000 to 5,000 km). Observe thespecified tightening torque.

Changing wheels 267

Wheelsandtires

Z

i Vehicles with the tire pressure monitor sys-tem: all mounted wheels must be equippedwith functioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combination

General notes! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended for Sprinter vehicles, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. We can therefore not guar-antee driving safety. Do not mount used tiresif you have no information about their previ-ous usage.

The recommended tire pressures can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard9on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRon the tire pressure table on theB-pillar on thedriver's side

The recommended tire pressure can also befound in the "Tire pressure table" section in thisOperator'sManual (Y page 252). Thewheel/tirecombination for your vehicle can be found onthe tire pressure table. Further information onwheel/tire combination can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.Check tire pressures regularly and only whenthe tires are cold. Observe the notes on the rec-ommended tire pressure (Y page 246).Follow the maintenance recommendations inthe tire manufacturer's warranty book in yourvehicle documents.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle:Rwith tires of the same size across an axle (leftand right)Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at agiven time (summer tires, winter tires)

Tires that have been specially designed andapproved for your vehicle are marked with MO(Mercedes-Benz Original). You can find thisidentification on the tires themselves and in thefollowing table.

i Not all wheel/tire combinations can beinstalled at the factory in all countries.

Spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristicsmaybe severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

When using a spare wheel of a different size, donot exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.

General notes! Check the spare wheel regularly to see thatit is secure and has the prescribed tire pres-sure.

The procedure for mounting the spare wheel isdescribed in "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 263).The following should be checked regularly, par-ticularly prior to long journeys:Rthe tire pressure of the spare wheel, whichshould then be corrected if necessary(Y page 246).Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracket.The spare wheel is located in a spare wheelbracket under the rear of the vehicle.Replace the tires after 6 years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to the sparewheel.

9 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

268 Spare wheelWheelsandtires

i If you have mounted a spare wheel, the tirepressure monitor (Y page 249) will not func-tion for this wheel. The spare wheel is notequipped with a sensor for monitoring tirepressure.

Removing and installing the sparewheel

Cargo Van/Passenger Van

Bolt covers for the safety catches (example: CargoVan)RemovingX Open the rear doors.X Place a screwdriver into recesses; and thenpry off covers:.

X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool kit(Y page 236), unscrew the now visible boltscounter-clockwise by approximately 20 turns.

Spare wheel carrier under the vehicleX Slightly raise spare wheel bracketA andunhook left-hand retaining hook=.

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack andslide it into sleeve? on spare wheel bracketA.

X Raise spare wheel bracketA with the pumplever and unhook right-hand retaining hook=.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracketA down tothe ground.

X Lift spare wheel bracketA slightly and pullthe pump lever out of sleeve?.

Spare wheel in the spare wheel carrierX Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheelbeyond the rear edge of the spare wheel car-rier.

X Carefully remove the spare wheel from sparewheel bracketA.The spare wheel is heavy. When the sparewheel is removed, the center of gravitychanges due to the heavyweight of thewheel.The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.

InstallingX Carefully place the spare wheel onto sparewheel bracketA.The spare wheel is heavy. When you place thespare wheel onto spare wheel bracketA, thecenter of gravity changes due to the weight ofthe wheel. The spare wheel may slip down ortip over.

X Slide the pump lever for the jack intosleeve? on spare wheel bracketA.

X Raise spare wheel bracketA with the pumplever and attach right-hand retaining hook=.

X Slightly raise spare wheel bracketA andattach left-hand retaining hook=.

X Pull the pump lever out of sleeve?.X Using the lug wrench, tighten the retaininghook bolts by turning them clockwise.

X Replace and engage covers:.X Close the rear doors.

Spare wheel 269

Wheelsandtires

Z

Cab Chassis version

RemovingX Loosen fender nuts= manually and thenremove them.

X Loosen nuts; as far as the thread end.X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket? andunhook left-hand retaining hook:.

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack andslide it into the sleeve on the right-hand sideof spare wheel bracket?.

X Raise spare wheel bracket? with the pumplever and unhook right-hand retaininghook:.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket? down tothe ground.

X Lift spare wheel bracket? slightly and pullthe pump lever out of the sleeve.

X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheelbeyond the rear edge of spare wheelbracket?.

X Carefully remove the spare wheel from thebracket.The spare wheel is heavy. When the sparewheel is removed, the center of gravitychanges due to the heavyweight of thewheel.The spare wheel may slip down or tip over.

InstallingX Carefully place the spare wheel onto sparewheel bracket?.The spare wheel is heavy. When you place thespare wheel onto spare wheel bracket?, thecenter of gravity changes due to the weight ofthe wheel. The spare wheel may slip down ortip over.

X Raise spare wheel bracket? with the pumplever and attach right-hand retaining hook:.

X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket? andattach left-hand retaining hook:.

X Pull the pump lever out.X Tighten nuts;.X Put fender nuts= in place and tighten them.

270 Spare wheelWheelsandtires

Useful information

This Operator's Manual describes all models aswell as standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle that were available at the time of goingto print. Country-specific variations are possi-ble. Note that your vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the described functions. This alsoapplies to systems and functions relevant tosafety.Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops (Y page 27).

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-ics

G WARNINGAlways have work on the engine electronicsand related components carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi-cle's operating safety could be affected.

! Only have engine electronics and the corre-sponding parts, such as control units, sensorsor connector leads, serviced in a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicleparts may wear more quickly. This can lead toloss of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Installing electrical or electronicequipment

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

You and others can suffer health-related dam-age through electromagnetic radiation. By usingan exterior antenna, a possible health riskcaused by electromagnetic fields, as discussedin scientific circles, is taken into account. Onlyhave the exterior antenna installed by a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Electrical and electronic devices may have adetrimental effect on both the comfort and theoperating safety of the vehicle. If equipment ofthis kind is installed, its electromagnetic com-patibility must be checked and verified.If these devices are linked to functions associ-ated with resistance to interference, they musthave type approval. This applies to the device orits interfaces to the vehicle electronics, e.g.charging brackets.A telephone or two-way radio to be installed inthe vehicle must be approved. Further informa-tion can be obtained from any Sprinter Dealer.For operation of mobile phones and two-wayradios, Mercedes-Benz recommends connec-tion to an approved exterior antenna. This is theonly way to ensure optimum reception qualityinside the vehicle and to minimize mutual inter-ference between the vehicle electronics, mobilephones and two-way radios.The transmission output of the mobile phone ortwo-way radio may not exceed the followingmaximum transmission output (PEAK):

Frequency range Maximum trans-mission output(PEAK)

Shortwave(f < 50 MHz)

100 W

4 m waveband 30 W

2 m waveband 50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W

70 cm waveband 35 W

GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W

Vehicle electronics 271

Technicaldata

Z

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

Vehicle identification plate for vehicles or chassison the base of the driver's seatX Open the driver’s door.You will see vehicle identification plate:with the vehicle identification number (VIN),the paint code and the permissible weightdata.

Example: vehicle identification plate (US vehicles)

Example: chassis identification plate (US vehicles)

Example: chassis identification plate (vehicles forCanada); VIN= Paint code

Engine compartment? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the engine

compartment)A Engine number (stamped on the crankcase)B Emission Control Information and engine

oil10 instruction labelsX Open the hood (Y page 214).

Example: Emission Control Information label

10 Also observe the notes on engine oil for diesel engines in the "Technical data" section.

272 Identification platesTechnicaldata

i Such data is vehicle-specific and may differfrom that shown. Always observe the specifi-cations on your vehicle's identification plate.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on the crank-case. More information may be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Service products and capacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuels, e.g. dieselRAdditives for the exhaust gas aftertreatment,e.g. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oilRCoolantRBrake fluidRWasher fluidRClimate control system refrigerantsApproved service products comply with thehighest quality standards and are listed in theMB Specifications for Service Products. Onlyuse service products approved for the vehicle.This is an important condition for the warranty.You will recognize the approved service prod-ucts by the inscription on the container: MBApproval (e.g. MB Approval 228.5)Other identifications and recommendationsrefer to quality level or a specification according

to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5). Theyare therefore not necessarily approved.Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.Additives for approved service products are nei-ther required nor permitted. Approved fuel addi-tives are the exception. Additives can causeengine damage and must therefore not beadded to the service products.The use of additives is always the responsibilityof the vehicle operator. The use of additivesmayresult in the restriction or loss of your LimitedWarranty entitlements.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. Improper handling offuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creatingsparks under all circumstances. Switch off theengine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heatingbefore refueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Service products and capacities 273

Technicaldata

Z

When handling, storing and disposing of fuels,please observe the relevant regulations.

Tank contentsDepending on equipment, the total capacity ofthe fuel tank may vary.

Vehicle type Total capa-city

of whichreserve fuel

25003500

Approx-imately

26.4 US gal(100 l)

Approx-imately5.0 US gal(19 l)

All-wheel-drive vehi-cles

Approx-imately

24.6 US gal(93 l)

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flashpoint is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.When the engine is running, exhaust systemcomponents could overheat without beingnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasolinewith diesel fuel.

! Filter the fuel before transferring it to thevehicle if you are refueling the vehicle frombarrels or containers.This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel sys-tem due to contaminated fuel.

! You will damage the diesel engine if you donot refuel with ULSD or a diesel fuel with asulfur content of more than 15 ppm.

! Do not use the following:Rmarine dieselRheating oilRvegetable oilRgasolineRparaffinRkeroseneDo not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and donot use any special additives. This can other-

wise lead to engine damage. This does notinclude flow improvers. For further informa-tion, see "Flow improvers".

Usually you will find information about the fuelgrade on the filling pump. If there is no identifi-cation on the filling pump, consult a gas stationattendant.For more information about refueling(Y page 124).

Diesel at very low outside temperaturesG WARNINGIf you heat fuel system components, e.g. witha hot-air gun or open flame, these compo-nents could be damaged. This can cause fuelto escape and ignite. Depending on the typeof damage, fuel may also not escape until theengine is running. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Never heat fuel system components. Contacta qualified specialist workshop to rectify themalfunction.

Refill only with commercially available ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maximum sulfurcontent 15 ppm), which fulfills the ASTM D975standard.The flow properties of diesel may be inadequateat low outside temperatures due to paraffin sep-aration.

i Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sepa-ration can only be rectified by heating theentire fuel system. Park the vehicle in aheated garage, for example.

To prevent operating problems, diesel with bet-ter flow qualities is available during the wintermonths. You can obtain information at the gasstation or from your fuel supplier.Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheatingsystem. This improves the flow properties of thediesel by approximately 14.5 ‡ (8 †). ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used without riskof malfunction down to an outside temperatureof approximately 14 ‡ (Ò10 †).

Fuel additives! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to dieselfuel to improve its flow characteristics. Gas-oline or kerosene impairs the lubricatingproperties of the diesel fuel. This can result in

274 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

damage to the fuel injection system, forexample.

B20 fuels with bio-diesel content! Continuous use of B20 fuel can lead to fuelfilter clogging and injector deposits. This cancause engine performance degradation.Injector deposits can cause the engine oillevel to rise due to unburned fuel washing intothe oil pan. This can cause enginemechanicaldamage.To avoid damages and performance degrada-tion:RFill up with ULSD (B5 or less) wheneverpossible.RRegularly monitor your engine oil level ifyou use B20 fuel on a regular basis.RStrictly follow the oil change intervals quo-ted in the instrument cluster and withinyour maintenance booklet.RUse only engine oils and filters approved foruse in your vehicle.RIf you do not plan to drive your vehicle forseveral weeks, fill your vehicle’s fuel tank inadvance with ULSD fuel.

For more information, consult the gas stationstaff. The fatty acid methyl ester B5 or B20 labelon the fuel pump must clearly state that thestandard for ULSD is complied with. If the mark-ing does not make this clear, do not refuel fromthat pump.Do not refuel with any fuels that have not beenapproved for your vehicle.For more information about refueling(Y page 125).

Information on fuel consumption

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:

Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

Fuel consumption depends on:Rthe vehicle versionRthe style of drivingRthe operating conditionsRthe type or quality of the fuel usedThe vehicle will use more fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin city trafficRduring short journeysRon mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailerTo keep fuel consumption low, observe theadvice in the "Protection of the environment"section (Y page 25).The following components of the different vehi-cle versions influence fuel consumption:Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire condi-tionRbodyRtransmission ratios for the drive assembliesRadditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioningsystem, auxiliary heating system)

For these reasons, the actual consumption fig-ures for your vehicle may deviate from the con-sumption figures determined according to EUDirective 80/1268/EEC.Data concerning fuel consumption are recordedin the on-board computer; use the steeringwheel buttons to call up the Trip computermenu (Y page 171).

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

General notesH Environmental noteDispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-sible manner.

Service products and capacities 275

Technicaldata

Z

When opening the DEF tank filler cap at highoutside temperatures, ammonia vapors mayescape.Ammonia vapors have a pungent smell and pri-marily cause irritation of the:RskinRmucous membranesReyesYou may experience a burning sensation in youreyes, nose and throat, as well as coughing andwatering of the eyes.Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Avoid contactwith DEF.Do not allow DEF to come into direct contactwith your skin; it is hazardous to your health.Rinse any affected areas off with plenty of cleanwater. Consult a doctor if necessary.If DEF heats up, e.g. in direct sunlight, in the DEFsupply reservoir for some time to over 122 ‡(50 †), ammonia vapor will develop.To conform to emission regulations, you mustoperate the vehiclewithDEF and refill the supplyregularly. The engine management recognizesattempts to operate the vehicle without DEF,with thinned DEF or with another reducingagent. After previous warning messages, theengine management then prevents a furtherengine start.When the number of remaining engine starts is 0the engine management prevents the vehiclefrom being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph(8 km/h). The multifunction display shows theIdle Mode message.DEF consumptionDEF consumption depends on operational anddriving conditions and it is not necessary to waituntil the next scheduled service to replenish thefluid. Fluid should be added regularly to the DEFsupply reservoir during vehicle operation or, atthe latest, after receiving the first warning mes-sage via the on-board computer.

Low ambient temperaturesDEF freezes at a temperature of approximately12‡ (Ò11†). The vehicle is equippedwith aDEFpreheating system at the factory. Winter oper-ation is therefore also guaranteed at tempera-tures under 12 ‡ (Ò11 †).

i If you add DEF at temperatures below 12 ‡(Ò11 †) it is possible that the level is notshown correctly due to the frozen DEF.

Drive for at least 20minutes (heating phase inthe tank activated) and then stop the vehiclefor at least 30 seconds. The level is thenshown correctly.

Additives! Do not mix DEF with any additives and donot dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise, theexhaust gas aftertreatment may be damaged.Observe the MB Specifications for ServiceProducts, Sheet No. 352.0.Damage that arises through the use of addi-tives or tap water will invalidate the NewVehi-cle Limited Warranty.

Storage! Containers made of aluminum, copper, cop-per alloys as well as unalloyed or galvanizedsteel are not suitable for storing DEF. If storedin these types of containers, DEF could causeconstituents of these metals to dissolve andcause irreparable damage to the exhaust gasaftertreatment.Damage caused by such impurities in the DEFwill invalidate the New Vehicle Limited War-ranty.

Only store DEF in containers made of high-alloyCr‑Ni steel or Mo‑Cr‑Ni steel in accordance withDIN EN 10 088‑1/2/3 or plastic containersmade of polypropylene or polyethylene.

Purity! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by other ser-vice products, cleaning agents, dust, etc.)result in increased emissions, malfunctions,catalytic converter damage or engine dam-age.

The purity of DEF is essential to prevent mal-functions in the exhaust gas aftertreatment.If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. duringrepair work, the same liquid must not be used torefill the tank. Its purity is no longer guaranteed.

DisposalObserve country-specific laws and regulationswhen disposing of DEF.% Environmental noteDispose of DEF in an environmentally responsi-ble manner.

276 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

DEF supply reservoir contentTank contentsDiesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)11

Approximately 4.7 US gal (18.0 l)

Engine oil

General notes

! The bottles of the various engine oil typesare marked with ACEA (Association des Con-structeurs Européens d'Automobiles) and/orAPI (American Petroleum Institute) classifica-tions. Only use approved engine oils that con-form to the following MB Specifications forService Products and the prescribed ACEAand/or API classifications. Using engine oilsof another quality is not permitted and mayinvalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.The use of other, non-approved engine oils fordiesel engines can cause damage to the die-sel particle filter (DPF).

Use only engine oils that have been approved foryour vehicle according to the MB Specificationsfor Service Products.The MB Specifications for Service Products arevalid for your vehicle12

R228.51R229.31R229.51R229.52

These are high quality engine oils which have apositive effect on:Rengine wearRfuel consumptionRexhaust gas emissionsMulti-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAEclass (viscosity) may be used all year round, tak-ing the outside temperatures into account.

Engine oil viscosity! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oilused does not cover the outside temperaturerange in which you are operating the vehicle,it must be changed in good time, in particularbefore the cold season commences. Using anengine oil that does not have adequate tem-perature characteristics can lead to enginedamage.The temperature range information of the SAEclassification always refers to that of fresh oil.The temperature characteristics of the engineoil may deteriorate significantly due to agingin use, especially at low outside tempera-tures.We recommend that you change the engineoil before the cold season commences. Usean approved engine oil of the specified SAEclass.

Engine oil SAE classificationViscosity indicates the flow characteristics of afluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, thismeans that it is thick; a low viscosity means thatit is thin.Depending on the respective outside tempera-tures, select an engine oil according to SAEclassification (viscosity). The table displays the

11 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0.12 If the quality grade is not available for diesel engines, you may also add engine oils meeting the requirementsof MB Sheet No. 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).

Service products and capacities 277

Technicaldata

Z

SAE classification to be used. The low temper-ature characteristics of engine oils can notice-ably deteriorate during operation, e.g. fromaging, soot and fuel accretion. For this reason,regular oil changes using an approved engine oilfrom the suitable SAE classification are urgentlyrecommended.

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Miscibility of engine oils! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of usinghigh grade engine oils.

We recommend that you only add engine oil ofthe same quality grade and SAE class as usedwhen the engine oil was last changed.If, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in theengine is not available, top up using anotherapproved mineral or synthetic engine oil.If the quality grade is not available for dieselengines, you may also add engine oils meetingthe requirements in MB Sheet Number 228.5,229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is thenlimited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).Engine oils are differentiated according to:Rengine oil brandRquality grade (sheet number)RSAE class (viscosity)Subsequently have the engine oil changed at theearliest possible opportunity.

Interval for oil changeThe on-board computer automatically showsthe date for the next oil change as an eventmessage in the display.Only by using engine oil with a particularly highquality grade, e.g. according to Sheet Number228.51 of the Mercedes-Benz Specifications forService Products, can the maximum interval foroil change be achieved.We recommend having the oil changed at aqualified specialist workshop.

Engine oil for diesel engines

Product name/number

See the Maintenance Booklet.MB Sheet Number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51,229.52

Capacities! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

Oil change including oil filter

Vehicles Engine oil

4-cylinder Approximately3 US gal (11.5 l)

6-cylinder Approximately3.3 US gal (12.5 l)

Information about oil consumption! If the vehicle is predominantly used forshort-distance driving, this could lead to amalfunction in the automatic cleaning func-tion for the diesel particle filter. As a result,fuel may accumulate in the engine oil andcause engine failure.Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances,you should drive on a highway or on ruralroads for 20 minutes every 310 miles(500 km). This ensures sufficient regenera-tion of the diesel particle filter.

Depending on the driving style, the vehicle con-sumes a maximum of 1.0 qt (1.0 l) of engine oilover a distance of 620 miles (1000 km).Oil consumption may be higher if:RThe vehicle is new.RYoumainly operate the vehicle under arduousoperating conditions.RYou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Regularmaintenance is one of the preconditionsfor moderate rates of consumption.You can only estimate the oil consumption afteryou have driven a considerable distance.Check the engine oil level on a regular basis, e.g.weekly or each time you refuel (Y page 216).

278 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

Transmission and power steering oil

Automatic transmissionService product: automatic transmissionfluid

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

Shell ATF 3403/M-115MB Sheet No. 236.10

—

Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353MB Sheet No. 236.12

Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Rear axleService product: transmission oil

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

BP Energear Hypo DC80W-90MB Sheet No. 235.20

—

Mobil Delvac SyntheticGear Oil 75W-90MB Sheet No. 235.8

Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

SteeringService product: power steering fluid

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

Mobil ATF‑D,Exxon Mobil Corporationor equivalentMB Sheet No. 236.3

—

The steering is maintenance-free. Further infor-mation can be obtained at any qualified special-ist workshop.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and rub-ber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come intocontact with brake fluid, rinse with waterimmediately.

Only use brake fluids approved for Sprinter vehi-cles. Always check for the identification DOT 4plus.Information about approved brake fluids can befound in theMaintenance Booklet or obtained atany qualified specialist workshop.

Service product:brake fluid

Product descrip-tion and number

Intac B026ERBoiling point: 500 ‡(260 †)RWet boiling point:356 ‡ (180 †)

MB Sheet No. 331.0

Maintenanceinterval

2 years

i Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 yearsat a qualified specialist workshop.There is usually a notice in the engine com-partment to remind you when the next brakefluid change is due.

Service products and capacities 279

Technicaldata

Z

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Take care not to spill any coolant on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

When handling coolant, observe the importantsafety notes for service products (Y page 273).

Coolant additive with antifreezerequirements! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor that complies with MB Specificationfor Service Products, Sheet Number 325.Using other, non-approved antifreeze/corro-sion inhibitorsmay cause damage to the cool-ant system and reduce the engine's servicelife.

Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the followingtasks:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaises the boiling pointWhen the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled witha coolant mixture that ensures adequate anti-freeze/corrosion protection. Coolant must beused in the system all year round to ensure anti-corrosion protection and a raised boiling point –even in countries with high outside tempera-tures.To prevent damage to the engine cooling sys-tem, use only approved corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze that comply with the Mercedes-BenzSpecifications for Service Products.We recommend corrosion inhibitor/antifreezethat meets the requirements in MB Specifica-tions for Service Products Sheet Number 325.

Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-centration in the coolant every six months.The percentage of corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze additive in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine coolingsystem is protected against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

If there has been coolant loss, do not refill onlywith water. If the vehicle has lost coolant, addequal parts water and corrosion inhibitor/anti-freeze additive. The water used as part of thecoolant mixture must fulfill certain require-ments; these are usually fulfilled by drinkingwater. If the water quality is not sufficient, youmust treat the water.

Operating fluid: coolant

Product name/number

EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze,OLD WORLD INDUSTRIESMB Sheet No. 325.0

Zerex G05, The Valvoline CompanyMB Sheet No. 325.0

Zerex G48, The Valvoline CompanyMB Sheet No. 325.0

Glysantin G05, BASF AGMB Sheet No. 325.0

CapacitiesEngine cooling system

Coolant Approx. 10.75 qt(10.0 l)

280 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

RefrigerantThe air-conditioning system uses the refrigerantR‑134a. This refrigerant does not damage theozone layer.

Product name/number Maintenanceinterval

Refrigerant R‑134aMB Sheet No. 361.0

—

Further information can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Washer fluid

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMBWinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 273).

Mixing ratioAdd windshield washer concentrate to thewasher fluid all year round. Adapt the mixingratio to the ambient temperature.At temperatures above freezing:X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-ture of water and windshield washer concen-trate, e.g. Summerwash to prevent smearing.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix-ture of water and windshield washer concen-

trate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a danger offrost.This prevents washer fluid from freezing onthe windshield.

CapacitiesWindshield washer system with/withoutheadlamp cleaning system

Washer fluid Approx. 6.3 qt (6.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notesThe following section contains important tech-nical data for your vehicle. Your vehicle regis-tration documents contain vehicle-specific andequipment-dependent technical data such asvehicle dimensions and vehicle weights.

Cargo tie-down points and carrier sys-tems

Cargo tie-down points

General notes! Observe the information on the maximumloading capacity of the individual cargo tie-down points.If you use several cargo tie-down points tosecure a load, you must always take the max-imum loading capacity of the weakest cargotie-down point into account.If you brake hard, for example, the forces act-ing could be up to several times the weightforce of the load. Always use multiple cargotie-down points in order to distribute the forceabsorption. Load the anchorages evenly.

You will find further information about cargo tiedown points and cargo tie-down rings in the"Transporting" section (Y page 210).

Vehicle data 281

Technicaldata

Z

Cargo tie-down ringsThe maximum tensile load of the cargo tie-downrings is:

Cargo tie-downrings

Permissible nomi-nal tensile load

Passenger Vans 786.5 lbf(3500 N)

Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf(5000 N)

Load railsThe maximum tensile loads of the cargo tie-down points in the cargo compartment are:

Cargo tie-downpoint

Permissible nomi-nal tensile load

Load rails on cargocompartment floor

1124.0 lbf(5000 N)

Lower load rail onsidewall

562.0 lbf(2500 N)

Upper load rail onsidewall

337.0 lbf(1500 N)

The values specified apply only to loads placedon the cargo compartment floor if:Rthe load is secured to 2 cargo tie-down pointson the rail andRthe distance to the nearest load-securingpoint on the same rail is approximately 3 ft(1 m).

Roof carrier

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

G WARNINGIf you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-cle, the handling as well as the steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle.Secure the load to prevent it from slipping.

! The weight of any load carried on the roof,including the roof carrier, must not exceedthe maximum permissible roof load.The roof carrier supports must be mounted atequal distances.We recommend that you have a stabilizerinstalled on the front axle.

! For safety reasons, we recommend that youonly use roof carrier systems that have beentested and approved for the Sprinter. This willhelp to avoid damage.

The data is valid for a load distributed evenlyover the entire roof area. Maximum roof loadand minimum number of pairs of roof carriersupports on vehicles with:

Maximumroof load

Minimumnumber ofpairs of sup-

ports

Standardroof

660 lbs(300 kg)

6

High roof 330 lbs(150 kg)

3

Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro-portionately. The maximum load per pair of roofcarrier supports is 110 lbs (50 kg).Loading directions and other information con-cerning load distribution and load securing canbe found in the "Transporting" section(Y page 208).

Trailer tow hitch

General notesWe recommend that you have the trailer towhitch mounted at an authorized Sprinter Dealer.Use only a trailer tow hitch that has been testedand approved specially for your vehicle by the

282 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

distributor named on the inside of the frontcover. Only use a ball coupling that is approvedfor your vehicle and Sprinter trailer tow hitch.You can also find information on the permitteddimensions of the ball coupling on the identifi-cation plate of the trailer tow hitch.

You can obtain advice from a qualified specialistworkshop. Also observe the information on tow-ing a trailer in the "Driving and parking" section(Y page 152).

Maximum permissible weights and loads! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissiblegross combination weight is less than the total of the permissible gross vehicle weight and thepermissible trailer load. Exceeding the permissible gross combination weight can lead to damageto the drivetrain, to the transmission or to the trailer tow hitch.If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the relevant value for the permissible gross vehicle weightor the permissible trailer load is therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the vehicle may onlybe partially loaded.

Please make sure to comply with local trailer load regulations.The permissible weights and loads which cannot be exceeded can also be found:Rin your vehicle documents andRon the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle (Y page 272).Youwill find the basic values approved by themanufacturer in the following table. If the values differ,the lowest value applies.Make sure that you adhere to the weight restrictions by having the weight checked on a calibratedweighbridge.

Vehicletype

Permissi-ble grossweightGVWR

Grossfront axleloadGAWR(FA)

Gross rearaxle loadGAWR(RA)

Maximumpermissi-ble grossweight ofvehicle/trailer com-bination13GCWR

Trailer load,braked14

Maximumpermissi-ble noseweightTWR

2500 8550 lbs(3878 kg)

3970 lbs(1801 kg)

5360 lbs(2431 kg)

13550 lbs(6146 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)

500 lbs(227 kg)

3500 9900 lbs(4490 kg)Canada only

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14900 lbs(6759 kg)15

5000 lbs(2268 kg)15

500 lbs(227 kg)15

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)16

7500 lbs(3402 kg)16

750 lbs(340 kg)16

9990 lbs(4531 kg)USA only

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14990 lbs(6799 kg)15

5000 lbs(2268 kg)15

500 lbs(227 kg)15

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)16

7500 lbs(3402 kg)16

750 lbs(340 kg)16

13 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer.14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer, if the trailer is equipped with a separate functional brakingsystem.

15 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).16 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

Vehicle data 283

Technicaldata

Z

Vehicletype

Permissi-ble grossweightGVWR

Grossfront axleloadGAWR(FA)

Gross rearaxle loadGAWR(RA)

Maximumpermissi-ble grossweight ofvehicle/trailer com-bination13GCWR

Trailer load,braked14

Maximumpermissi-ble noseweightTWR

10141 lbs(4600 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7060 lbs(3202 kg)

14990 lbs(6799 kg)15

5000 lbs(2268 kg)15

500 lbs(227 kg)15

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)16

7500 lbs(3402 kg)16

750 lbs(340 kg)16

11030 lbs(5003 kg)

4080 lbs(1851 kg)

7720 lbs(3502 kg)

15250 lbs(6917 kg)

5000 lbs(2268 kg)15

500 lbs(227 kg)15

4410 lbs(2000 kg)

7500 lbs(3402 kg)16

750 lbs(340 kg)16

13 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer.14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer, if the trailer is equipped with a separate functional brakingsystem.

15 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).16 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

284 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata